Mediation Features User Guide

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

CSG Data Mediation Release 10.0

The information in this documentation is furnished for your use only, and no disclosure or use of any portion of these materials may be made without the express, written consent of CSG Systems International, Inc. ("CSG"). The information is subject to change without notice, and CSG assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this manual. This documentation is the property of CSG and its licensors, and it contains confidential and proprietary information of CSG. Copying, modifying, or distributing this documentation in violation of a license agreement, confidentiality agreement, United States Copyright Law, or the copyright law of any applicable foreign jurisdiction is expressly prohibited. CSG Data Mediation, CSG System Manager, CSG Systems, and the CSG Logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of CSG Systems International, Inc. and its affiliates in the United States and other countries. All other brand and product names are trademarks, service marks, registered trademarks, or registered service marks of their respective owners. Third-Party Software: This CSG product may contain or be distributed with third-party software. For information on any applicable third-party software, please refer to the Copyright Notices file that is bundled with your software. Portions of this software are copyrighted by DataDirect Technologies, 1991-2002. Copyright 2004 CSG Systems International, Inc. All rights reserved.

Contents
Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii Notational Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x Additional Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii 1 About Common Features Working with Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Working with Globals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Working with Value Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Working with Table Lookup Value Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Working with External Database Access Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Accessing External Database Access Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Building Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Working with Secondary Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Working with Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Working with Field Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Working with Record Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Working with Record-to-Module Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Working with Module Mappings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Working with Justification and Padding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 2 Mediation Feature Set Application Pages Mediation Features Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Open the Mediation Features Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Select an Active Mediation Feature Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Mediation Feature Sets Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Open the Mediation Feature Sets Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Go to a New Mediation Feature Set Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Go to an Existing Mediation Feature Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Mediation Feature Set Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Open a New Mediation Feature Set Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Open an Existing Mediation Feature Set Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Create a New Mediation Feature Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Update a Mediation Feature Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Expression Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Open the Expression Page from the Action Fields Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Open the Expression Page from the Data Fields Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Create an Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Update an Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

iv

Contents

Secondary Key Mapping Page (Correlation File Conversion and Correlation Store Conversion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Open a New Secondary Key Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Open an Existing Secondary Key Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Create a Secondary Key Mapping Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Update a Secondary Key Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 3 About the Package Manager Application Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Accessing the Package Manager Application Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Setting Up a Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Transferring File and Block Headers/Trailers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Working with Record Blocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Working with Record Structure Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Auditing a Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Installing a Package in the Application Stream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 4 Package Manager Application Pages Package Manager Applications Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Open the Package Manager Applications Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Go to the Create a New Package Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Go to the Package Manager Summary Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Create a New Package Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Create a New Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Package Manager Summary Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Open the Package Manager Summary Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Go to the Package Manager Application Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Go to the Package Manager Record Blocking Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 Go to the Package Manager Record Structure Mapping Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Package Manager Application Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Open the Package Manager Application Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Update the Package Manager Application Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Audit the Package Manager Application Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Go to Another Page in the Package Manager Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Package Manager Record Blocking Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Open the Package Manager Record Blocking Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Update the Package Manager Record Blocking Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Package Manager Record Structure Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Open the Package Manager Record Structure Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Update the Package Manager Record Structure Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

About File Format Conversion Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Accessing the File Format Conversion Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Setting Up a File Format Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Understanding the Three Types of File Format Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Working with Cross-Level Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Working with Modules and File Format Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Working with Dummy Records and Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Installing a File Format Conversion Definition in the Application Streams . . . .114 Working Exception Handling and File Format Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Understanding the Data Process Flow and File Format Conversion . . . . . . . . . .116

File Format Conversion Application Pages File Format Conversion Applications Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Open the File Format Conversion Applications Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Go to a New File Format Conversion Application Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Go to an Existing File Format Conversion Application Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 File Format Conversion Application Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Open an Existing File Format Conversion Application Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Open a New File Format Conversion Application Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Create a File Format Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 Update a File Format Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 Value Lists Page (File Format Conversion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Open the Value Lists Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Go to a New Value List Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Go to an Existing Value List Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Go to Another Page in the File Format Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Value List Page (File Format Conversion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Open a New Value List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Open an Existing Value List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Create a Value List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Update a Value List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Add a Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 Update a Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 Table Lookup Value Lists Page (File Format Conversion) . . . . . . . 143 Open the Table Lookup Value Lists Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 Go to a New Table Lookup Value List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 Go to an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

vi

Contents

Table Lookup Value List Page (File Format Conversion). . . . . . . . . 147 Open a New Table Lookup Value List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Open an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Create a Table Lookup Value List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 Update a Table Lookup Value List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Add a Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Update a Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 Field Mappings Page (File Format Conversion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Open the Field Mappings Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 Go to an Existing Field Mappings Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Field Mapping Page (File Format Conversion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Open the Field Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Add a Mapping Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 Update a Mapping Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 Record Mappings Page (File Format Conversion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Open the Record Mappings Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Go to a New Record Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Go to an Existing Record Mapping Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Record Mapping Page (File Format Conversion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Open a New Record Mapping Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Open an Existing Record Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 Create a New Record Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 Update a Record Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Secondary Key Mappings Page (File Format Conversion) . . . . . . . 173 Open the Secondary Key Mappings Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Go to a New Secondary Key Mappings Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Go to an Existing Secondary Key Mappings Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 Secondary Key Mapping Page (File Format Conversion) . . . . . . . . 177 Open a New Secondary Key Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179 Open an Existing Secondary Key Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 Create a Secondary Key Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 Update a Secondary Key Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 Rename a Secondary Key Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 Block Header/Trailer Mappings Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Open the Block Header/Trailer Mappings Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 Go to an Existing Record Mapping Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 Go to a New Record Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

vii

File Header/Trailer Mappings Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Open the File Header/Trailer Mappings Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 Go to the Record Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 Module Mappings Page (File Format Conversion). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Open the Module Mappings Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 Go to a New Module Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 Go to an Existing Module Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 Module Mapping Page (File Format Conversion). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Open a New Module Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 Open an Existing Module Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 Update the Module Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 7 About the Correlation Applications Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 Accessing the Correlation Conversion Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 Working with Correlation Store Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Working with Correlation File Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213 Working with Correlation IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 Defining Correlation Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 Working with Correlation Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Working with Control Data Fields and Control Action Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 Working with Output File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Working with Output Record Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Working with CORFILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 8 Correlation Mediation Features Application Pages Correlation Applications Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Open the Correlation Applications Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Go to the Correlation Store Conversions Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 Go to the Correlation File Conversions Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Go to the Correlation IDs Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 9 Correlation ID Application Pages Correlation IDs Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Open the Correlation IDs Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 Go to a New Correlation ID Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239 Go to an Existing Correlation ID Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

viii

Contents

Correlation ID Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Open a New Correlation ID Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Open an Existing Correlation ID Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 Create a Correlation ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 Update a Correlation ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245 Value Lists Page (Correlation ID Conversion). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Open the Value Lists Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Go to a New Value List Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249 Go to an Existing Value List Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Go to Another Page within the Correlation ID Conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251 Value List Page (Correlation ID Conversion). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Open a New Value List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 Open an Existing Value List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Create a Value List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 Update a Value List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 Add a List Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 Update a List Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 Table Lookup Value Lists Page (Correlation ID Conversion) . . . . . 261 Open the Table Lookup Value Lists Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 Go to a New Table Lookup Value List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Go to an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264 Table Lookup Value List Page (Correlation ID Conversion) . . . . . . 265 Open a New Table Lookup Value List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 Open an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268 Create a Table Lookup Value List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 Update a Table Lookup Value List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 Add a Table Lookup Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271 Update a Table Lookup Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 Output File Management Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Open the Output File Management Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 Update the Output File Management Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 Output Record Management Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Open the Output Record Management Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 Update the Output Record Management Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 Correlation Conversion Assignments Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Open the Correlations Conversion Assignments Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 Assign Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 Unassign Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

ix

Correlation Conversion Application Manager Page . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Open the Correlation Conversion Application Manager Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 Update Assigned Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 Source Assignments Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Open the Source Assignments Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 Assign Sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 Unassign Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 Output File and Record Management Expression Pages . . . . . . . . 293 Open the Output File Management Expression Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Open the Output Record Management Expression Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 Create an Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 10 Correlation File Conversion Application Pages Correlation File Conversions Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Open the Correlation File Conversions Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Go to a New Correlation File Conversion Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 Go to an Existing Correlation File Conversion Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 Correlation File Conversion Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Open a New Correlation File Conversion Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309 Open an Existing Correlation File Conversion Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 Create a New Correlation File Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 Update a Correlation File Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 Value Lists Page (Correlation File Conversion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Open the Value Lists Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 Go to a New Value List Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 Go to an Existing Value List Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 Go to Another Page in the Correlation File Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 Value List Page (Correlation File Conversion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Open a New Value List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Open an Existing Value List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Create a New Value List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 Update a Value List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 Add a Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 Update a Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326 Table Lookup Value Lists Page (Correlation File Conversion). . . . 327 Open the Table Lookup Value Lists Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 Go to a New Table Lookup Value List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 Go to an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Contents

Table Lookup Value List Page (Correlation File Conversion) . . . . . 331 Open a New Table Lookup Value List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 Open an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 Create a New Table Lookup Value List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 Update a Table Lookup Value List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337 Add a Table Lookup Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338 Update a Table Lookup Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339 Field Mappings Page (Correlation File Conversion). . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Open the Field Mappings Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342 Go to the Data Field Mapping Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343 Go to the Expression Page to Update a Control Action Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344 Data Field Mapping Page (Correlation File Conversion) . . . . . . . . . 345 Open the Data Field Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Update a Data Field Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 Go to a Control Action Field Expression Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 Create a Control Action Field Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 Update a Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Secondary Key Mappings Page (Correlation File Conversion) . . . . 353 Open the Secondary Key Mappings Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 Go to a New Secondary Key Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 Go to an Existing Secondary Key Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357 Record Mappings Page (Correlation File Conversion). . . . . . . . . . . 359 Open the Record Mappings Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360 Go to a New Record Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361 Go to an Existing Record Mapping Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362 Record Mapping Page (Correlation File Conversion). . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Open a New Record Mapping Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 Open an Existing Record Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366 Create a New Record Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367 Go to a Record Data Field Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368 Go to an Expression Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 Open the Record-to-Module Mappings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 Go to a New Record to Module Mapping Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 Go to an Existing Record to Module Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 Record Data Field Mapping Page (Correlation File Conversion). . . 373 Open the Record Data Field Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 Create a Record Data Field Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Update a Data Field Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

xi

Record to Module Mapping Page (Correlation File Conversion) . . 379 Open a New Record to Module Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 Open an Existing Record to Module Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 Create a Record-to-Module Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384 Go to the Data Field Mapping Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 Go to the Expression Page to Update a Control Action Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386 Record to Module Data Field Mapping Page (Correlation File Conversion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Open the Record to Module Data Field Mapping Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 Create a Data Field Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391 Update a Data Field Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 Module Mappings Page (Correlation File Conversion) . . . . . . . . . . 393 Open the Module Mappings Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 Go to a New Module Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395 Go to an Existing Module Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396 Module Mapping Page (Correlation File Conversion) . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Open a New Module Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 Open an Existing Module Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 Create a Module Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401 Go to the Data Field Mapping Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 Go to the Expression Page to Update a Control Action Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403 Module Data Field Mapping Page (Correlation File Conversion) . . 405 Open the Module Data Field Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 Create a Data Field Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408 Update a Data Field Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409 11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages Correlation Store Conversions Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Open the Correlation Store Conversions Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 Go to a New Correlation Store Conversion Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 Go to an Existing Correlation Store Conversion Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 Correlation Store Conversion Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Open a New Correlation Store Conversion Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418 Open an Existing Correlation Store Conversion Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419 Create a Correlation Store Conversion Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420 Update a Correlation Store Conversion Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

xii

Contents

Value Lists Page (Correlation Store Conversion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Open the Value Lists Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424 Go to a New Value List Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425 Go to an Existing Value List Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 Go to Another Page in the Correlation Store Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427 Value List Page (Correlation Store Conversion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Open a New Value List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 Open an Existing Value List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432 Create a Value List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433 Update a Value List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434 Add a List Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435 Update a List Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436 Table Lookup Value Lists Page (Correlation Store Conversion). . . 437 Open the Table Lookup Value Lists Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 Go to a New Table Lookup Value List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439 Go to an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440 Table Lookup Value List Page (Correlation Store Conversion). . . . 441 Open a New Table Lookup Value List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443 Open an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 Create a Table Lookup Value List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446 Update a Table Lookup Value List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Add a Table Lookup Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 Update a Table Lookup Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449 Secondary Key Mappings Page (Correlation Store Conversion) . . 451 Open the Secondary Key Mappings Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453 Go to a New Secondary Key Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454 Go to an Existing Secondary Key Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455 Record Mapping Page (Correlation Store Conversion) . . . . . . . . . . 457 Open the Record Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459 Update the Record Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 Go to a Record Data Field Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461 Go to an Expression Page to Update the Control Action Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462 Open the Record-to-Module Mappings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463 Go to a New Record to Module Mapping Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 Go to an Existing Record to Module Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465 Record Data Field Mapping Page (Correlation Store Conversion) . 467 Open the Record Data Field Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469 Create a Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470 Update a Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

xiii

Record to Module Mapping Page (Correlation Store Conversion) . 473 Open the Record-to-Module Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 Module Mappings Page (Correlation Store Conversion). . . . . . . . . 475 Open the Module Mappings Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477 Go to a New Module Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478 Go to an Existing Module Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479 Go to a New Module Trigger Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480 Go to an Existing Module Trigger Mapping Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Module Mapping Page (Correlation Store Conversion). . . . . . . . . . 483 Open a New Module Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 Open an Existing Module Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487 Create a Module Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 Update a Module Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 Go to a Data Field Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490 Go to an Expression Page to Update a Control Action Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491 Module Data Field Mapping Page (Correlation Store Conversion). 493 Open the Module Data Field Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495 Create a Data Field Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496 Update a Data Field Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497 Module Trigger Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 Open a New Module Trigger Mapping Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501 Open an Existing Module Trigger Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 Create a Module Trigger Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504 Go to a Data Field Mapping Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505 Go to an Expression Page to Update a Control Action Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506 12 External Database Access Definition Application Pages External Database Access Definitions Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509 Open the External Database Access Definitions Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510 Go to a New External Database Access Definition Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511 Go to an External Database Access Definition Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512 External Database Access Definition Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 Open a New External Database Access Definition Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515 Open an Existing External Database Access Definition Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516 Create an External Database Access Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517 Update an External Database Access Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

xiv

Contents

13

About File Format Definitions Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520 Working with File Formats and Mediation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522 Accessing the File Format Definition Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523 Defining a GRID File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526 Working with Data Field Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 Working with GRID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529 Working with GRID Field Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532 Working with Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534 Working with File Structures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536 Working with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 Working with Special Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540 Working with Module Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541 Working with Block Header/Trailers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542 Working with File Header/Trailers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544 Working with File Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546 Working with File Format & Structure Associations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 Auditing a File Format Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548 Troubleshooting a File Format Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549 File Format Audit Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551

14

File Format Definition Application Pages Fields Page (File Format Definitions). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567 Open the Fields Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568 Go to a New Field Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569 Go to an Existing Field Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570 Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571 Field Page (File Format Definitions). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 Open a New Field Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575 Open an Existing Field Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576 Create a Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577 Update a Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578 Structures Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579 Open a Structures Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580 Go to a New Structure Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581 Go to an Existing Structure Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

xv

Structure Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583 Open a New Structure Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585 Open an Existing Structure Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586 Create a Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587 Update a Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588 Add a Field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589 Update a Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590 Modules Page (File Format Definitions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 Open the Modules Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592 Go to a New Module Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593 Go to an Existing Module Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594 Module Page (File Format Definitions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 Open a New Module Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597 Open an Existing Module Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598 Create a Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599 Update a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600 Add a Field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601 Update a Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602 Module Supports Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 Open the Module Supports Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605 Go to the Create New Module Support Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606 Go to an Existing Module Support Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607 Module Support Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609 Open the Module Support Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611 Go to the Basic Module Support Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 Go to the Module Identification Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613 Go to the End of Module Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614 Create a New Module Support Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 Open the Create a New Module Support Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617 Create a Module Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618 Module Support Basic Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621 Open the Module Support Basic Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622 Update the Module Support Basic Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623 Module Support Module Identification Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625 Open the Module Support Module Identification Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626 Update the Module Support Module Identification Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

xvi

Contents

Module Support End of Module Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 Open the Module Support End of Module Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631 Update the Module Support End of Module Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632 Block Header and Trailer Structures Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633 Open the Block Header and Trailer Structures Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634 Go to a New Block Header/Trailer Structure Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635 Go to an Existing Block Header/Trailer Structure Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636 Block Header/Trailer Structure Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637 Open a New Block Header/Trailer Structure Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641 Open an Existing Block Header/Trailer Structure Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642 Create a New Block Header/Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643 Update a Block Header/Trailer Structure Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647 Add a Field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651 Update a Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652 File Header/Trailer Structures Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 Open a File Header/Trailer Structures Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654 Go to a New File Header/Trailer Structure Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655 Go to an Existing File Header/Trailer Structure Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .656 File Header/Trailer Structure Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657 Open a New File Header/Trailer Structure Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659 Open an Existing File Header/Trailer Structure Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660 Create a File Header/Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661 Update a File Header/Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664 Add a Field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667 Update a Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668 File Formats Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669 Open the File Formats Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670 Go to the Create a New File Format Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671 Go to an Existing File Format Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672 File Format General Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673 Open the File Format Format General Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674 Update the File Format Format General Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675 File Format Format Type Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 Open the File Format Format Type Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678 Update the File Format Format Type Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679 Add a Header/Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .680 Update a Header/Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .681

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

xvii

File Format File Size Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683 Open the File Format File Size Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684 Update the File Format File Size Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685 File Format Record Structure Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687 Open the File Format Record Structure Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .688 Update the File Format Record Structure Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689 Create a New File Format Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691 Open the Create a New File Format Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .692 Create a New File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .693 File Format & Structures Association Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695 Open the File Format & Structure Associations Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696 Add a Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .697 Remove a Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .698 Audit Page (for Mediation Feature Sets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699 Open the Audit Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .701 Perform an Audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .702 15 About Search/Filter Application Definitions Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .704 Working with Field Filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .706 Working with Record Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .708 Using the Search/Filter Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .709 Working with the Search Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .710 Defining the Search Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .712 Using the Pass Action Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .713 Auditing Search Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .714 Naming of Search Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .715 Working with the Filter Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .716 Defining the Filter Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .718 Using the Filter Test Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .719 Filtering File Headers and Block Headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .720 Auditing Filter Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .721 16 Search/Filter Application Definition Application Pages Value Lists Page (Search/Filter Application Definitions) . . . . . . . . 725 Open the Value Lists Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .726 Go to a New Value List Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .727 Go to an Existing Value List Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .728

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

xviii

Contents

Value List Page (Search/Filter Application Definitions) . . . . . . . . . . 729 Open a New Value List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .731 Open an Existing Value List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .732 Create a Value List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .733 Update a Value List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .734 Add a Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .735 Update a Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .736 Field Filters Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737 Open the Field Filters Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .738 Go to a New Field Filter Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .739 Go to an Existing Field Filter Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .740 Field Filter Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741 Open a New Field Filter Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .743 Open an Existing Field Filter Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .744 Create a Field Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .745 Update a Field Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .746 Record Filters Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747 Open the Record Filters Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .748 Go to a New Record Filter Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .749 Go to an Existing Record Filter Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .750 Record Filter Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751 Open a New Record Filter Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .753 Open an Existing Record Filter Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .754 Create a Record Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .755 Create a Special Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .756 Update a Record Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .757 Search/Filter Applications Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759 Open the Search/Filter Applications Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .760 Go to a New Search Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .761 Go to a New Filter Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .762 Go to an Existing Search Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .763 Go to an Existing Filter Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .764 Filter Application Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765 Open a New Filter Application Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .767 Open an Existing Filter Application Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .768 Create a Filter Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .769 Update a Filter Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .770 Add a Special Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .771 Update a Special Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .772

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

xix

Search Application Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773 Open a New Search Application Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .775 Open an Existing Search Application Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .776 Create a Search Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .777 Update a Search Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .778 Add a Special Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .779 Update a Special Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .780 17 About the Validation Application Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .782 Accessing the Validation Application Definition Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .785 Defining a Validation Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .788 Working with Exception Files and Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .789 Working with Validation Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .790 Working with Expression Record Associations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .792 Working with Application Expression Associations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .793 Working with Validation Expressions Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .794 Working with Validation Audits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .795 Working with the Duplicate Record Checking Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .796 18 Validation Application Definition Application Pages Value Lists Page (Validation Application). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805 Open the Value Lists Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .806 Go to a New Value List Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .807 Go to an Existing Value List Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .808 Go to Another Page in the Validation Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .809 Value List Page (Validation Application). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811 Open a New Value List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .813 Open an Existing Value List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .814 Create a Value List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .815 Update a Value List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .816 Add a Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .817 Update a Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .818 Table Lookup Value Lists Page (Validation Application) . . . . . . . . 819 Open the Table Lookup Value Lists Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .820 Go to a New Table Lookup Value List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .821 Go to an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .822

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

xx

Contents

Table Lookup Value List Page (Validation Application) . . . . . . . . . . 823 Open a New Table Lookup Value List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .825 Open an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .826 Create a Table Lookup Value List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .827 Update a Table Lookup Value List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .828 Add a Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .829 Update a Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .830 Reference Sets Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831 Open the Reference Sets Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .832 Go to the Reference Set Summary Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .833 Go to the Create a New Reference Set Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .834 Create a New Reference Set Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835 Open the Create a New Reference Set Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .837 Create a New Reference Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .838 Reference Set Parameters Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839 Open the Reference Set Parameters Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .841 Update the Reference Set Parameters Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .842 Reference Set Summary Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843 Open the Reference Set Summary Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .845 Go to the Reference Set Parameters Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .846 Go to the Reference Set Pruning Schedule Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .847 Reference Set Pruning Schedule Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849 Open the Reference Set Pruning Schedule Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .850 Update the Reference Set Pruning Schedule Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .851 Validation Applications Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853 Open the Validation Applications Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .854 Go to a New Validation Application Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .855 Go to an Existing Validation Application Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .856 Validation Application Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857 Open a New Validation Application Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .859 Open an Existing Validation Application Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .860 Create a Validation Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .861 Update a Validation Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .862 Validation Expressions Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863 Open the Validation Expressions Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .864 Go to a New Validation Expression Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .865 Go to an Existing Validation Expression Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .866

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

xxi

Validation Expression Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867 Open a New Validation Expression Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .869 Open an Existing Validation Expression Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .870 Create a New Validation Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .871 Update a Validation Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .872 Expression Record Association Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 873 Open the Expression Record Association Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .874 Update the Expression Record Association Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .875 Application Expression Association Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877 Open the Application Expression Association Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .878 Update the Application Expression Association Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .879 Validation Expressions Order Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881 Open the Validation Expressions Order Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .882 Update the Validation Expressions Order Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .883 Audit Page (for Validation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885 Open the Audit Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .886 Audit the Validation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .887 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Figures
Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5 Figure 6 Figure 7 Figure 8 Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 Figure 12 Figure 13 Figure 14 Figure 15 Figure 16 Figure 17 Figure 18 Figure 19 Figure 20 Figure 21 Figure 22 Figure 23 Figure 24 Figure 25 Figure 26 Figure 27 Figure 28 Figure 29 Figure 30 Figure 31 Figure 32 Figure 33 Figure 34 Figure 35 Figure 36 Figure 37 Figure 38 Figure 39 Figure 40 Figure 41 Figure 42 Figure 43 Figure 44 Figure 45 External Database Access Definitions ................................................................... 6 The Package Manager Applications Link .............................................................. 9 The External Database Access Definitions Container Page................................... 9 The Expression Page ............................................................................................ 10 Mediation Features Page ...................................................................................... 25 Mediation Feature Sets Page ................................................................................ 29 Mediation Feature Set Page.................................................................................. 33 Expression Page ................................................................................................... 39 Secondary Key Mapping Page ............................................................................. 45 Package Manager Application.............................................................................. 52 Package Manager Application Link ..................................................................... 54 The Package Manager Applications Container Page ........................................... 54 The Create a New Package Wizard...................................................................... 56 Creating a Package ............................................................................................... 57 Variable-Length Blocks ....................................................................................... 60 Fixed Length Blocks ............................................................................................ 60 The Package Manager Application Page with the Audit Section ........................ 64 Package Manager Applications Page ................................................................... 69 Create a New Package Wizard Screen One..................................................... 73 Create a New Package Wizard Screen Two.................................................... 75 Create a New Package Wizard Screen Three.................................................. 77 Package Manager Summary Page ........................................................................ 81 Package Manager Application.............................................................................. 87 Package Manager Record Blocking Page ............................................................ 93 Package Manager Record Structure Mapping...................................................... 99 File Format Conversion Applications Link........................................................ 105 The File Format Conversion Applications Container Page................................ 105 File Format Conversion Application Page ......................................................... 106 The New File Format Conversion Application page.......................................... 107 Defining a File Format Conversion.................................................................... 108 Data Process Flow File Format Conversion Applications ............................ 116 File Format Conversion Applications Page........................................................ 119 File Format Conversion Application Page ......................................................... 123 Value Lists Page................................................................................................. 129 Value List Page .................................................................................................. 135 Table Lookup Value Lists Page ......................................................................... 143 Table Lookup Value List Page........................................................................... 147 Field Mappings Page .......................................................................................... 155 Field Mapping Page............................................................................................ 159 Record Mappings Page....................................................................................... 163 Record Mapping Page ........................................................................................ 167 Secondary Key Mappings Page.......................................................................... 173 Secondary Key Mapping Page ........................................................................... 177 Block Header/Trailer Mappings Page ................................................................ 185 File Header/Trailer Mappings Page ................................................................... 191

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Figures

Figure 46 Figure 47 Figure 48 Figure 49 Figure 50 Figure 51 Figure 52 Figure 53 Figure 54 Figure 55 Figure 56 Figure 57 Figure 58 Figure 59 Figure 60 Figure 61 Figure 62 Figure 63 Figure 64 Figure 65 Figure 66 Figure 67 Figure 68 Figure 69 Figure 70 Figure 71 Figure 72 Figure 73 Figure 74 Figure 75 Figure 76 Figure 77 Figure 78 Figure 79 Figure 80 Figure 81 Figure 82 Figure 83 Figure 84 Figure 85 Figure 86 Figure 87 Figure 88 Figure 89 Figure 90 Figure 91 Figure 92 Figure 93 Figure 94 Figure 95

Module Mappings Page...................................................................................... 195 Module Mapping Page ....................................................................................... 201 The Correlation Provisioning Process ................................................................ 209 Correlation Applications Link............................................................................ 210 The Correlation Applications Page .................................................................... 210 The Correlation Store Conversion Provisioning Process ................................... 212 Correlation File Conversion Provisioning Process............................................. 214 Defining a Correlation ID................................................................................... 215 Correlation Applications Page............................................................................ 229 Correlation IDs Page .......................................................................................... 237 Correlation ID Page............................................................................................ 241 Correlation Value Lists Page.............................................................................. 247 Correlation ID Value List Page .......................................................................... 253 Correlation ID Table Lookup Value Lists Page ................................................. 261 Correlation ID Table Lookup Value List Page................................................... 265 Output File Management Page ........................................................................... 273 Output Record Management Page...................................................................... 277 Correlation Conversion Assignments Page ........................................................ 281 Correlation Conversion Application Manager Page........................................... 285 Source Assignments Page................................................................................... 289 Output File Management Expression Page ........................................................ 293 Output Record Management Expression Page ................................................... 294 The Correlation File Conversions Page.............................................................. 303 The Correlation File Conversion Page ............................................................... 307 Value Lists Page ................................................................................................. 313 Value List Page................................................................................................... 319 Table Lookup Value Lists Page ......................................................................... 327 Table Lookup Value List Page ........................................................................... 331 Field Mappings Page .......................................................................................... 341 Data Field Mapping Page ................................................................................... 345 Secondary Key Mappings Page.......................................................................... 353 Record Mappings Page....................................................................................... 359 Record Mapping Page ........................................................................................ 363 Record Data Field Mapping Page....................................................................... 373 Record to Module Mapping Page....................................................................... 379 Record to Module Data Field Mapping Page ..................................................... 387 Module Mappings Page...................................................................................... 393 Module Mapping Page ....................................................................................... 397 Module Data Field Mapping Page...................................................................... 405 Correlation Store Conversion Applications Page............................................... 413 Correlation Store Conversion Page .................................................................... 417 Correlation Store Conversion Value Lists Page................................................. 423 Value List Page................................................................................................... 429 Correlation Table Lookup Value Lists Page ...................................................... 437 Table Lookup Value List Page ........................................................................... 441 Secondary Key Mapping Page ........................................................................... 451 Record Mapping Page ........................................................................................ 457 Data Field Mapping Page ................................................................................... 467 Record to Module Mapping Page....................................................................... 473 Correlation Store Module Mappings Page ......................................................... 475

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Figures

vi

Figure 96 Figure 97 Figure 98 Figure 99 Figure 100 Figure 101 Figure 102 Figure 103 Figure 104 Figure 105 Figure 106 Figure 107 Figure 108 Figure 109 Figure 110 Figure 111 Figure 112 Figure 113 Figure 114 Figure 115 Figure 116 Figure 117 Figure 118 Figure 119 Figure 120 Figure 121 Figure 122 Figure 123 Figure 124 Figure 125 Figure 126 Figure 127 Figure 128 Figure 129 Figure 130 Figure 131 Figure 132 Figure 133 Figure 134 Figure 135 Figure 136 Figure 137 Figure 138 Figure 139 Figure 140 Figure 141 Figure 142 Figure 143 Figure 144 Figure 145

Correlation Store Module Mapping Page........................................................... 483 Data Field Mapping Page ................................................................................... 493 Module Trigger Mapping Page .......................................................................... 499 External Database Access Definitions Page....................................................... 509 External Database Access Definition Page ........................................................ 513 Active Mediation Feature Set Drop-down Menu ............................................... 523 The File Format Definitions Links..................................................................... 523 Defining a File Format ....................................................................................... 526 GRID Field Attributes ........................................................................................ 532 Fields in a Data Record ...................................................................................... 534 Fields in a BAF Record ...................................................................................... 535 Typical File Configuration ................................................................................. 538 Fields Page ......................................................................................................... 567 Field Page ........................................................................................................... 573 Structures Page ................................................................................................... 579 Structure Page..................................................................................................... 583 Modules Page ..................................................................................................... 591 Module Page....................................................................................................... 595 Module Supports Page........................................................................................ 603 Module Support Page ......................................................................................... 610 Create a New Module Support Wizard Screen One...................................... 615 Module Support Basic Page ............................................................................... 621 Module Support Module Identification Page ..................................................... 625 Module Support End of Module Page................................................................ 629 Block Header/Trailer Structures Page................................................................ 633 Block Header/Trailer Structure Page ................................................................. 638 File Header/Trailer Structures Page ................................................................... 653 File Header/Trailer Structure Page..................................................................... 657 File Formats Page............................................................................................... 669 File Format General Page.............................................................................. 673 File Format Format Type Page...................................................................... 677 File Format Format File Size Page................................................................ 683 File Format Record Structure Page ............................................................... 687 The Create a New File Format Wizard Screen One...................................... 691 File Format & Structures Association Page ....................................................... 695 Audit Page .......................................................................................................... 699 Search/Filter Applications Definitions Menu..................................................... 704 Comparison Operator Drop-down Menu ........................................................... 706 Only Valid for Record ID Check Box................................................................ 708 New Search or Filter Page Radio Buttons.......................................................... 709 Existing Search or Filters in Search/Filter Applications Table.......................... 709 The Search Application ...................................................................................... 710 Defining a Search Application ........................................................................... 712 Pass Action Feature Radio Button Set ............................................................... 713 Search File Name Convention............................................................................ 715 The Filter Application in the Input and Output Streams .................................... 717 Defining the Filter Application .......................................................................... 718 Value Lists Page................................................................................................. 725 Value List Page .................................................................................................. 729 Field Filters Page................................................................................................ 737

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

vii

Figures

Figure 146 Figure 147 Figure 148 Figure 149 Figure 150 Figure 151 Figure 152 Figure 153 Figure 154 Figure 155 Figure 156 Figure 157 Figure 158 Figure 159 Figure 160 Figure 161 Figure 162 Figure 163 Figure 164 Figure 165 Figure 166 Figure 167 Figure 168 Figure 169 Figure 170 Figure 171 Figure 172 Figure 173 Figure 174 Figure 175 Figure 176 Figure 177

Field Filter Page ................................................................................................. 741 Record Filters Page............................................................................................. 747 Record Filter Page .............................................................................................. 751 Search/Filter Applications Page ......................................................................... 759 Filter Application Page....................................................................................... 765 Search Application Page..................................................................................... 773 Validation Data Process Flow ............................................................................ 783 Active Mediation Feature Set Drop-down Menu ............................................... 785 The Validation Application Definitions Links ................................................... 785 Creating a Validation Application Definition .................................................... 788 Validation Exception File Flow.......................................................................... 789 Available Operator Types................................................................................... 791 The Validation Audit Page ................................................................................. 795 The Reference Set Information on the Validation Application Page ................. 801 Validation Application Value Lists Page ........................................................... 805 Value List Page................................................................................................... 811 Validation Application Table Lookup Value Lists Page.................................... 819 Table Lookup Value List Page ........................................................................... 823 Reference Sets Page ........................................................................................... 831 Create a New Reference Set Wizard Screen One.......................................... 835 Create a New Reference Set Wizard Screen Two ......................................... 836 Reference Set Parameters Page .......................................................................... 839 Reference Set Summary Page ............................................................................ 843 Reference Set Pruning Schedule Page................................................................ 849 Validation Applications Page ............................................................................. 853 Validation Application Page............................................................................... 857 Validation Expressions Page .............................................................................. 863 Validation Expression Page................................................................................ 867 Expression Record Association Page ................................................................. 873 Application Expression Association Page.......................................................... 877 Validation Expressions Order Page.................................................................... 881 Audit Page (for Validation) ................................................................................ 885

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Tables
Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 Table 8 Notational Conventions ................................................................................................ x Equation Options in Expressions ................................................................................ 11 Package Manager Summary Page Icons and the Corresponding Pages ..................... 55 Correlation Applications Icons and the Corresponding Pages ................................. 211 File Format Definitions Links and the Corresponding Pages................................... 524 Search/Filter Application Definitions Icons and Corresponding Pages ................... 705 Field Filter Comparison Operators ........................................................................... 706 Validation Application Definitions Links and the Corresponding Pages................. 786

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Notational Conventions
Note Important notes appear in this format.

Caution

Indicates possible danger to data, software, or hardware.

Warning!

Indicates serious risk of damage to data, software, or hardware. Table 1 Notational Conventions

Notation
Helvetica italic <UPPERCASE HELVETICA>

Explanation of Convention
References to printed documents Keys Code and file names Buttons, icons, and menu items

Example
For more information on the Users Page, see the Administration Guide. Press <ENTER>. At the prompt, type rename. Click Submit.

Helvetica Narrow bold

Helvetica bold

Additional Documentation
These manuals are available for the CSG Data Mediation System: Administration Guide CSGDM-10.0-AG-2004-04-30 Describes the administration pages and the procedures to administer and maintain the basic Data Mediation system. Data Dictionary CSGDM-10.0-DD-2004-04-30 Contains detailed information of form fields and buttons that appear in the application. CAPI User Guide CSGDM-10.0-CAUG-2004-04-30 Provides the concepts and functions for the Collection Application Programming Interface (CAPI). Data Collection Schedules User Guide CSGDM-10.0-DCSUG-2004-04-30 Describes how data collections are performed and stored on the Data Mediation system. Data Files User Guide CSGDM-10.0-DFUG-2004-04-30 Explains how to work with data files, including information on file types, the bulk edit feature, and exception files. Data File Searches User Guide CSGDM-10.0-DFSUG-2004-04-30 Contains information on setting up data file search schedules. Data Transmission Schedules User Guide CSGDM-10.0-DTSUG-2004-04-30 Provides information on data transmission, including scheduling transmissions. Destinations User Guide CSGDM-10.0-DUG-2004-04-30 Provides information on creating and setting up destinations. Getting Started Guide CSGDM-10.0-GSG-2004-04-30 Provides an overview of the Data Mediation system application and information for using the interface

xv

Additional Documentation

GML Developer Guide CSGDM-10.0-GDG-2004-04-30 Describes the mediation feature components, the semantics, and general syntax of the GRID Mapping Language (GML). Installation Guide (for IBM and SUN platforms) CSGDM-10.0-IIG-2004-04-30 CSGDM-10.0-SIG-2004-04-30 Describes how to install the Data Mediation system, including information about the Post Processing feature and an appendix of critical and major alarm messages. Interface Reference Guide CSGDM-10.0-IRG-2004-04-30 Contains reference information on the CDRP and OBDC interfaces. Logs User Guide CSGDM-10.0-LUG-2004-04-30 Provides information on the log types, message types, and message priority levels. Mediation API Reference Guide CSGDM-10.0-MARG-2004-04-30 Contains reference information on using the mediation API. Mediation Features User Guide CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30 Describes all the mediation applications, including correlation, file format, filter, package manager, search, and validation. Reports User Guide CSGDM-10.0-RUG-2004-04-30 Explains the what reports exist, how to generate them, and how to set up custom reports. Scripts Reference Guide CSGDM-10.0-SRG-2004-04-30 Provides information on script files, which contain additional instructions for functions for data collection and transmission. SockedBased API Guide CSGDM-10.0-SAG-2004-04-30 Explains the building applications using the Socket Based Record Transmission API. Programmers can use the guide to use the records received from the Data Mediation system for their own customized downstream application solutions Sources User Guide CSGDM-10.0-SUG-2004-04-30 Provides information on creating and updating sources.

Additional Documentation

xvi

System Summary User Guide CSGDM-10.0-SSUG-2004-04-30 Explains the form fields on the System Summary Page and provides status descriptions for active source and destination links.

CSG Data Mediation Professional Services

The CSG Data Mediation project consulting team not only understands the complexity of the network switching and applications environments, but it also offers a wide range of flexible and scalable services that can help you realize the enormous potential of CSG Data Mediation. Contact the CSG's Professional Services organization for these services: Implementation Planning and Analysis (IPA) to identify mediation requirements, develop solutions, and define mediation rules. Involves requirements analysis, functional design, and implementation planning Configuration Services to transform collected usage data into unique subsets of data for downstream applications, such as billing platforms. These services are based on the mediation rules defined in the IPA. GRID, Filter, Validation, Correlation and Format functions are used to create the mapping rules Systems Upgrade to upgrade systems quickly and accurately with minimal business interruption High Availability (HA) Implementation to develop a HA solution through system analysis, defining and designing the solution, and then implementing the solution (for either Active/Active or Active/Standby configurations). Consultants can evaluate the existing hardware platform, disk array and network connectivity for HA configuration as well as load, configure, and test the Data Mediation software with the selected thirdparty Cluster software System Health Check to annually review key mediation processes and Data Mediation software operation to make sure the software is operating at peak efficiency. Consultants perform a technical assessment, operations audit, configuration and change management review, and support infrastructure review. Any recommendations for corrective action are provided at the end of the system health check Performance Tuning and Architecture Support to provide architecture and performance tuning support, including: sizing of hardware and disk requirements recommending a high-level architecture for the implementation of the Data Mediation system documenting the technical settings and configurations for Data Mediation, Unix servers, RDBMS and disk subsystems supporting the implementation and testing of the documented technical solution When providing these services, consultants also perform volume testing and performance tuning of both production and preproduction installations

xiv

Professional Services

Custom Software and Integration Development to build customized software to meet specific business needs and specifications, including specialized processors and collection interfaces Switch Integration to obtain on-site support for the testing, validation, and turn-up of new or existing switches beyond the scope of standard Data Manager application software installation and integration Customized Reporting Service to evaluate reporting requirements and create a custom reporting solution that can track and store statistical information, deliver customized statistics to downstream database systems, and provision specific reports using standard database reporting software Integration of External Information to identify required external information, which is from relational databases or from external systems that dynamically change the information, and design and implement a solution for integrating the external information CSG Data Mediation Systems Moves to obtain services associated with moving the CSG Data Mediation System from one location or hardware server to another. Includes planning, verifying the new hardware server, loading CSG Data Mediation software, moving data to the new server, performing product readiness testing, and helping with production cutover

About Common Features

This chapter describes common features used by various applications in Data Mediation and includes information on: Working with Defaults Working with Globals Working with Value Lists Working with Table Lookup Value Lists Working with External Database Access Definitions Accessing External Database Access Definitions Building Expressions Working with Secondary Keys Working with Mappings Working with Field Mappings Working with Record Mappings Working with Record-to-Module Mappings Working with Module Mappings Working with Justification and Padding

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

1 - About Common Features

Working with Defaults

Default values are used in target output fields if no other mapping for that output field exists or the mapping criteria for that output field do not produce a value. Four levels of defaults exist: Global defaults values that initially populate all target output record fields. If no field or record mapping is performed, the global default prevails. Global defaults are specified on the File Format Conversion Application Page. Field defaults values that fill the target output record field if the expression in a field mapping does not produce a value or does not completely map a field or subfield. This value is specified in the default field on the Field Mapping Page (File Format Conversion) during a field mapping operation. Record defaults values that fill the output record field if the expression in a record mapping does not produce a value. A record default operates just like a field default, except that it only applies to record mapped fields. This value is specified in the default field on the Field Mapping Page (File Format Conversion) during a record mapping operation. Function defaults values that are defined in mapping operators used in expressions. Function defaults populate the target output field if no other mapping is performed and no key match for the operator is found.

Order of Precedence
The default used in a field depends on the type of default. The default values have precedence, from highest to lowest, in this order: Function defaults Record defaults Field defaults Global defaults

For example, if the global default for an ASCII field is 000000 and the default specified in the field mapping is 0a000a, then the field default has precedence over the global default and the field is filled with 0a000a.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with Globals

Working with Globals

Globals are functions that appear in more than one mediation feature. The design, operation, and functions of globals are the same or similar in the mediation features in which they appear. Also, the information that is entered for a global in one mediation feature sometimes can be carried over to other mediation features. The globals that appear in the mediation features are: Value Lists appear in the Filter, Search, Validation, and Correlation applications Table Lookup Value Lists appear in the Filter, Search, File Format Conversion, Validation, and Correlation applications

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

1 - About Common Features

Working with Value Lists

With value lists, you can: Create IDs that can be used with Filter, File Format Conversion, Validation, or Correlation applications. Identify the value list by creating a List Name. Using the List Name, the mediation feature can identify this label, then compare the information in the list Create as many lists as needed. The system has no limit on how many you can create or that it can use Use lists with internal system and external database access comparison operators. Lists can be created internally on the Data Mediation system or they can be obtained externally using the External Access Database feature Create separate lists for each mediation feature if you are not using the External Access Database feature. Although the Filter and Search applications can use information from the same value list, other applications, such as File Format Conversion, Validation, and Correlation, are not able to use the same value list information

Adding and Updating Values

On the Value Lists pages, you can add values and update existing values. When working with values, make sure: the values are the same size as the GRID field they represent all values are the same length you add only one value at a time you do not use wildcard characters to create the value the size of your value list is not larger than the capacity of the database you know whether the system lets you use special characters and spaces to create the value (for example, whether you can use double quotes, single quotes, backslashses, and so on)

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with Table Lookup Value Lists

Working with Table Lookup Value Lists

Tables lookup value lists are different from value lists because they contain two types of information for each entry: a key to identify the entry and the corresponding value. With table lookup value lists, you can: Set up a table of keys and value pairs. Enter both types of information for each entry: a key to identify the entry and the corresponding value Create IDs that can be used with File Format Conversion, Validation, and Correlation applications. Identify the table lookup value list by creating a Table Lookup Value List Name. Using the Table Lookup Value List Name, the mediation feature can identify this label in the Expression Builder or Secondary Key pages Create as many table lookup value lists as needed. The system has no limit on how many table lookup value lists that you can create or that it can use Use Table Lookup Value Lists with internal system and external database access comparison operators. Table Lookup Value Lists can be created internally on the Data Mediation system or they can be obtained externally using the External Access Database feature Create separate Table Lookup Value Lists for each mediation feature if you are not using the External Access Database feature. Mediation feature applications, including File Format Conversion, Validation, and Correlation, cannot use information from the same table lookup value list.

Adding and Updating Table Lookup Values

On the Table Lookup Value Lists pages, you can add table lookup values and update existing table lookup values. When working with values, make sure: the keys are the same size as the GRID field they represent the values are the same size as the GRID field they represent all keys are the same length all values are the same length you know that you do not need to make keys and values the same length you add keys and values as pairs you do not use wildcard characters to create the value the size of your table lookup value is not larger than the capacity of the database

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

1 - About Common Features

Working with External Database Access Definitions

The External Database Access Definition feature lets you define interface parameters to an external data source or to a flat file stored on the Data Mediation system. These sources contain values used to populate tables or lists used in mediation feature expressions and appear in the Filter, Search, File Format Conversion, Validation, and Correlation applications.
Figure 1 External Database Access Definitions

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with External Database Access Definitions

To work with the External Database Access feature you must: Have a working understanding of how databases work Have adequate knowledge of Structured Query Language (SQL) Know the name of the database table to be accessed and the structure of the fields to be retrieved from the database table Have the Level 1 administrator work with the manager of the external database to configure the interface between the Data Mediation system and the external data source

Open Database Connectivity Software

The Data Mediation system External Database Access feature uses Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) software to access the external data source or a local text file. ODBC is an industry standard for database connectivity. The feature lets you: Access one or more external data sources Access data from flat files residing on the Data Mediation system Retrieve specific data for use in the inexList and NotInexList comparison operators and in the extable mapping operator Convert the retrieved data to the correct format required by the mediation feature Store the retrieved data in a local data file on the Data Mediation system Update the local data files manually or automatically by scheduling the update

ODBC Configuration Files

The ODBC configuration files are defined and stored locally on the Data Mediation system. The files contain all the interface parameters required to access a specific external database or local text file. Each database has its own specific interface parameters. The ODBC configuration files and update schedules are included in the Data Mediation system backup and restore procedures.

Local Files
The data retrieved using the External Database Access feature contains values used to populate lists or table lookup values used in mediation feature expressions. Data in the external database can change. Periodically update the locally stored file to ensure the data is current. You can update files manually by performing an audit or automatically by scheduling the update. If an on audit update fails, the local data file is not updated. You must correct the problem and rerun the update procedure.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

1 - About Common Features

If a scheduled update fails, the local data file is not updated. An error message is logged in the Error and Information Log. All mediation feature operations continues using the previously generated local data file.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Accessing External Database Access Definitions

Accessing External Database Access Definitions

After you open the Mediation Features page, a short menu of links appears at the top of the page with several mediation feature applications, including the External Database Access Definitions.
Figure 2 The Package Manager Applications Link

When you click the External Database Access Definitions link, the External Database Access Definitions Page opens, which is a container page that lists all the external database access definitions in the table.
Figure 3 The External Database Access Definitions Container Page

If you click a link in this table, the corresponding External Database Access Definition Page, which is the instance page, opens. If you click the New icon, a new External Database Access Definition Page instance page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

10

1 - About Common Features

Building Expressions
You can build expressions in the Filter, Search, File Format Conversion, Validation, and Correlation applications on these pages: Expression Page creates expressions to map input fields to output fields Output File and Record Management Expression Pages Secondary Key Mapping Page (Correlation File Conversion and Correlation Store Conversion) Secondary Key Mapping Page (File Format Conversion) Validation Expression Page creates expressions that tell the system how to validate record data Each page has common characteristics, including: At least one large text box where you enter your expression An operators drop-down menu and corresponding table, which lists the options available for the operator that you selected from the menu A fields drop-down menu and corresponding table, which lists the options available for the input, output, source, or target field that you selected from the menu
Figure 4 The Expression Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Building Expressions

11

When you build the expression in the large text box, you use elements from the Fields drop-down menu, the Operators drop-down menu, and equation options that you enter from your keyboard. These options are listed in the following table:
Table 2 Equation Options in Expressions

Press
+ / * && || ! | = > < >= <= IF THEN ELSE

To Add mathematical expressions or the results of mathematical operators Subtract mathematical expressions or the results of mathematical operators Divide mathematical expressions or the results of mathematical operators Multiply mathematical expressions or the results of mathematical operators Represent AND, which requires two conditions to be true before continuing on in the expression logic Represent OR, which requires one of the two conditions to be true before continuing on in the expression logic Represent NOT, which requires that a condition not be true before continuing on in the expression logic Concatenate or join together the preceding value and following value in the expression Make sure that one field value or expression result is equal to another Make sure that one field value or expression result is greater than another Make sure that one field value or expression result is less than another Verifies that one field value or expression result is greater than or equal to another Make sure that one field value or expression result is less than or equal to another Start a conditional expression (IFTHEN). It defines the comparison Separate the conditional part of an IF statement from the mapping or action to perform Allow an alternate mapping operation be performed if the condition is not met in a conditional expression All nested IFTHEN logical statements must have an ELSE statement Show a nested IFTHENELSE logical statements in an expression

ELSEIF

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

12

1 - About Common Features

Press
FI

To Close an IFTHEN logical statement. All nested IFTHENELSE logical statements must have a FI statement

IFTHEN Expression
This is an example of an ifthen conditional expression:

if (fldexist("AConnect Time")) then (dateconvert("AConnect Time", YYMMDD, JJJ-YYYY)) fi

IFTHENELSE Expression
This is an example of an ifthenelse conditional expression:

if(fldnotexist("AConnect Time")) then (putcurrentdate(YYMMDD)) else (dateconvert("AConnect Time", YYMMDD, JJJ-YYYY)) fi

References

For information on mapping operations, see the GML Developer Reference Guide

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with Secondary Keys

13

Working with Secondary Keys

Define optional secondary keys, which are a sets of logic applied to a source record or module that determines whether a particular record or module mapping is executed, to provide a means of specifying optional constraints or conditions to data records, block header/trailer records, and file header/trailer records. The secondary key condition is compared to the value in the specified input record structure or module field or fields. If the comparison is true, a particular output mapping is executed. Three mediation feature applications that use secondary keys: Correlation File Conversion Correlation Store Conversion File Format Conversion
These mediation features support three types of secondary key mappings:

Record-to-record secondary mappings Record- to-record secondary key mappings apply conditional logic to fields within an input record structure or module. If the logic is true, a user-specified output record structure is generated Record-to-module secondary mappings Record-to-module secondary key mappings apply conditional logic to fields within an input record structure or module. If the logic is true, a user-specified output record module is appended to the output record being mapped Module-to-module secondary mappings Module-to-module secondary key mappings apply conditional logic to fields within an input record module. If the module exists in the input record and the logic is true, a user-specified module is appended to the output record being mapped
Note Secondary keys are not required for performing record or module mapping; however, you must complete a secondary key mapping before using the Record Mapping page.

When defining record or module secondary keys: For record-to-record and record-to-module mappings, use secondary keys with a key type of structure For module-to-module mappings, use secondary keys with a key type of module Secondary keys can be ordered to determine when a secondary key mapping is evaluated Secondary keys can be specified as exclusive Multiple secondary key mappings can be applied to an input record

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

14

1 - About Common Features

When setting up a structure secondary key for a correlation store conversion, use fields from both the source record and target record to set up the conditional expression When setting up a module secondary key for a correlation store conversion, only use fields in the source module because the target module type is not known at the time of definition When setting up a structure secondary key for a correlation file conversion, use fields in the input record to set up the conditional expression When setting up a module secondary key for a correlation file conversion, use fields in the input module to set up the conditional expression

Multiple Secondary Keys

In the correlation file conversion and correlation store conversion applications, you can use multiple secondary keys, except with record-to-record mappings in correlation store conversions. With multiple secondary keys, you can: Assign the order of multiple keys Make secondary keys exclusive. When the first exclusive secondary key is evaluated to be true for a record mapping, then all other secondary keys specified as exclusive for that record or module mapping are ignored Set up multiple secondary keys for each of the three types of secondary key mappings for a correlation file conversion Set up multiple secondary keys for correlation store conversion record-tomodule and module-to-module mappings

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with Secondary Keys

15

Triggers
Triggers are events that flag the Data Mediation system to create a record in the output file that is not a data record. For example, a trigger can prompt the system to create a file trailer when the end of a file is detected. You can map triggers to an expression just as output fields can be mapped. However, you cannot map an input field to a trigger. You can only use these operators to map values to triggers: Global operators Operators that access external data Other operators used with constant arguments, instead of the input field values These are the types of explicit triggers defined for the File Format Conversion application: START_OF_FILE END_OF_FILE MAX_BLOCK_SIZE_1 MAX_BLOCK_SIZE_2 MAX_BLOCK_SIZE_3 MAX_RECORD_PER_BLOCK_1 MAX_RECORD_PER_BLOCK_2 MAX_RECORD_PER_BLOCK_3 MAX_BLOCK_COUNT_1 MAX_BLOCK_COUNT_2 MAX_BLOCK_COUNT_3 MAX_FILE_SIZE MAX_RECORD_COUNT TERMINATING_MODULE

Use MAX_BLOCK_SIZE, MAX_RECORDS_PER_BLOCK, or MAX_BLOCK_ COUNT when you are converting from a format that does not contain block headers and trailers to one that does have them. Use MAX_FILE_SIZE, MAX_RECORD_COUNT, START_OF_FILE, and END_OF_ FILE when converting a format that has one file size to file format with a different file size.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

16

1 - About Common Features

Working with Mappings

Mapping is a process used to populate the fields in an output file format record using data from fields or subfields in the input file format record, the result of an expression, or a default value. An expression can consist of constants, fields, subfields, or mapping functions. There are five types of mappings: Field Mappings (field-to-field) Record Mappings (record-to-record) Record-to-Module Mappings Module Field-to-Record Mappings Module Mappings (module-to-module)

Order of Evaluation
Record and module mappings are evaluated and executed in this order: 1. 2. 3. Record-to-record mappings that do not have an order specified Record-to-record mappings that do have a user-specified order Within a record-to-record mapping, any associated record-to-module mappings that do not have an order specified Within a record-to-record mapping, any associated record-to-module mappings that do have a user specified order Module-to-module mappings that do not have an order specified Module-to-module mappings that do have a user-specified order

4.

5. 6.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with Field Mappings

17

Working with Field Mappings

Use field mapping, or field-to-field mapping, to associate an output field with another field or subfield globally. By associating fields through this process, you do not need to map these common fields for every record. You can perform field mappings in File Format Conversion and Correlation File Conversion. Field mapping can be overridden by mapping the field at the record level. When record-level mapping is not required, use field mapping.

Example
The source input file format contains a field named Connect Time The target output file format has a field named Call Start Time If you set up Connect Time to always map to Call Start Time, then whenever the File Format Conversion Application encounters these two fields, a field mapping is performed

Field Mapping Pages

Use the following pages to perform field mapping: Data Field Mapping Page (Correlation File Conversion) Field Mappings Page (Correlation File Conversion) Field Mappings Page (File Format Conversion) Field Mapping Page (File Format Conversion)

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

18

1 - About Common Features

Working with Record Mappings

When you create record-level mappings, you populate control fields and record or module data fields on a record-specific basis. You can map data from the structure portion of an input record or attached modules to a correlation record or correlation module. When a field is mapped at the record level, the value of the mapping takes precedence over any default or field-mapped values. Use record mappings, or record-to-record mappings, to associate an input record field to an output record field at the record level. You can use record-to-record mappings to map data from the structure portion of a source record to the structure portion of a target correlation record. For record mappings for correlation file conversion IDs, you can select any record type in the input file format for the source record and select one or more record types in the correlation file format for the target correlation record For record mappings for correlation store conversion IDs, you can select one source record type and one target record type, which are determined when the correlation store conversion ID is created

Example
The input record ID 703 contains the field Connect Date The target output record ID 104 contains the field Call Start Date These two fields are then mapped at the record level If you set up Connect Date to always map to Call Start Date, then whenever the File Format Conversion Application encounters a source input record ID 703, it creates a target output record ID 104, then uses this specific record mapping to map input field Connect Date to output field Call Start Date If the File Format Conversion Application encounters any other input records containing the field Connect Time, this specific record mapping is not performed

Record-to-record Mapping Pages

Use the following pages to perform record-to-record mapping: Block Header/Trailer Mappings Page File Header/Trailer Mappings Page Record Data Field Mapping Page (Correlation File Conversion) Record Mapping Page (Correlation File Conversion) Record Mappings Page (Correlation File Conversion) Record Data Field Mapping Page (Correlation Store Conversion) Record Mapping Page (Correlation Store Conversion) Record Mapping Page (File Format Conversion) Record Mappings Page (File Format Conversion)

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with Record-to-Module Mappings

19

Working with Record-to-Module Mappings

Use record-to-module mapping to map data from the structure portion of a source record to a module attached to the structure portion of the target correlation record. You can specify an attached module that is an existing module or a new module that was generated by the user-defined mapping rules. Record-to-module mapping creates a specific output record with attached modules from a specific input record. Record-to-module field mapping is performed when you call the Field Mapping page from the Module Mapping page after accessing the Module Mapping page from the Record Mapping page.

Record-to-module Mapping Pages

Use the following pages to perform record-to-module mapping: Record Mapping Page (Correlation Store Conversion) Record Mapping Page (Correlation File Conversion)

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

20

1 - About Common Features

Working with Module Mappings

Module-to-module mapping creates a specific output module from a specific input module and attaches the created module to the output record currently being mapped. You can use module-to-module mapping to map data from a module attached to the source record to a module attached to the to the target correlation record. You can specify an attached module that is an existing module or a new module that was generated by the user-defined mapping rules. Module-to-module field mapping is performed when you call the Field Mapping page from the Module Mapping page.

Module-to-module Mapping Pages

Use the following pages to perform module-to-module mappings: Module Data Field Mapping Page (Correlation File Conversion) Module Mapping Page (Correlation File Conversion) Module Mappings Page (Correlation File Conversion) Module Data Field Mapping Page (Correlation Store Conversion) Module Mapping Page (Correlation Store Conversion) Module Mappings Page (Correlation Store Conversion) Module Trigger Mapping Page Module Mapping Page (File Format Conversion) Module Mappings Page (File Format Conversion)

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with Justification and Padding

21

Working with Justification and Padding

The Justification and Padding fields displayed on this form are applicable when specifying: An operator that displays a number field of variable length, such as putNumber or putDateConvert One of the global operators, such as $RECORDINGOFFICEID The mapEnvVar operator from the Mapping Operators list A justification setting of right or left does not imply that the output field is right justified or left justified. The final result of the expression is always left justified in the output field. The justification and padding displayed on this form apply internally to calculate the value from the expression specified. When the output displays a: Numeric variable, specify Right justification and 0 as the pad character String variable, specify Left justification and 0 as the pad character

Example 1 putDateConvert(Connect Date, YMMDD, MM/DD/YYYY)

In this example: This expression uses the date and time operator putDateConvert Converts the date, May 2, 2001, in the field Connect Date from the source date format, YMMDD, into the target date format, MM/DD/YYYY The result mapped to the output field is 05/02/2000 50/20/2000 5 /2 /2000

If Justification is Right Left Left 0 0

and Padding is

blank

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

22

1 - About Common Features

Example 2 mapEnvVar(TESTVAR, 10, 3333333333)

In this example: The expression uses the environmental variable TESTVAR The environmental variable TESTVAR equals 111222 the 10 character result mapped to the output field is 0000111222 1112220000 111222 This is the result if the field type is ASCII or EBCDIC

If Justification is
Right Left Right

and padding is
0 0 blank

References

For information on mapping operations, see the GML Developer Reference Guide

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Mediation Feature Set Application Pages

This section describes the Mediation Feature Set pages, including information on: Creating Mediation Feature Sets Opening Mediation Feature Set pages Updating Mediation Feature Set pages

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Mediation Features Page

25

Mediation Features Page

After you "Open the Mediation Features Page" (226), you can: "Select an Active Mediation Feature Set" (227)
Figure 5 Mediation Features Page

Elements
This element appears on this page and is described in the Data Dictionary: Active Mediation Feature Set

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

26

2 Mediation Features Application Pages

Open the Mediation Features Page

1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page appears.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Select an Active Mediation Feature Set

27

Select an Active Mediation Feature Set

To select an active mediation feature set: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Mediation Features Page" (226). Select the Active Mediation Feature Set from the drop-down menu. The links for the mediation feature set page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Mediation Feature Sets Page

29

Mediation Feature Sets Page

After you "Open the Mediation Feature Sets Page" (230), you can: "Go to a New Mediation Feature Set Page" (231) "Go to an Existing Mediation Feature Set" (232)
Figure 6 Mediation Feature Sets Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description Name

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

30

2 Mediation Features Application Pages

Open the Mediation Feature Sets Page

To open the Mediation Feature Sets page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click the All Mediation Feature Sets link. The Mediation Feature Sets page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to a New Mediation Feature Set Page

31

Go to a New Mediation Feature Set Page

To go to a new Mediation Feature Set page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Mediation Feature Sets Page" (230). Click the New icon.

The Mediation Feature Set page opens for a new mediation feature set.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

32

2 Mediation Features Application Pages

Go to an Existing Mediation Feature Set

To go to an existing mediation feature set: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Mediation Feature Sets Page" (230). Click the Name of the mediation feature set in the table. The Mediation Feature Set page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

33

2 Mediation Features Application Pages

Mediation Feature Set Page

After you "Open a New Mediation Feature Set Page" (234), you can "Create a New Mediation Feature Set" (236). After you "Open an Existing Mediation Feature Set Page" (235), you can "Update a Mediation Feature Set" (237).
Figure 7 Mediation Feature Set Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description Name

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

34

2 Mediation Features Application Pages

Open a New Mediation Feature Set Page

To open a new Mediation Feature Set page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click All Mediation Feature Sets. The Mediation Feature Sets page opens. Click the New icon.

3.

The Mediation Feature Set page opens for a new mediation feature set.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

35

2 Mediation Features Application Pages

Open an Existing Mediation Feature Set Page

To open an existing Mediation Feature Set page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu. The Mediation Feature Set page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

36

2 Mediation Features Application Pages

Create a New Mediation Feature Set

To create a new mediation feature set: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Mediation Feature Set Page" (2 34). Update these form fields: Description Name 3. Click Submit.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

37

2 Mediation Features Application Pages

Update a Mediation Feature Set

To update a Mediation Feature Set: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Mediation Feature Set Page" (235). Update the form field at the top of the page: Description 3. Update the File Format Definitions by clicking these links on the screen: Fields Structures Modules Module Supports Block Header Trailers File Header Trailers File Formats File Format & Structures Association Audit 4. Update the Search/Filter Application Definitions by clicking these links on the screen: Value Lists Field Filters Record Filters Search/Filter Applications (Audit) 5. Update the Validation Application Definitions by clicking these links on the screen: Value Lists Table Lookup Value Lists Validation Expressions Validation Applications Validation Expressions Order Validation Applications (Audit) 6. Click Submit.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

38

2 Mediation Features Application Pages

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Expression Page

39

Expression Page
After you "Open the Expression Page from the Action Fields Tables" (240) or "Open the Expression Page from the Data Fields Tables" (241), you can: "Create an Expression" (242) "Update an Expression" (244)
Figure 8 Expression Page

Elements
These elements are on this and are described in the Data Dictionary: Correlation Record Mapping Expression Field Format Field Name (Expression Page) File Conversion Name (Correlation File Conversion Expressions) Justification Mapping ID New Record Mapping Expression Padding Store Conversion Name (Correlation Store Conversion Expressions)

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

40

2 Mediation Features Application Pages

Open the Expression Page from the Action Fields Tables

To open the Expression page from the action fields tables: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications Page opens.

3.

Click the Correlation Store Conversion or Correlation File Conversion link. Click the Name of the correlation store conversion or correlation file conversion in the table. Click any of the links in the Mappings column except for the Secondary Key Mappings link. The appropriate mapping page appears. Click a mapping in one of the Action Fields table. A new window opens with the Expression page.

4.

5.

6.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open the Expression Page from the Data Fields Tables

41

Open the Expression Page from the Data Fields Tables

To open the Expression page from the Data Fields tables: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications Page opens.

3. 4.

Click Correlation Store Conversion or Correlation File Conversion. Click the Name of the correlation store conversion or correlation file conversion in the table. Click any of the links in the Mappings column except for the Secondary Key Mappings link. The appropriate mapping page appears. Click a mapping in one of the Data Fields tables. Create or update a mapping. Click Expression. A new window opens with the Expression page.

5.

6. 7. 8.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

42

2 Mediation Features Application Pages

Create an Expression
To create an expression: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications Page opens.

3. 4.

Click Correlation Store Conversion or Correlation File Conversion. Click the Name of the correlation store conversion or correlation file conversion in the table. Click any of the links in the Mappings column except for the Secondary Key Mappings link. The appropriate mapping page appears. Click a mapping in one of the Data Fields tables or the Action Fields tables. Create a new mapping by clicking a New icon.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Fill out these form fields: Name Start (for Field Mappings) Length

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create an Expression

43

9. 10.

Click Expression. A new window opens with the Expression page. Fill out these form fields: Justification Padding Default Value

11. 12.

Build expressions using the items in the drop-down menus: Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

44

2 Mediation Features Application Pages

Update an Expression
To update an expression: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Expression Page from the Action Fields Tables" (240) or "Open the Expression Page from the Data Fields Tables" (241). Fill out these form fields: Justification Padding 3. 4. Update expressions using the items in the drop-down menus: Click Submit.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Secondary Key Mapping Page (Correlation File Conversion and

45

Secondary Key Mapping Page (Correlation File Conversion and Correlation Store Conversion)
The Secondary Key Mapping page lets you define optional secondary key conditions that you can apply to an input or source record. You can open this page from the Correlation Store Conversion or Correlation File Conversion pages. After you "Open a New Secondary Key Mapping Page" (247), you can "Create a Secondary Key Mapping Expression" (249). After you "Open an Existing Secondary Key Mapping Page" (248), you can "Update a Secondary Key Mapping" (250).
Figure 9 Secondary Key Mapping Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

46

2 Mediation Features Application Pages

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: File Conversion Name (for Correlation File Conversion Expressions) Justification Key Type Name Padding Secondary Key Secondary Key Expression Source Structure Store Conversion Name (for Correlation Store Conversion Expressions) Target Record

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open a New Secondary Key Mapping Page

47

Open a New Secondary Key Mapping Page

1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications.

3. 4.

Click Correlation Store Conversion or Correlation File Conversion. Click the Name of the correlation store conversion or correlation file conversion in the table. Click Secondary Key Mappings in the Mappings column. Click the New icon.

5. 6.

A new Secondary Key Mappings page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

48

2 Mediation Features Application Pages

Open an Existing Secondary Key Mapping Page

To open an existing Secondary Key Mapping page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications.

3. 4.

Click Correlation Store Conversion or Correlation File Conversion. Click the Name of the correlation store conversion or correlation file conversion in the table. Click Secondary Key Mappings in the Mappings column. Click the Secondary Key in the table. The Secondary Key Mappings page opens.

5. 6.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a Secondary Key Mapping Expression

49

Create a Secondary Key Mapping Expression

To create a secondary key mapping: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Secondary Key Mapping Page" (247). Fill out these form fields: Secondary Key Key Type Source Structure Justification Padding 3. 4. Build an expression using the items in the drop-down menu: Click Submit.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

50

2 Mediation Features Application Pages

Update a Secondary Key Mapping

To update a secondary key mapping: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Secondary Key Mapping Page" (248). Click the secondary key mapping in the table. The Secondary Key Mapping page opens. Update these form fields: Justification Padding 4. 5. Update the expression using the items in the drop-down menu: Click Submit.

2.

3.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

About the Package Manager Application

This chapter describes the package manager application, including information on: Overview Accessing the Package Manager Application Pages Setting Up a Package Transferring File and Block Headers/Trailers Working with Record Blocking Working with Record Structure Mapping Auditing a Package Installing a Package in the Application Stream

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

52

3 - About the Package Manager Application

Overview
The Package Manager feature lets you determine what output packaging changes, if any, that you need to make to files being processed in the source application stream or the destination application stream.
Figure 10 Package Manager Application

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Overview

53

The Package Manager Application is not as sophisticated as the File Format application because it does not convert one file format to another; however, the Package Manager Application can perform basic functions that are similar to format without setting up an entire format conversion ID. The Package Manager application is typically used for instances that require changes to file packaging. Packaging is the way that a file is designed or grouped so that an application (AS400, CABS, and so on) can read it. For example, if an incoming file has file and block headers/trailers but the billing system only requires file headers and trailers, you can create a package that has block headers and trailers removed from the file without having to set up a file format conversion. Optional sections in Package Manager let you manage these three areas: Headers and trailers to determine if headers and trailers are included in the output file Data blocks to define variable or fixed-size blocks with an optional block descriptor word Record structure to define end-of-record sequence, bit stuffing sequence, and record descriptor word

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

54

3 - About the Package Manager Application

Accessing the Package Manager Application Pages

After you open the Mediation Features Page, a short menu of links appears at the top of the page with several mediation feature applications, including the Package Manager Application.
Figure 11 Package Manager Application Link

When you click the Package Manager Applications link, the Package Manager Applications Page opens, which is a container page that lists all the packages in a table.
Figure 12 The Package Manager Applications Container Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Accessing the Package Manager Application Pages

55

When you click a link in this table, the corresponding Package Manager Summary Page opens. This page provides links to the three package manager application pages.
Table 3 Package Manager Summary Page Icons and the Corresponding Pages

Click this link

To Go to the Package Manager Application Page, which lets you assign an input file format and output file format for the package, then select which block and file header/trailers to transfer or delete Go to the Package Manager Record Blocking Page, which lets you configure the settings for record blocking Go to the Package Manager Record Structure Mapping Page, which lets you configure the settings for the end of record sequence, the bit stuff sequence, and the end of file sequence features. You can also determine whether you want to delete bytes from the beginning from data records and file and block header/trailers

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

56

3 - About the Package Manager Application

When you click the new icon on this page, the Create a New Package Wizard opens. This wizard has three screens that are similar to the three pages on the Package Manager Summary Page.
Figure 13 The Create a New Package Wizard

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Setting Up a Package

57

Setting Up a Package
Figure 14, "Creating a Package" (3-57), shows how the Package Manager Application is defined on the "Create a New Package Wizard" (473). When creating a package, you do not have to select all of the available options.
Figure 14 Creating a Package

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

58

3 - About the Package Manager Application

Transferring File and Block Headers/Trailers

At times, downstream applications cannot accept or do not require file and block headers/trailers. On the "Package Manager Application Page" (487), you can select which file or block headers/trailers to include in the file. By default all defined headers and trailers are included in the transfer unless you make changes. When you transfer headers and trailers: If you include or exclude a header, the same action is applied to any associated trailers If you define an action on one level of a header or trailer, the other levels are not affected GRID updates any counts that can be affected by the removal of the header and trailer records

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with Record Blocking

59

Working with Record Blocking

Many destinations are mainframe type systems, usually an IBM system running an Multiple Virtual Storage (MVS) or similar operating system, that store data in fixedsize blocks before processing. The format of usage data collected from sources is primarily in variable size records and blocks. So, the data must be repackaged for the mainframe type system to interpret the data correctly. In the past, all call detail records were read from tape. The data was read in a block up to the maximum size of the tape block. If the size of the block or record on tape was less than the maximum size, then the read process read up to the Inter-Record Gap (IRG), allowing the receiving process to receive variable blocks. The receiving process padded the variable length blocks to fit the mainframes fixed block format. The application on the mainframe was then able to parse the fixed length blocks. Currently call detail records are transmitted directly to the destination without being written to tape. Some mainframe type systems have special subsystems to handle nonblocked data while others depend on an outboard system to repackage the data in blocked format. These solutions are expensive and not universally available. Using the Package Manager feature, blocking (combining data in fixed or variable-sized groups) can be performed before transmitting the file. This process allows direct interface with a mainframe without using tape, a special subsystem, or outboard system to repackage variable size records and blocks into fixed blocks. Record blocking is based on the accumulated size of the block or the number of records in the block. If data input is blocked, only one block of input data is included in an output block, even if by adding another block, the block is smaller than the requested size. If an input data block is larger than an output block, it is split across blocks but records are not split When working with record blocking for headers and trailers: A header can be used without a trailer For a given level, if one header has a trailer, then all headers at that level must have a trailer The record blocking section applies only to included headers/trailers If record blocking is applied to a header or trailer, that header or trailer appears in a block by itself

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

60

3 - About the Package Manager Application

Examples
Figure 15, "Variable-Length Blocks" (3-60) provides shows how a file looks on an IBM system when the blocks are sent as variable-length blocks. The blocks are mapped into the fixed block format of 2048 bytes that the system uses for disk files. These blocks can be broken in the middle of a data record.
Figure 15 Variable-Length Blocks

Figure 16, "Fixed Length Blocks" (3-60) provides shows the same data records that are padded out to match the mainframe fixed block size. The extra padding characters are added by Package Manager and sent as part of the file.The receiving system uses them to make the blocks a fixed size on its system. This configuration places a single block into a fixed-size block on the mainframe.
Figure 16 Fixed Length Blocks

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with Record Blocking

61

Block Descriptor Word

A block descriptor word is a generic name used on the Data Mediation system to describe the field where the block length is stored. On the Package Manager Record Blocking Page, you can choose whether to include the block descriptor word in the block length. When working with block descriptor words: The concept of a block descriptor word is based on, but not limited to, the BAF block descriptor word A block descriptor word generically provides the size of the block For the BAF file format, the block descriptor word is four bytes long in hexadecimal format For the BAF file format, the block descriptor word has an llzz layout. This means that the block length is placed in the first two bytes and zeros are in the last two bytes For existing block descriptor words you must specify: If the value in the block descriptor word is the size of the block before adding the pad characters If the value in the block descriptor word is the size of the block after adding the pad characters Whether the size of the block descriptor word is included
Note The AUTOPLEX file format refers to this field as the block header

End of Block Sequence

If an End of Block sequence is provisioned, it is placed at the end of each generated block. The End of Block sequence is not accommodated in the block descriptor word if there is one If the file format uses a block descriptor word as a Tier 1 block header and you want fixed-size blocks, different fixed-size blocks, or to pack more records into the block (maybe Filter eliminates some records), you can choose to not pass the Tier 1 block header 1 through and then provision the block descriptor word using the Package Manager Application.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

62

3 - About the Package Manager Application

Working with Record Structure Mapping

A record structure mapping uses the concept of a sequence of special bytes that indicates the end of a record. To send data in a record structure, the end-of-record characters are placed at the end of each record and an optional end-of-file character is placed after the last record in a file. The receiving FTP destination looks for the End of Record characters, removes the End of Record sequence, and presents individual records to a calling application, or the data can be stored on disk with the additional characters embedded in the file. Then another procedure parses the records and presents the individual records to a controlling application. When working with record structure mapping: If you define record structure support for a Package Manager ID, that definition applies to all records, including headers and trailers that reach the Package Manager Application You can include or exclude any of these parts that define the record structure, including: The End of Record Sequence The Bit Stuff Sequence The End of File Sequence The Bytes to remove from the beginning of the record Do not use it with AMATPS tape Field End of Record Bit Stuff Sequence End of File Bytes to Delete from the Beginning of Binary Binary Binary Format Value

ff01 ff ff03

You need to delete 2 bytes from every type of record

End-of-Record Sequence
With the end-of-record sequences, the end-of-record characters are inserted at the end of each usage record. However, the end-of-record sequence is not included in the record length field if one already exists. End-of-record sequences are not bit stuffed, even if bit stuffing is specified on the page.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with Record Structure Mapping

63

Bit Stuff Sequence

The bit stuff sequence prevents a receiving application from breaking up a record that happens to contain data that matches the end-of-record or end-of-file sequence. For each bit stuff sequence found in a record, a second bit stuff sequence is added to the record immediately following the triggering sequence. Bit stuff sequences are not included in the record length if one already exists.

End of File Sequence

The end-of-file sequence characters are inserted after the end of record of the last record in the file. A separate end-of-file sequence accompanies each file in a set of files that are transmitted. Sequences are not included in the file length field, if there is one. The end-of-file sequence is not bit stuffed, even if bit stuffing is specified on the page.

Delete Bytes From the Beginning

When you select this check box, you can remove a leading record descriptor word or other bytes on a file header or trailer, tier block header or trailer, or data record. Any removed bytes are not included in the record length field, if it exists and record structure mapping is applied to the selected record. If the file format is a standard FTP, you must delete 2 bytes from every type of record. Examples of these file formats are BAF, AUTOPLEX, and DAS data.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

64

3 - About the Package Manager Application

Auditing a Package
The Package Manager audit feature is not on a separate page. Instead, this feature is located on the "Package Manager Application Page" (487). This audit feature lets you audit a package for potential errors. When you click the Audit Button, the system makes sure that the package contains everything that it requires to process the package. Audit a package whenever you create a new package using the wizard or whenever you update a package. A new Package Manager Application has to be audited before it can be used.
Figure 17 The Package Manager Application Page with the Audit Section

After you run the audit, the audit messages are listed in the Results box and the information in the Last Audited field is updated with the date and time of the latest audit. When a package manager audit fails, use the information in the audit messages to help you start troubleshooting the issue.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Installing a Package in the Application Stream

65

Installing a Package in the Application Stream

After you create a package and audit the package, use the Source Application Associations and Destination Application Associations pages to associate the package ID with a source or destination entity and input file format, then install the package name in an application stream. There is one package per source application association. In the application stream, the package can be combined with other mediation features, such as Filter, Format, and Validation. If you use these other features, Package Manager is always the last application specified.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Package Manager Application Pages

This section describes the package manager pages, including information on: Creating package manager applications Updating package manager applications Opening the package manager pages

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Package Manager Applications Page

69

Package Manager Applications Page

After you "Open the Package Manager Applications Page" (470), you can: "Go to the Create a New Package Wizard" (471) "Go to the Package Manager Summary Page" (472)
Figure 18 Package Manager Applications Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description Input File Format (for Mediation Features) Name Output File Format

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

70

4 Package Manager Application Pages

Open the Package Manager Applications Page

To open the Package Manager Application page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Package Manager Applications.

The Package Manager Applications page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to the Create a New Package Wizard

71

Go to the Create a New Package Wizard

To go to the Create a New Package wizard: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Package Manager Applications Page" (470). Click the New icon.

2.

The Create a New Package Wizard opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

72

4 Package Manager Application Pages

Go to the Package Manager Summary Page

To go to the Package Manager Summary page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Package Manager Applications Page" (470). Click the Name of the package manager application in the table. The Package Manager Summary page opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a New Package Wizard

73

Create a New Package Wizard

Using the Create a New Package Wizard, you can "Create a New Package" (478) by filling out the form fields on these three screens: Package Manager Application Package Manager Record Blocking Package Manager Record Structure Mapping
Figure 19 Create a New Package Wizard Screen One

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Delete Empty File Headers/Trailers Delete Empty Tier 1 Block Headers/Trailers? Delete Empty Tier 2 Block Headers/Trailers? Delete Empty Tier 3 Block Headers/Trailers? Description Input File Format (for Mediation Features) Name Output File Format Transfer File Headers/Trailers Transfer Tier 1 Block Headers/Trailers

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

74

4 Package Manager Application Pages

Transfer Tier 2 Block Headers/Trailers Transfer Tier 3 Block Headers/Trailers

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a New Package Wizard

75

Figure 20 Create a New Package Wizard Screen Two

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Base Block Descriptor Word Block Type Data Length (for Block Descriptor Word) Data Records (for Package Manager Record Blocking Page) Default Value (for Block Descriptor Words) End of Block Sequence Field Length File Headers/Trailers (For Package Manager Record Blocking Page) Format Include in Block Length Include in Block Record Count Length Maximum Block Length Maximum Records per Block Package Manager Name Record Blocking Replace a Tier 1 Block Header Start Position

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

76

4 Package Manager Application Pages

Tier 1 Block Headers/Trailers (for Package Manager Record Blocking Page) Tier 2 Block Headers/Trailers (for Package Manager Record Blocking Page) Tier 3 Block Headers/Trailers (for Package Manager Record Blocking Page) Value (for Package Manager)

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a New Package Wizard

77

Figure 21 Create a New Package Wizard Screen Three

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Bit Stuff Sequence Data Records (for Package Manager Record Structure Mapping Page) Delete Bytes from the Beginning End of File Sequence End of Record Sequence File Headers/Trailers (For Package Manager Record Structure Mapping Page) Format Length (for Package Manager Record Structure Mapping Page) Package Manager Name Tier 1 Block Headers/Trailers (for Package Manager Record Structure Mapping Page) Tier 2 Block Headers/Trailers (for Package Manager Record Structure Mapping Page) Tier 3 Block Headers/Trailers (for Package Manager Record Structure Page) Value (for Package Manager)

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

78

4 Package Manager Application Pages

Create a New Package

1. Fill out these form fields: Name Description Input File Format (for Mediation Features) Output File Format Transfer File Headers/Trailers Transfer Tier 1 Block Headers/Trailers Transfer Tier 2 Block Headers/Trailers Transfer Tier 3 Block Headers/Trailers Delete Empty File Headers/Trailers Delete Empty Tier 1 Block Headers/Trailers? Delete Empty Tier 2 Block Headers/Trailers? Delete Empty Tier 3 Block Headers/Trailers? 2. Click Next. The wizard opens the Package Manager Record Blocking screen. If you want record blocking, select the Record Blocking check box, then fill out these form fields: Block Type Maximum Block Length Maximum Records per Block 4. If the block type is Fixed, then fill out these fill character form fields: Format Length Value Include in Block Length 5. Select the check boxes for the items that you want to Apply Record Blocking to. To include the block descriptor word in the block record count, select the Block Descriptor Word check box, then fill out these form fields: Format Base Field Length Default Value (for Block Descriptor Words) Start Position Data Length

3.

6.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a New Package

79

Include in Block Record Count Include in Block Length Replace a Tier 1 Block Header 7. To turn the end-of-block sequence on, select the End of Block Sequence check box, then fill out these form fields: Format Length Value (for Package Manager) 8. Click Next. The wizard opens the Package Manager Record Structure Mapping screen. To turn the end-of-record sequence on, select the End of Record Sequence check box, then fill out these form fields: Format Length Value (for Package Manager) 10. To turn the bit stuff sequence on, select the Bit Stuff Sequence check box, then fill out these form fields: Format Length Value (for Package Manager) 11. To turn the end-of-file sequence on, select the End of File Sequence check box, then fill out these form fields: Format Length Value 12. To delete bytes from the beginning, select the Delete Bytes from the Beginning check box, then fill out these form fields: File Headers/Trailers (For Package Manager Record Structure Mapping Page) Data Records (for Package Manager Record Structure Mapping Page) Tier 1 Block Headers/Trailers (for Package Manager Record Structure Mapping Page) Tier 2 Block Headers/Trailers (for Package Manager Record Structure Mapping Page) Tier 3 Block Headers/Trailers (for Package Manager Record Structure Page) 13. Click Finish.

9.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Package Manager Summary Page

81

Package Manager Summary Page

After you "Open the Package Manager Summary Page" (482), you can: "Go to the Package Manager Application Page" (483) "Go to the Package Manager Record Blocking Page" (484) "Go to the Package Manager Record Structure Mapping Page" (485)
Figure 22 Package Manager Summary Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description Input File Format (for Mediation Features) Output File Format Package Manager Name

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

82

4 Package Manager Application Pages

Open the Package Manager Summary Page

To open the Package Manager Summary page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Package Manager Applications. The Package Manager Applications page opens.

3.

Click the Name of the package manager application in the table. The Package Manager Summary page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to the Package Manager Application Page

83

Go to the Package Manager Application Page

To go to the Package Manager Application page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Package Manager Summary Page" (482). Click the Package Manager Application link. The Package Manager Application page opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

84

4 Package Manager Application Pages

Go to the Package Manager Record Blocking Page

To go to the Package Manager Record Blocking page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Package Manager Summary Page" (482). Click the Package Manager Record Blocking link. The Package Manager Record Blocking page opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to the Package Manager Record Structure Mapping Page

85

Go to the Package Manager Record Structure Mapping Page

To go to the Package Manager Record Structure Mapping page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Package Manager Summary Page" (482). Click the Package Manager Record Structure Mapping link. The Package Manager Record Structure Mapping page opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Package Manager Application Page

87

Package Manager Application Page

After you "Open the Package Manager Application Page" (489), you can: "Update the Package Manager Application Page" (490) "Audit the Package Manager Application Page" (491) "Go to Another Page in the Package Manager Application" (492)
Figure 23 Package Manager Application

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

88

4 Package Manager Application Pages

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Audit Button Audited? Delete Empty File Headers/Trailers Delete Empty Tier 1 Block Headers/Trailers? Delete Empty Tier 2 Block Headers/Trailers? Delete Empty Tier 3 Block Headers/Trailers? Description Input File Format (for Mediation Features) Last Audited Name Output File Format Transfer File Headers/Trailers Transfer Tier 1 Block Headers/Trailers Transfer Tier 2 Block Headers/Trailers Transfer Tier 3 Block Headers/Trailers

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open the Package Manager Application Page

89

Open the Package Manager Application Page

To open the Package Manager Application page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Package Manager Applications. The Package Manager Applications page opens.

3.

Click the Name of the package manager application in the table. The Package Manager Summary page opens. Click Package Manager Application. The Package Manager Application page opens.

4.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

90

4 Package Manager Application Pages

Update the Package Manager Application Page

To update the Package Manager Application page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Package Manager Application Page" (489). Update these form fields: Description Input File Format (for Mediation Features) Output File Format Transfer File Headers/Trailers Transfer Tier 1 Block Headers/Trailers Transfer Tier 2 Block Headers/Trailers Transfer Tier 3 Block Headers/Trailers Delete Empty File Headers/Trailers Delete Empty Tier 1 Block Headers/Trailers? Delete Empty Tier 2 Block Headers/Trailers? Delete Empty Tier 3 Block Headers/Trailers? 3. Click Submit.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Audit the Package Manager Application Page

91

Audit the Package Manager Application Page

To audit the Package Manager Application page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Package Manager Application Page" (489). Click Audit. The Audit Results appear in the large text box and the Last Audited field is updated.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

92

4 Package Manager Application Pages

Go to Another Page in the Package Manager Application

To go to another page in the Package Manager Application: 1. 2. Open one of the Package Manager Application pages. Select one of these pages from the Go drop-down menu. Package Manager Summary Package Manager Application Package Manager Record Blocking Package Manager Record Structure Mapping The page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Package Manager Record Blocking Page

93

Package Manager Record Blocking Page

After you "Open the Package Manager Record Blocking Page" (495), you can: "Update the Package Manager Record Blocking Page" (496) "Go to Another Page in the Package Manager Application" (492)
Figure 24 Package Manager Record Blocking Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Base Block Descriptor Word Block Type Data Length (for Block Descriptor Word) Data Records (for Package Manager Record Blocking Page) Default Value (for Block Descriptor Words) End of Block Sequence Field Length File Headers/Trailers (For Package Manager Record Blocking Page) Format Include in Block Length Include in Block Record Count Length (for Package Manager Record Blocking Page)

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

94

4 Package Manager Application Pages

Maximum Block Length Maximum Records per Block Package Manager Name Record Blocking Replace a Tier 1 Block Header Start Position Tier 1 Block Headers/Trailers (for Package Manager Record Blocking Page) Tier 2 Block Headers/Trailers (for Package Manager Record Blocking Page) Tier 3 Block Headers/Trailers (for Package Manager Record Blocking Page) Value (for Package Manager)

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open the Package Manager Record Blocking Page

95

Open the Package Manager Record Blocking Page

To open the Package Manager Record Blocking page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Package Manager Applications. The Package Manager Applications page opens.

3.

Click the Name of the package manager application in the table. The Package Manager Summary page opens. Click the Package Manager Record Blocking link. The Package Manager Record Blocking page opens.

4.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

96

4 Package Manager Application Pages

Update the Package Manager Record Blocking Page

To update the Package Manager Record Blocking page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Package Manager Record Blocking Page" (495). If you want record blocking, select the Record Blocking check box, then update these form fields: Block Type Maximum Block Length Maximum Records per Block 3. If the Block Type is Fixed, then update these form fields in the Fill Character Sequence Area: Format Length Value Include in Block Length 4. Update the check boxes for the items that you want to Apply Record Blocking to. To include the block descriptor word, select the Block Descriptor Word check box, then fill out these form fields: Format Base Field Length Default Value (for Block Descriptor Words) Start Position Data Length Include in Block Record Count Include in Block Length Replace a Tier 1 Block Header

2.

5.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Update the Package Manager Record Blocking Page

97

6.

To turn the end of block sequence on, select the End of Block Sequence check box, then fill out these form fields: Format Length Value (for Package Manager)

7.

Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Package Manager Record Structure Mapping Page

99

Package Manager Record Structure Mapping Page

This page lets you specify the records to convert to a record structure. After you "Open the Package Manager Record Structure Mapping Page" (4101), you can: "Update the Package Manager Record Structure Mapping Page" (4102) "Go to Another Page in the Package Manager Application" (492)
Figure 25 Package Manager Record Structure Mapping

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Bit Stuff Sequence Data Records (for Package Manager Record Structure Mapping Page) Delete Bytes from the Beginning End of File Sequence End of Record Sequence File Headers/Trailers (For Package Manager Record Structure Mapping Page) Format Length (for Package Manager Record Structure Mapping Page) Package Manager Name

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

100

4 Package Manager Application Pages

Tier 1 Block Headers/Trailers (for Package Manager Record Structure Mapping Page) Tier 2 Block Headers/Trailers (for Package Manager Record Structure Mapping Page) Tier 3 Block Headers/Trailers (for Package Manager Record Structure Page) Value (for Package Manager)

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open the Package Manager Record Structure Mapping Page

101

Open the Package Manager Record Structure Mapping Page

To open the Package Manager Record Structure Mapping page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Package Manager Applications.

The Package Manager Applications page opens. 3. Click the Name of the package manager application in the table. The Package Manager Summary page opens. Click Package Manager Record Structure Mapping.

4.

The Package Manager Record Structure Mapping page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

102

4 Package Manager Application Pages

Update the Package Manager Record Structure Mapping Page

To update the Package Manager Record Structure Mapping page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Package Manager Record Structure Mapping Page" (4101). To turn the end-of-record sequence on, select the End of Record Sequence check box, then fill out these form fields: Format Length Value 3. To turn the bit stuff sequence on, select the Bit Stuff Sequence check box, then fill out these form fields: Format Length Value 4. To turn the end-of-file sequence on, select the End of File Sequence check box, then fill out these form fields: Format Length Value 5. To delete bytes from the beginning, select the Delete Bytes from the Beginning check box, then fill out these form fields: File Headers/Trailers (For Package Manager Record Structure Mapping Page) Data Records (for Package Manager Record Structure Mapping Page) Tier 1 Block Headers/Trailers (for Package Manager Record Structure Mapping Page) Tier 2 Block Headers/Trailers (for Package Manager Record Structure Mapping Page) Tier 3 Block Headers/Trailers (for Package Manager Record Structure Page) 6. Click Submit.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

About File Format Conversion

This chapter describes the package manager applications, including information on: Overview Accessing the File Format Conversion Pages Setting Up a File Format Conversion Understanding the Three Types of File Format Conversions Working with Modules and File Format Conversion Installing a File Format Conversion Definition in the Application Streams Working Exception Handling and File Format Conversion Understanding the Data Process Flow and File Format Conversion

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

104

5 Package Manager Application Pages

Overview
Using the File Format Conversion Application, you can convert records from a source input file format to a target output file format by: Merging different input formats into a single output format, sometimes referred to as normalization Creating customized output file formats on an individual destination basis File Format Conversion is based on the Generic Record Identification (GRID) feature. The GRID feature lets administrators create file format definitions, which consist of a set of record layout definitions as well as headers and trailers. Administrators can modify base file format definitions that come with Data Mediation or they can create new file format definitions. After these file formats are created, they are assigned to each input source so that Data Mediation can parse call detail records down to the individual field level. After these file format definitions are created with GRID, then the administrator can use the File Format Conversion Application to map input records to output records and then assign data transfers to a destination application to be packaged as this new output file format. A file format conversion can be performed in the source application stream or the destination application stream.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Accessing the File Format Conversion Pages

105

Accessing the File Format Conversion Pages

After you open the Mediation Features Page, a short menu of links appears at the top of the page with several mediation feature applications, including the File Format Conversion Application.
Figure 26 File Format Conversion Applications Link

When you click the File Format Conversion Applications link, the File Format Conversion Applications Page opens, which is a container page that lists all the file format conversions in a table.
Figure 27 The File Format Conversion Applications Container Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

106

5 Package Manager Application Pages

When you click a link in this table, the corresponding File Format Conversion Application Page opens. This page provides links to other file format conversion application pages.
Figure 28 File Format Conversion Application Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Accessing the File Format Conversion Pages

107

When you click the new icon on this page, the new File Format Conversion Application Page opens with empty form fields. No other file format conversion page icons appear until after you fill out these form fields and submit the page.
Figure 29 The New File Format Conversion Application page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

108

5 Package Manager Application Pages

Setting Up a File Format Conversion

Figure 30, "Defining a File Format Conversion" (5-108), shows how the file format conversion is defined.
Figure 30 Defining a File Format Conversion

After the file format definitions are created with GRID, you can set the rules using the File Format Conversion Application to transform records from one format to another format by: Defining global defaults Set a standard global default for each field type in the file format. This value is placed into a field for that defined type for each output record that is generated unless another mapping takes place Defining field defaults Determine the value for a specific field basis that is placed in a target field if a higher precedence mapping is defined, but no value is generated from the mapping Mapping fields Identify fields from the input file format and associate them with the fields in the output file format

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Setting Up a File Format Conversion

109

Mapping records Build individual fields for the output record using values from the input record. These values do not have to be the actual field values from the input record and, instead, can reference the values as with a table lookup, to create an output field value

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

110

5 Package Manager Application Pages

Understanding the Three Types of File Format Conversions

There are three types of File Format Conversions: Generic Record Conversion Normalization Field Extraction

Generic Record Conversion

Generic Record Conversion takes a record from a defined input file format and converts it to a record defined in another file format. This conversion is accomplished by defining a set of mappings for necessary fields of input records to fields of output records. These mappings tell Data Mediation how the output record is assembled based the GRID field attributes, such as field length, field type, default values, and justification.

Normalization
Normalization defines a file format that contains a single record format. All records, no matter what their file format, are mapped to this single record format. Normalization is performed so that potential downstream applications can build to a single input format if they know that Data Mediation is sending this data to them. Also, normalization reduces the number of format conversions that must be defined and executed.

Extraction
Extraction takes only the selected fields from an input record, performs a simple task such as reordering the fields, then sends the fields out to the downstream application.

References

For more information on GRID Field Attributes, see "Working with GRID Field Attributes" (13532)

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with Cross-Level Mappings

111

Working with Cross-Level Mappings

The File Format Conversion Application has a feature called cross-level mapping, which is an enhanced header and trailer mapping feature that lets you map record structures across different categories. Previously with Data Mediation, record structures, such as file headers and trailers and block headers and trailers were only able be mapped to like record structures. For example, if the source file format had a block header record structure, then it had to be mapped to a block header record structure in the target file format. However, if the target file format did not have a corresponding block header structure, it was not able to be mapped to another available structure. With the cross-level mapping feature this block header record structure can now be mapped to other available record structures, such as block trailers, file headers, and file trailers.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

112

5 Package Manager Application Pages

Working with Modules and File Format Conversion

Modules are attachments of new fields to a record. They are added to records to provide additional information about a feature or service. Records can have zero or more modules attached to the core record, which is the base portion of the record which modules can attach to. GRID supports records with attached modules and the core record is not required to specify which modules are attached; however, the modules must contain information that distinguishes one module from another and provide a way to identify the last attached module. The File Format Conversion Application also supports these three types of module mappings: Fields from the source core record that map to fields in the target module Fields from a source record module that map to fields in a target core record Fields from a source record module that map to fields in a target module When using the File Format Conversion Application, you must know and define all source record and module combinations and the appropriate target record and module combinations. Otherwise, the File Format Conversion Application does not know how to map the necessary target fields.

Module Mappings with Cross-Level Mappings

With the cross-level mapping feature, if a record structure in the input file format is mapped to a different structure in the target file format, then the application has to determine how the module associated with the original structure is mapped. The application maps modules separately from the structures and after the structure is mapped, the application determines how the modules are assigned in the target file format.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with Dummy Records and Modules

113

Working with Dummy Records and Modules

When using the dummy record option, you map a input record to a dummy record output record instead of mapping it to a predfined output record. By mapping the input record to this dummy record, you can store up to three values in the structures within the input record in fields in the dummy record. By saving this information from the data record without mapping to an output record (which is eventually directed to the output file), you can retrieve this information more efficiently When using the dummy module option, you use the dummy module as a trigger to perform actions such as initialize strings or sequence numbers, log a start message, and so on.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

114

5 Package Manager Application Pages

Installing a File Format Conversion Definition in the Application Streams

A file format conversion can be installed in the source application stream or the destination application stream.

Using the Application Manager

Using the Application Manager, you can define which applications are to be executed on a per-source-file basis and the order in which they are executed. Application Manager controls the applications, allowing each application to act as an independent process, work on the data that it receives as input, and output the data that meets its criteria.

References

For information about installing file format conversion applications, see "Source Application Associations Page" (2127) in the Sources User Guide or "Destination Application Associations Page" (255) in the Destinations User Guide For information about specifying the Exception File handling feature on input, see "Source Type Parameters Page" (281) in the Sources User Guide For information about specifying the Exception File handling feature on output, see "Destination Type Parameters Page" (245) in the Destinations User Guide

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working Exception Handling and File Format Conversion

115

Working Exception Handling and File Format Conversion

Exception Handling on Input
With Data Mediation, if data is being reformatted on input, then original files are not stored on disk and only the reformatted copies are stored. If the incoming data cannot be correctly formatted, Data Mediation stores the data in an exception file in its original format and two files are created: the file containing the data that was formatted normally the exception file containing the records in the original format that was not able to be reformatted After the reason for failure is determined and upon user command, the exception file is then run through the File Format Conversion Application. The system then creates a new formatted primary file that can be handled as any other input primary file. If a severe problem is encountered on input and the file cannot be parsed, the system stores the entire file in its original form and marks the entire file as an exception. After the error is corrected, the exception file can be manually run through the File Format Conversion Application. This creates a new formatted primary file that can be handled as any other input primary file.

Exception Handling on Output

In some situations a file has been collected, placed on Data Mediation disk, then Data Mediation attempts to take this data, reformat it, and send it to a remote application. If the File Format Conversion Application cannot process the entire file, then the file is left as is, it remains primary or secondary data, and no exception file is generated; however, the disk file is logged as having had an error. The next disk file is parsed and transmitted so that Data Mediation does not stop processing. When the next session with this destination starts, Data Mediation tries to process the file again because it is still primary and is available to be resent through the File Format Conversion Application after the problem has been corrected.

References

For information about how to manage and edit exception records, see "Working with Exceptions" (16) in the Data Files User Guide

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

116

5 Package Manager Application Pages

Understanding the Data Process Flow and File Format Conversion

Figure 31, "Data Process Flow File Format Conversion Applications" (5-116) shows file format conversion in both application streams with the exception feature.
Figure 31 Data Process Flow File Format Conversion Applications

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

File Format Conversion Application Pages

This section describes the File Format Conversion pages, including information on: Creating File Format Conversions Updating File Format Conversions Opening File Format Conversion pages

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

File Format Conversion Applications Page

119

File Format Conversion Applications Page

After you "Open the File Format Conversion Applications Page" (6120), you can: "Go to a New File Format Conversion Application Page" (6121) "Go to an Existing File Format Conversion Application Page" (6122) Before creating and working with a file format conversion application, use a mapping template to predefine the mappings you are going to set up in the file format conversion application.
Figure 32 File Format Conversion Applications Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description Input File Format (for Mediation Features) Name Output File Format

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

120

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Open the File Format Conversion Applications Page

To open the File Format Conversion Applications page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click File Format Conversion Applications.

The File Format Conversion Applications page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to a New File Format Conversion Application Page

121

Go to a New File Format Conversion Application Page

To go to a new File Format Conversion Application page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the File Format Conversion Applications Page" (6120). Click the New icon.

2.

The new File Format Conversion Application page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

122

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Go to an Existing File Format Conversion Application Page

To go to an existing File Format Conversion Application page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the File Format Conversion Applications Page" (6120). Click the Name of the file format conversion in the table. The existing File Format Conversion Page opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

File Format Conversion Application Page

123

File Format Conversion Application Page

After you "Open a New File Format Conversion Application Page" (6126), you can "Create a File Format Conversion" (6127). After you "Open an Existing File Format Conversion Application Page" (6125), you can "Update a File Format Conversion" (6128). Before working with a file format conversion application, use a mapping template to predefine the mappings you are going to set up in the file format conversion application.
Figure 33 File Format Conversion Application Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Audit Button Description Input File Format (for Mediation Features) Name

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

124

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

These elements also appear when you click Copy: New Name Old Name These elements also appear when you click Delete: Delete Audit File Results Name

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open an Existing File Format Conversion Application Page

125

Open an Existing File Format Conversion Application Page

To open an existing File Format Conversion Application page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click File Format Conversion Applications.

The File Format Conversion Applications page opens. 3. Click the Name of the file format conversion application. The existing File Format Conversion Application page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

126

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Open a New File Format Conversion Application Page

To open a new File Format Conversion Application page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click File Format Conversion Applications.

The File Format Conversion Applications page opens. 3. Click the New icon.

The new File Format Conversion Application page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a File Format Conversion

127

Create a File Format Conversion

To create a file format conversion: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open a New File Format Conversion Application Page" (6126). Fill out these form fields at the top of the page: Description Input File Format (for Mediation Features) Name Output File Format 3. 4. Fill out the default values. Click Submit.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

128

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Update a File Format Conversion

To update a file format conversion: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing File Format Conversion Application Page" (6125). Update this form field at the top of the page: Description 3. 4. Update the default values. To update the Globals, click these links on the screen: Value Lists Table Lookup Value Lists 5. To update the Mappings, click these links on the screen: Field Mappings Secondary Key Mappings Record Mappings Module Mappings Block Header/Trailer Mappings Block Header/Trailer Module Mappings File Header Trailer Mappings File Header/Trailer Module Mappings 6. 7. Click Audit. The audit results appear in the Results text box. Click Submit.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Value Lists Page (File Format Conversion)

129

Value Lists Page (File Format Conversion)

After you "Open the Value Lists Page" (6130), you can: "Go to a New Value List Page" (6131) "Go to an Existing Value List Page" (6132) "Go to Another Page in the File Format Conversion" (6133) You must create a value list before you specify the value list as an inList or notInList comparison operator in an expression on the Secondary Key Mapping or Field Mapping page.
Figure 34 Value Lists Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description File Format Conversion ID Name

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

130

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Open the Value Lists Page

To open the Value Lists page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click File Format Conversion Applications.

The File Format Conversion Applications page opens. 3. 4. Click the Name of the file format conversion application. Click Value Lists in the Globals column. The Value Lists page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to a New Value List Page

131

Go to a New Value List Page

To go to a new Value List page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Value Lists Page" (6130). Click the New icon.

A new Value List page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

132

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Go to an Existing Value List Page

To go to an existing Value List page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Value Lists Page" (6130). Click the Name of the value list in the table. The Value List page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to Another Page in the File Format Conversion

133

Go to Another Page in the File Format Conversion

To go to another page in the File Format Conversion: 1. 2. Open a File Format page. Select one of these file format pages from the Go drop-down menu: Value Lists Table Lookup Value Lists Field Mappings Secondary Key Mappings Record Mappings Module Mappings Block Header/Trailer Mappings Block Header/Trailer Module Mappings File Header/Trailer Mappings File Header/Trailer Module Mappings Format Audit

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Value List Page (File Format Conversion)

135

Value List Page (File Format Conversion)

After you "Open a New Value List Page" (6137), you can "Create a Value List" (6139). After you "Open an Existing Value List Page" (6138), you can "Update a Value List" (6140). When creating and updating value lists, you can also: "Add a Value" (6141) "Update a Value" (6142) "Go to Another Page in the File Format Conversion" (6133) After you define a list of values, they can be used in inList or notInList comparison operations on the Secondary Key Mapping and Field Mapping pages.
Figure 35 Value List Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

136

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description File Format Conversion ID Input File Format (for Mediation Features) List Name Output File Format Value

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open a New Value List Page

137

Open a New Value List Page

To open a new Value List page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click File Format Conversion Applications.

The File Format Conversion Applications page opens. 3. 4. 5. Click the Name of the file format conversion application. Click Value Lists in the Globals column. Click the New icon.

A new Value List page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

138

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Open an Existing Value List Page

To open an existing Value List page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click File Format Conversion Applications.

The File Format Conversion Applications page opens. 3. 4. 5. Click the Name of the file format conversion application. Click Value Lists in the Globals column. Click the List Name of the value list in the table. The Value List page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a Value List

139

Create a Value List

1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Value List Page" (6137). Fill out these form fields at the top of the page: File Format Conversion ID Input File Format (for Mediation Features) List Name Output File Format Description 3. 4. To add a value, follow the instructions to "Add a Value" (6141). Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

140

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Update a Value List

To update a value list: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Value List Page" (6137). Fill out these form fields at the top of the page: Description 3. 4. 5. To add a value, follow the instructions to "Add a Value" (6141). To update a value, follow the instructions to "Update a Value" (6142). Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Add a Value

141

Add a Value
To add a value: 1. Click the New icon.

The form appears.

2.

Fill out this form field: Value

3. 4.

Click Update. Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

142

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Update a Value
To update a value: 1. Click the icon beside the value in the table. The form appears.

2.

Update this form field: Value

3. 4.

Click Update. Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Table Lookup Value Lists Page (File Format Conversion)

143

Table Lookup Value Lists Page (File Format Conversion)

After you "Open the Table Lookup Value Lists Page" (6144), you can: "Go to a New Table Lookup Value List Page" (6145) "Go to an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page" (6146) "Go to Another Page in the File Format Conversion" (6133) After you create a table lookup value list, you can specify the table lookup value list as an operator such as a table or dateTable mapping operator in an expression on the Secondary Key Mapping or Field Mapping page.
Figure 36 Table Lookup Value Lists Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description File Format Conversion ID Name

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

144

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Open the Table Lookup Value Lists Page

To open the Table Lookup Value Lists page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click File Format Conversion Applications.

The File Format Conversion Applications page opens. 3. Click the Name of the file format conversion application. The File Format Conversion Application page opens. Click Table Lookup Value Lists in the Globals column. The Table Lookup Value Lists page opens.

4.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to a New Table Lookup Value List Page

145

Go to a New Table Lookup Value List Page

To go to a new Table Lookup Value List page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Table Lookup Value Lists Page" (6 144). Click the New icon.

2.

A new Table Lookup Value List page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

146

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Go to an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page

To go to an existing Table Lookup Value List page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Table Lookup Value Lists Page" (6 144). Click the Name of the table lookup value list in the table. The Table Lookup Value List page opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Table Lookup Value List Page (File Format Conversion)

147

Table Lookup Value List Page (File Format Conversion)

After you "Open a New Table Lookup Value List Page" (6149), you can: "Create a Table Lookup Value List" (6151) "Go to Another Page in the File Format Conversion" (6133) After you "Open an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page" (6150), you can: "Update a Table Lookup Value List" (6152) "Go to Another Page in the File Format Conversion" (6133) After you create a table lookup value list, you can specify the table lookup value list as an operator such as the table or dateTable mapping operator in an expression on the Secondary Key Mapping or Field Mapping page.
Figure 37 Table Lookup Value List Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

148

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description File Format Conversion ID Input File Format Key Value List Name Name Output File Format Table Value

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open a New Table Lookup Value List Page

149

Open a New Table Lookup Value List Page

To open a new Table Lookup Value List page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click File Format Conversion Applications.

The File Format Conversion Applications page opens. 3. Click the Name of the file format conversion application. The File Format Conversion Application page opens. Click Table Lookup Value Lists in the Globals column. The Table Lookup Value Lists page opens. Click the New icon.

4.

5.

A new Table Lookup Value List page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

150

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Open an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page

To open an existing Table Lookup Value List page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click File Format Conversion Applications.

The File Format Conversion Applications page opens. 3. Click the Name of the file format conversion application. The File Format Conversion Application page opens. Click Table Lookup Value Lists in the Globals column. The Table Lookup Value Lists page opens. Click the Name of the table lookup value list in the table. The Table Lookup Value List page opens.

4.

5.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a Table Lookup Value List

151

Create a Table Lookup Value List

To create a table lookup value list: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Table Lookup Value List Page" (6 149). Fill out these form fields at the top of the page: File Format Conversion ID Input File Format Name Output File Format Description To add a value, follow the instructions to "Add a Value" (6153). Click Submit.

2. 3. 4.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

152

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Update a Table Lookup Value List

To update a table lookup value list: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page" (6150). Update this form field at the top of the page: Description 3. 4. 5. To add a value, follow the instructions to "Add a Value" (6153). To update a value, follow the instructions to "Update a Value" (6154). Click Submit.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Add a Value

153

Add a Value
To add a value: 1. Click the New icon.

The form appears.

2.

Fill out this form field: Key Value Target Field Name

3. 4.

Click Update. Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

154

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Update a Value
To update a value: 1. Click the icon beside the value in the table. The form appears.

2.

Update this form field: Key Value Target Field Name

3. 4.

Click Update. Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Field Mappings Page (File Format Conversion)

155

Field Mappings Page (File Format Conversion)

After you "Open the Field Mappings Page" (6156), you can: "Go to an Existing Field Mappings Page" (6157) "Go to Another Page in the Package Manager Application" (492)
Figure 38 Field Mappings Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Format Input File Format Length Mapping Complete? Name Output File Format Start (for Field Mappings)

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

156

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Open the Field Mappings Page

To open the Field Mappings page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click File Format Conversion Applications.

The File Format Conversion Applications page opens. 3. Click the Name of the file format conversion application. The File Format Application page opens. Click Field Mappings in the Mappings column. The Field Mappings page opens.

4.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to an Existing Field Mappings Page

157

Go to an Existing Field Mappings Page

To go to an existing Field Mappings page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Field Mappings Page" (6156). Click the ID of the Field Mapping in the table. The Field Mapping page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Field Mapping Page (File Format Conversion)

159

Field Mapping Page (File Format Conversion)

After you "Open the Field Mapping Page" (6160), you can: "Add a Mapping Expression" (6161) "Update a Mapping Expression" (6162) "Go to Another Page in the File Format Conversion" (6133)
Figure 39 Field Mapping Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description Expression (for Secondary Key Mappings) Field File Format Conversion ID Format Input File Format (for Mediation Features) Length Mapping Complete? Mapping Name Output File Format Start (for Field Mappings)

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

160

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Open the Field Mapping Page

To open the Field Mapping page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click File Format Conversion Applications.

The File Format Conversion Applications page opens. 3. Click the Name of the file format conversion application. The File Format Application page opens. Click Field Mappings in the Mappings column. The Field Mappings page opens. Click the ID of the Field Mapping in the table. The Field Mapping page opens.

4.

5.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Add a Mapping Expression

161

Add a Mapping Expression

To add a mapping expression: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Field Mapping Page" (6160). Click the New icon.

The new mapping expression form appears. 3. Fill out these form fields in the form Mapping Name Start (for Field Mappings) Length 4. 5. Click Expression. The Expression subpage opens. Fill out these form fields at the top of the page: Justification Padding Default Value 6. Build the expression using expressions from the following drop-down menus: Mapping Operators Math Operators Date and Time Globals Comparison Operators GRID Counts 7. 8. Click Submit. Click Previous to go back to the Field Mapping page.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

162

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Update a Mapping Expression

To update a mapping expression: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Field Mapping Page" (6160). Click the expression in the table. The Field Mapping expression subpage opens. Update these form fields at the top of the page: Justification Padding Default Value 4. Update the expression using the expressions in the following drop-down menus: Mapping Operators Math Operators Date and Time Globals Comparison Operators GRID Counts 5. 6. Click Submit. The confirmation checkmark appears. Click Previous to return to the Field Mapping page.

3.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Record Mappings Page (File Format Conversion)

163

Record Mappings Page (File Format Conversion)

After you "Open the Record Mappings Page" (6164), you can: "Go to a New Record Mapping Page" (6165) "Go to an Existing Record Mapping Page" (6166) "Go to Another Page in the File Format Conversion" (6133) You can define up to 50 output record mappings for each input record.
Figure 40 Record Mappings Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Exclusive? Input File Format (for Mediation Features) Input Record Name Order Mapped Output Record Name Output File Format Secondary Key

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

164

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Open the Record Mappings Page

To open the Record Mappings page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click File Format Conversion Applications.

The File Format Conversion Applications page opens. 3. Click the Name of the file format conversion application. The File Format Conversion Application page opens. Click Record Mappings in the Mappings column. The Record Mappings page opens.

4.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to a New Record Mapping Page

165

Go to a New Record Mapping Page

To go to a new Record Mapping page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Record Mappings Page" (6164). Click the New icon in the table.

The Record Mapping page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

166

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Go to an Existing Record Mapping Page

To go to an existing Record Mapping page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Record Mappings Page" (6164). Click the Name of the Record Mapping in the table. The Record Mapping page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Record Mapping Page (File Format Conversion)

167

Record Mapping Page (File Format Conversion)

The Record Mapping page lets you map an input record to an output record and an output module. After you "Open a New Record Mapping Page" (6169), you can: "Update a Record Mapping" (6172) "Go to Another Page in the File Format Conversion" (6133)
Figure 41 Record Mapping Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description Exclusive? File Format Conversion ID Length Input File Format (for Mediation Features) Input Record Name Mapped? Max Trigger Value Offset Order Output Field Name

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

168

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Output File Format Output Module Name Output Record Name Output Record Type Secondary Key Trigger Order Update Type (for File Format Conversion)

References

For information on updating a field mapping, see the "Field Mapping Page (File Format Conversion)" (6159) in this user guide For information on creating or updating module mappings, see the "Module Mapping Page (File Format Conversion)" (6201) in this user guide

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open a New Record Mapping Page

169

Open a New Record Mapping Page

To open a new Record Mapping page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click File Format Conversion Applications.

The File Format Conversion Applications page opens. 3. Click the name of the file format conversion application. The File Format Conversion Application page opens. Click Record Mappings in the Mappings column. The Record Mappings page opens. Click the New icon in the table.

4.

5.

The Record Mapping page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

170

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Open an Existing Record Mapping Page

To open an Existing Record Mapping page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click File Format Conversion Applications.

The File Format Conversion Applications page opens. 3. Click the Name of the file format conversion application. The File Format Conversion Application page opens. Click Record Mappings in the Mappings column. The Record Mappings page opens. Click the ID for the Record Mapping in the table. The Record Mapping page opens.

4.

5.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a New Record Mapping

171

Create a New Record Mapping

To create a new record mapping: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Record Mapping Page" (6169). Fill out these form fields at the top of the page: Input Record Name Secondary Key Output Record Name Order Exclusive? 3. 4. Click Submit. The mapping tables appear. To update a mapping, click the ID in the table. The Field Mapping Expression page opens. Update these form fields at the top of the page: Justification Padding Default Value 6. Update the expression using the expressions in the following drop-down menus: Mapping Operators Math Operators Date and Time Globals Comparison Operators GRID Counts 7. 8. Click Previous to return to the Field Mapping page. Click Submit.

5.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

172

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Update a Record Mapping

To update a record mapping: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Record Mapping Page" (6 170). Update these form fields at the top of the page: Secondary Key Output Record Name Order Exclusive? 3. To update a mapping, click the ID in the table. The Field Mapping Expression page opens. Update these form fields at the top of the page: Justification Padding Default Value 5. Update the expression using the expressions in the following drop-down menus: Mapping Operators Math Operators Date and Time Globals Comparison Operators GRID Counts 6. 7. Click Previous to return to the Field Mapping page. Click Submit.

2.

4.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Secondary Key Mappings Page (File Format Conversion)

173

Secondary Key Mappings Page (File Format Conversion)

After you "Open the Secondary Key Mappings Page" (6174), you can: "Go to a New Secondary Key Mappings Page" (6175) "Go to an Existing Secondary Key Mappings Page" (6176) "Go to Another Page in the File Format Conversion" (6133)
Figure 42 Secondary Key Mappings Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Expression (for Secondary Key Mappings) Input File Format (for Mediation Features) Input Record/Module Name Input Record Type Key Type Output File Format Secondary Key ID

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

174

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Open the Secondary Key Mappings Page

To open the Secondary Key Mappings page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click File Format Conversion Applications.

The File Format Conversion Applications page opens. 3. Click the Name of the file format conversion application. The File Format Conversion Application page opens. Click Secondary Key Mappings in the Mappings column. The Secondary Key Mappings page opens.

4.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to a New Secondary Key Mappings Page

175

Go to a New Secondary Key Mappings Page

To go to a new Secondary Key Mappings page:

1.
2.

Follow the instructions to "Open the Secondary Key Mappings Page"

(6174) Click the New icon.

A new Secondary Key Mapping page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

176

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Go to an Existing Secondary Key Mappings Page

To go to an existing Secondary Key Mappings page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Secondary Key Mappings Page" (6 174) Click the secondary key ID of the secondary key mapping in the table. The Secondary Key Mapping page opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Secondary Key Mapping Page (File Format Conversion)

177

Secondary Key Mapping Page (File Format Conversion)

The Secondary Key Mapping page lets you define optional secondary key conditions that can be applied to an input record. After you "Open a New Secondary Key Mapping Page" (6179), you can: "Create a Secondary Key Mapping" (6181) "Go to Another Page in the File Format Conversion" (6133) After you "Open an Existing Secondary Key Mapping Page" (6180), you can: "Update a Secondary Key Mapping" (6182) "Rename a Secondary Key Mapping" (6183) "Go to Another Page in the File Format Conversion" (6133) If you plan to apply secondary key conditions to your record or module mappings, you need to complete this page before you complete the Record Mapping page or Module Mapping page.
Figure 43 Secondary Key Mapping Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

178

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Expression (for Secondary Key Mappings) Format Conversion ID Input Record Name Input Record Type Justification Key Type Secondary Key Padding

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open a New Secondary Key Mapping Page

179

Open a New Secondary Key Mapping Page

To open a new Secondary Key Mapping page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click File Format Conversion Applications.

The File Format Conversion Applications page opens. 3. Click the Name of the file format conversion application. The File Format Conversion Application page opens. Click Secondary Key Mappings in the Mappings column. The Secondary Key Mappings page opens. Click the New icon.

4.

5.

A new Secondary Key Mapping page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

180

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Open an Existing Secondary Key Mapping Page

To open an existing Secondary Key Mapping page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click File Format Conversion Applications.

The File Format Conversion Applications page opens. 3. Click the Name of the file format conversion application. The File Format Conversion Application page opens. Click Secondary Key Mappings in the Mappings column. The Secondary Key Mappings page opens. Click the secondary key ID in the table. The Secondary Key Mapping page.

4.

5.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a Secondary Key Mapping

181

Create a Secondary Key Mapping

To create a secondary key mapping: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Secondary Key Mapping Page" (6179). Fill out these form fields at the top of the page: File Format Conversion ID Key Type Justification Input Record Name Secondary Key ID Padding 3. 4. Build an expression using the expressions listed in the drop-down menu. Click Submit.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

182

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Update a Secondary Key Mapping

To update a secondary key mapping: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Secondary Key Mapping Page" (6180). Update these form fields at the top of the page: Justification Padding 3. 4. Build an expression using the expressions listed in the drop-down menu. Click Submit.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Rename a Secondary Key Mapping

183

Rename a Secondary Key Mapping

To rename a secondary key mapping: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Secondary Key Mapping Page" (6180). Click Rename. Change the Name of the secondary key mapping in the Secondary Key field. Click Submit.

2. 3.

4.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Block Header/Trailer Mappings Page

185

Block Header/Trailer Mappings Page

After you "Open the Block Header/Trailer Mappings Page" (6187), you can: "Go to an Existing Record Mapping Page" (6188) "Go to Another Page in the File Format Conversion" (6133) You can map block header and trailer records in either of the following ways: Specify record mappings from an input file block header/trailer to any non-data record (block header/trailers or file headers/trailers) Specify triggers to create block headers and trailers that can be inserted in the output file Use a triggered block header or trailer if the output file format has block headers or trailers, but the input file format does not. You can assign values to specific fields for triggered block headers and trailers, such as current time or number of records. However, you cannot map these fields from input record fields.
Figure 44 Block Header/Trailer Mappings Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

186

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Exclusive? Input File Format (for Mediation Features) Input Record Name Maximum Value Order Output File Format Output Record Name Output Record Type Secondary Key Trigger Name Type

References

For more information on Triggers, see "Triggers" (115) in this user guide

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open the Block Header/Trailer Mappings Page

187

Open the Block Header/Trailer Mappings Page

To open the Block Header/Trailer Mappings page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click File Format Conversion Applications.

The File Format Conversion Applications page opens. 3. Click the Name of the file format conversion application. The File Format Conversion Application page opens. Click Block Header/Trailer Mappings in the Mappings column. The Block Header/Trailer Mappings page opens.

4.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

188

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Go to an Existing Record Mapping Page

To go to an Existing Record Mapping page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Block Header/Trailer Mappings Page" (6187). Click the ID of the input record in the Block Header/Trailer Mappings or Trigger Mappings table. The corresponding Record Mapping page opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to a New Record Mapping Page

189

Go to a New Record Mapping Page

To go to new Record Mapping page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Block Header/Trailer Mappings Page" (6187). Click the New icon in the Block Header/Trailer Mappings or Trigger Mappings table.

2.

The corresponding Record Mapping page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

File Header/Trailer Mappings Page

191

File Header/Trailer Mappings Page

After you "Open the File Header/Trailer Mappings Page" (6193), you can: "Go to the Record Mapping Page" (6194) "Go to Another Page in the File Format Conversion" (6133) You can map file header and trailer records in either of the following ways: Specify record mappings from an input file header or trailer to any nondata record (block header/trailer or file header/trailer) Specify triggers to create file headers and trailers that can be inserted in the output file Use a triggered file header or trailer if the output file format has file headers or trailers, but the input file format does not. You can assign values to specific fields for triggered file headers and trailers, such as current time or number of records. However, you cannot map these fields from input record fields.
Figure 45 File Header/Trailer Mappings Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

192

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Exclusive? Input File Format (for Mediation Features) Input Record Name Maximum Value Order Output File Format Output Record Name Output Record Type Secondary Key Trigger Name Type

References

For more information about file header and trailer triggers, see "Triggers" (115)in this user guide

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open the File Header/Trailer Mappings Page

193

Open the File Header/Trailer Mappings Page

To open the File Header/Trailer Mappings page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click File Format Conversion Applications.

3.

Click the Name of the file format conversion application. The File Format Conversion Application page opens. Click File Header/Trailer Mappings in the Mappings column. The File Header/Trailer Mappings page opens.

4.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

194

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Go to the Record Mapping Page

To go to the Record Mapping page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the File Header/Trailer Mappings Page" (6193). Click the ID in the File Header/Trailer Mappings table. The File Header/Trailer Mapping page opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Module Mappings Page (File Format Conversion)

195

Module Mappings Page (File Format Conversion)

The Module Mappings page shows mappings for modules associated with the specified input file format. There are three variations of the Module Mappings page: Module Mappings page for data record modules Block Header/Trailer Module Mappings page for block header/trailer modules File Header/Trailer Module Mappings page for file header/trailer modules After you "Open the Module Mappings Page" (6197), you can: "Go to a New Module Mapping Page" (6198) "Go to an Existing Module Mapping Page" (6199) "Go to Another Page in the File Format Conversion" (6133)
Figure 46 Module Mappings Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Exclusive? Input File Format (for Mediation Features) Input Module Name Order

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

196

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Output File Format Output Module Name Output Module Type Secondary Key Trigger Name Type

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open the Module Mappings Page

197

Open the Module Mappings Page

To open the Module Mappings page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click File Format Conversion Applications.

3.

Click the Name of the file format conversion application. The File Format Conversion Application page opens. Click Module Mappings in the Mappings column. The Module Mappings page opens.

4.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

198

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Go to a New Module Mapping Page

To go to a new Module Mapping page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Module Mappings Page" (6197). Click the New icon in the table.

The Module Mapping page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to an Existing Module Mapping Page

199

Go to an Existing Module Mapping Page

To go to an existing Module Mapping page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Module Mappings Page" (6197). Click the ID of the module mapping. The Module Mapping page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Module Mapping Page (File Format Conversion)

201

Module Mapping Page (File Format Conversion)

The Module Mapping page lets you: Map an input field/subfield to an output module Map an input module to an output module After you "Open a New Module Mapping Page" (6203), you can: "Update the Module Mapping" (6205) "Go to Another Page in the File Format Conversion" (6133)
Figure 47 Module Mapping Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description Exclusive? File Format Conversion ID Input File Format (for Mediation Features) Input Module Name Length Mapped?

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

202

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Module Secondary Key Offset Order Output Field Name Output File Format Output Module Name

References

For information on updating the Field Mappings, see the "Field Mapping Page (File Format Conversion)" (6159) in this user guide

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open a New Module Mapping Page

203

Open a New Module Mapping Page

To open a new Module Mapping page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click File Format Conversion Applications.

3.

Click the Name of the file format conversion application. The File Format Conversion Application page opens. Click Module Mappings in the Mappings column. The Module Mappings page opens. Click the New icon in the table.

4.

5.

The Module Mapping page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

204

6 File Format Conversions Application Pages

Open an Existing Module Mapping Page

To open an existing Module Mapping page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click File Format Conversion Applications.

3.

Click the Name of the file format conversion application. The File Format Conversion Application page opens. Click Module Mappings in the Mappings column. The Module Mappings page opens. Click the ID for the module mapping in the table. The Module Mapping page opens.

4.

5.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Update the Module Mapping

205

Update the Module Mapping

To update the Module Mapping: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Module Mapping Page" (6203). Update these form fields at the top of the page: Module Secondary Key Order Exclusive? 3. 4. Update the Field Mappings. Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

About the Correlation Applications

This chapter describes the correlation applications, including information on: Overview Accessing the Correlation Conversion Pages Defining Correlation Rules Working with Correlation Mapping Working with Control Data Fields and Control Action Fields Working with Output File Management Working with Correlation File Conversions Working with Correlation IDs Working with Output File Management Working with Output Record Management Working with CORFILTER

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

208

7 - About the Correlation Applications

Overview
To meet the billing problems that have come with high-bandwidth Internet access, mobile Internet access, e-commerce, and content-enhanced value-added services, CSG offers the correlation applications, which are highly flexible, are event-based, and provide truly convergent mediation capabilities, to help service providers bill timely and accurately for these services. Using the correlation applications, an administrator can define rules for how related records are identified, matched together, and combined into a single complete event record. The system then uses these rules to match related records, account for time stamp synchronization between sources, and generate a complete record of the event that can be sent to downstream applications, such as billing. Events can be received from different elements in the network, in different data formats, and in non-sequential time order. The correlation feature converts and combines multiple records from the same event into a one or more billable records by: Identifying the records that require correlation Storing records until all related records are received Harvesting the completed records into a file for distribution to one or more downstream destinations The correlation feature is based on the functionality of two underlying Data Mediation system features: Generic Record Identification (GRID) defines the input file format and the correlation file format. The correlation file format is the user-defined structure for all correlation records stored in and harvested from the correlation store Format Conversion maps one data file format to another. The correlation feature needs to convert one or more input file formats to the user-defined correlation file format, requiring some of the functionality of the format conversion feature, so this functionality is embedded in the correlation feature

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Overview

209

Figure 48 The Correlation Provisioning Process

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

210

7 - About the Correlation Applications

Accessing the Correlation Conversion Pages

After you open the Mediation Features Page, a short menu of links appears at the top of the page with several mediation feature applications, including the Correlation Applications.
Figure 49 Correlation Applications Link

When you click the Correlation Applications link, the Correlation Applications Page opens, which lists the links to the three correlation applications.
Figure 50 The Correlation Applications Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Accessing the Correlation Conversion Pages

211

When you click one of these links, the corresponding application container page opens.
Table 4 Correlation Applications Icons and the Corresponding Pages

Click this link

To Go to the Correlation Store Conversions Page

Go to the Correlation File Conversions Page

Go to the Correlation IDs Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

212

7 - About the Correlation Applications

Working with Correlation Store Conversions

Using correlation store conversion, you can define rules to correlate related records stored in the correlation store. A correlation store conversion defines mappings from a set of selected source records in the correlation store to a set of selected target records in the correlation store. If no target records are identified, rules defined as a new record mapping can generate a new target record. The store conversion rules are identified by a user-specified correlation store conversion ID and are executed as part of a correlation file conversion mapping. When the correlation store conversion is executed, the system searches the correlation store for correlation records with the source record type and correlation key and target record type and correlation key. The system also applies user-defined correlation mapping rules to combine the identified related records, which were selected from the correlation store, and to update the resulting correlation records. Figure 51, "The Correlation Store Conversion Provisioning Process" (7-212) shows the overall correlation store conversion provisioning process.
Figure 51 The Correlation Store Conversion Provisioning Process

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with Correlation File Conversions

213

Working with Correlation File Conversions

The correlation file conversion function lets you define rules and parameters to convert event records from any GRID-defined input file format to a GRID-defined correlation file format. The system then executes the user-defined mapping rules to create a new correlation record, associates the incoming record with other related records in the correlation store, or does both processes. The correlation conversion rules are identified by a correlation file conversion ID. Figure 52, "Correlation File Conversion Provisioning Process" (7-214) shows the overall correlation file conversion provisioning process.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

214

7 - About the Correlation Applications

Figure 52 Correlation File Conversion Provisioning Process

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with Correlation IDs

215

Working with Correlation IDs

When defining a correlation ID, you set up a grouping that includes the correlation store, the set of correlation file conversions and sources that map to the correlation store, and all rules, actions, and parameters associated with a specific correlation process.
Figure 53 Defining a Correlation ID

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

216

7 - About the Correlation Applications

Defining Correlation Rules

To define correlation rules, follow these procedures in order: 1. 2. 3. Identify event records that require correlation Store event records until all related records are received Combine the related event records into a complete record (or records) for the event Harvest the completed records into a file

4.

Identifying Event Records that Require Correlation

The first step in defining a set of correlation rules is to identify which records in the data stream require correlation. Some records in the data stream are complete, meaning they already contain all the information required to bill the billable event. Other records are incomplete, meaning they contain information regarding a portion of a billable event. Usually a stream of records received from a source Network Element contains a mixture of records that are complete and ready to be billed, and records that are incomplete and require correlation. Using the user interface, the administrator defines a set of rules based on a correlation key: Records that require correlation are identified by their correlation key and are mapped to a record in the correlation store Records that do not require correlation remain as complete records in the Event Data File Store For more complex cases where a single key cannot identify all records, the application uses secondary keys, which are developed using the expression builder: If the logic evaluates to true, the record is considered incomplete and is mapped to a record in the correlation store If the logic evaluates to false, the record is viewed as complete and is not mapped to the correlation store

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Defining Correlation Rules

217

Storing Event Records Until All Related Records Are Received

Records identified as requiring correlation must be held in the correlation store until all events records associated with a particular billing event are collected. The correlation store is a very fast in-core database where incomplete event records are saved while additional event records are still arriving from the sources. As additional event records arrive, their data is added to associated event records. This completed record (or records) is then ready to be harvested and stored in the standard event data file store for further processing and distribution to the destination applications. Because these event records can be in many different formats, can be from various sources, and arrive at various times, the administrator creates the correlation file format to store all related event information. The correlation file format is very flexible and can consist of various: normalized formats record structures modules record key fields

The administrator defines the correlation file format and then defines the rules for mapping each of the identified input records to the correlation file format. In addition to using the correlation application to account for the difference between source time stamps and synchronize the records, the administrator can configure: Field default values If the administrator does not assign any mapping rules to a particular field, it is automatically assigned a default value Value lists and table lookup value lists Lists of values or sequences of name/value pairs (tables) can be defined and so that they can be included as part of the conversion logic Field-level mappings These mappings can be used if a correlation store record field is always mapped with the same rules, regardless of the input record type Record-level mappings These mappings can be used to define sets of rules that are specific to a particular input record type Secondary keys mappings this option is available when record mapping is required, but the mapping rules depend on the value of some field or set of fields within the input record. Secondary key mapping supports record to record-level mappings, record-to-module mappings, and module-to-module mappings External tables The correlation module can retrieve list and table information from external data sources, possibly located on a remote system. The data can be located in an external relational database or in a flat file

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

218

7 - About the Correlation Applications

Arithmetic and logical operators ifthenelse type statements can be developed using or logic in parenthetical expressions and combined with relational and arithmetic operators Predefined functions, including date and time functions These predefined functions let an administrator easily deal with operations such as calculating the difference between two date/time stamps, converting from one date/time format to another, shifting characters, padding fields, and so on Administrator-defined environment variables that are accessed at runtime Support for sequence numbers sequence numbers, which can be incremented and used within a correlation definition, can be defined. There are also strings that can be used as variables to store information from one record that is needed in processing subsequent records.

Combining the Related Event Records into a Complete Record

As part of the correlation definition, the administrator defines the rules for determining when a record is complete. The end of a record can be determined by: one record that signals that it is the final record in an event sequence. When that final record is received the corresponding record in the Correlation Store can be updated and marked complete a known quantity of records that make up the total event aggregating information from associated records in the correlation store to create a single usage record for output. In more complex cases multiple records are received and the information needed to tie these records together is not obvious. After the information is identified, the associated records must be retrieved from the correlation store. This information then is aggregated from all the input records into a single usage record for output. Correlation store conversions enable the administrator to define mechanisms for matching usage records when not all the records use the same identification fields or values. A correlation store conversion takes multiple incomplete records with different correlation keys out of the correlation store, applies administrator-defined processing rules to correlate the different records, and then places the resulting records back into the correlation store. Data Mediation cannot rely on the records arriving in a particular time sequence and must store incomplete records for access when the most complete information becomes available.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Defining Correlation Rules

219

Correlation Rules
The administrator defines the rules for converting an input record to a record in the correlation store. Along with the standard functions available in the format module, the correlation applications have many functions and mapping rules that are just for correlation, including mapping rules for: uniquely identifying an event creating the first record of an event adding information from a subsequent event record to an existing correlation store record timing out records that have not received all their expected information In addition to the record fields within the correlation store record itself, each record also has a set of control data fields and control action fields associated with it. The control data fields include when the record was originally inserted into the correlation store, when the correlation store record was last updated, the correlation key for the record, and several others. The administrator has the option of defining rules to populate these control data fields. For example, the time the record was last updated defaults to Data Mediation's system time when the record was last changed; however, there can be situations where the timestamp within the input record is used instead. The control action fields let the administrator define the action to be taken when certain conditions occur. For example, if this is the first record in the correlation, there can be certain mapping rules the administrator wants to apply. Similarly, if this is the last record in the correlation, there can be another set of rules to be applied. There also can be certain conditions where the administrator wants to mark the event as complete.

Harvesting Completed Records

The administrator sets up the harvesting process for the correlation store. During the harvesting process, the correlation store is periodically scanned to find records that are marked complete. These completed records are removed from the store and placed them into data files. In the data files, files can be browsed, searched, and distributed using the same procedures as data for sources. Also during harvesting, the correlation store is scanned for records that have exceeded the incomplete record timeout, which is a time limit set by the administrator in the expression builder. It defines how long a record can stay in the correlation store without receiving additional records. This time limit is for cases where there is not a clear final record for an event. If that time limit is exceeded, the administrator can define the action to be taken for the record. This incomplete record action is automatically applied. The incomplete record timeout and incomplete record action ensure that records don't get lost in the correlation store.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

220

7 - About the Correlation Applications

Installing a Correlation Definition

A correlation definition comprises of a set of correlation conversions. All correlation conversions that make up a particular definition are grouped and identified using a correlation ID. Several different input data formats can be involved in a correlation and each input data format can have its own correlation conversion rules. After a correlation ID has been defined, the sources that have data to be correlated are assigned to the correlation ID and the completed (correlated) records are assigned to downstream destinations After the sources are assigned to the correlation ID, the data from those sources is processed using the administrator correlation rules. After the records are processed, they are stored in a special correlation source. The completed records in the correlation source can then be distributed to any destination. The completed records can also have additional mediation processing applied using application manager. Each source contains all of the data initially received, including incomplete as well as complete records so all of the original records can be sent to destinations with no correlation processing applied. These destinations can be set up to receive the original Source data. Sometimes a destination receiving the completed records from the correlation source only want the complete records from the original source. Consequently, the administrator can use a special filter called CORFILTER to filter out incomplete records to avoid duplicate usage records. When an administrator defines a correlation ID that selects incomplete records for a correlation, the correlation module automatically defines a corresponding CORFILTER that filters out incomplete records. For any destination that is receiving completed records from the correlation source, the administrator can choose to add the corresponding CORFILTER to the application-processing stream. The CORFILTER filters the incomplete records out of the stream so that the destination only receives the completed records from the original source and the completed records from the correlation source. In the user interface, CORFILTER appears as another mediation type on the Application Manager page. To use the filter, an administrator must add it to the application-processing stream for the destination in addition to the filter, validation and format applications.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with Correlation Mapping

221

Working with Correlation Mapping

Correlation mapping lets you establish rules to identify, convert, manage, and aggregate data records. You can define: Correlation IDs Correlation File Conversion IDs Correlation Store Conversion IDs Control fields let you define the rules and actions to identify and manage correlation records. Each correlation record in the correlation store has a set of control fields that are not part of the data record but can serve as targets for conversion mapping. There are two types of control fields used to perform correlation mappings: Control Data Fields Control Action Fields When mapping control fields: You can define control fields at the field level on the Field Mapping page or at the record level on one of the Record or Module Mapping pages You do not have to map all control fields. You do not need to map that field on the Field, Record, or Module Mapping pages when the system automatically control fields to default values You need to know that mappings on Record or Module Mapping pages take precedence over mappings on the Field Mapping page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

222

7 - About the Correlation Applications

Working with Control Data Fields and Control Action Fields

Control data fields contain information about the correlation record. There are two types of control data fields: System Control Data Fields These fields are required by the system to define and manage records in the correlation store. Some of these fields require you to provision them while others have a system-supplied default that the you can override User Control Data Fields These fields are reserved for user control data and are not required by the system. You can reference these fields in mapping expressions Control action fields contain record management rules or state information for the correlation records. This lets you define the action to take when certain conditions occur. For example, mapping rules can define the action to execute for these conditions: Which records are selected for correlation The record received is the first record in the correlation The record received is the last record in the correlation You want to mark a correlation record as complete, incomplete, or excepted

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with Output File Management

223

Working with Output File Management

Correlation records stored in the correlation store are managed by defining file parameter and optional default record management mappings on the Output File Management Page. The Output File Management Page lets you specify the: Parameters used to control the harvest process Default record management mapping set of parameters and actions that apply to records in the correlation store such as: Generate Output file Interval Maximum Record Count Per File Incomplete Record Timeout Interval Measure Incomplete Timeout Record From Incomplete Record Action Delete ID Action Default Incomplete Record Action and Delete ID Action mappings that apply to records in the correlation store that do not have these recordspecific mappings defined If the following default record management mappings are not defined on the Output File Management Page, they must be defined on the Output Record Management Page. These are: Incomplete Record Timeout Interval Measure Incomplete Timeout Record From Incomplete Record Action Delete ID Action

Default Record Management mappings defined on this page can be overridden on an individual record type basis by using the Output Record Management Page. Use this page to determine: How often records are harvested from the correlation store The maximum number of correlation records allowed in an output file generated by the harvest process How long an incomplete record can stay in the correlation store The point that the incomplete record timeout period is measured The action to execute if a record is identified as incomplete and the timeout period has expired The action to execute if a correlation ID is deleted or the correlation store must be rebuilt

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

224

7 - About the Correlation Applications

Harvest Process
The harvest process is initiated by the Generate Output File Interval field. At the occurrence of each time interval specified in the Generate Output File Interval field, the harvest process performs one or more of these actions: Selects all records from the correlation store that have correlation record State set to User Set Complete Record. The selected records are written to a file in the primary or tertiary directory of the associated correlation source. The selected records are deleted from the correlation store Selects all records from the correlation store that have correlation record State set to Exception Record. The selected records are written to a file in the exception directory of the associated correlation source. The selected records are deleted from the correlation store Selects all records from the correlation store that are incomplete and whose Incomplete Record Timeout Interval has expired. The associated Incomplete Record Action rules are executed for each selected record

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with Output Record Management

225

Working with Output Record Management

The Output Record Management Page lets you define record management mapping parameters and action field mappings on a record specific basis. Using the Output Record Management Page, you can: Specify record management mappings not defined on the Output File Management Page Override default record management mapping defined on the Output File Management Page Define the timeout interval for incomplete records in the correlation store Define how the incomplete record timeout is measured Identify the action to execute if a record is incomplete and the timeout period has expired Record-specific mappings override default mappings defined on the "Output File Management Page" (9273). Identify the action to execute if: The correlation ID is deleted The correlation store must be rebuilt

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

226

7 - About the Correlation Applications

Working with CORFILTER

The correlation mediation feature produces a special correlation filter called a CORFILTER, which is automatically created when you audit a correlation file conversion ID. The CORFILTER is given the same name as the correlation file conversion ID and is installed using the Correlation Conversion Application Manager Page. An original usage data file received from a source can contain complete records and records requiring correlation. Destinations may want all the records in the original file or the complete records and the correlated records from the original file. Use CORFILTER to filter out the records that require correlation from the original usage data file so that you do not send duplicate records.

References

For more information on installing a CORFILTER, see the "Source Application Associations Page" (2127) in the Sources User Guide

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Correlation Mediation Features Application Pages

This section describes the correlation mediation features, including information on: Opening the Correlation Applications page Mapping objects such as fields, records, and modules Using the correlation feature

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Correlation Applications Page

229

Correlation Applications Page

Using the Correlation Applications page you can go to these three correlation pages: The Correlation IDs page to define the correlation ID The Correlation File Conversions page to define the Correlation File Conversion ID The Correlation Store Conversions page to define the Correlation Store ID
Figure 54 Correlation Applications Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

230

8 Correlation Application Pages

Open the Correlation Applications Page

To open the Correlation Applications page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to the Correlation Store Conversions Page

231

Go to the Correlation Store Conversions Page

To open the Correlation Store Conversions page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Correlation Applications Page" (8 230). Click Correlation Store Conversions. The Correlation Store Conversions page opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

232

8 Correlation Application Pages

Go to the Correlation File Conversions Page

To open the Correlation File Conversions page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Correlation Applications Page" (8 230). Click Correlation File Conversions. The Correlation File Conversions page opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to the Correlation IDs Page

233

Go to the Correlation IDs Page

To open the Correlation IDs page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Correlation Applications Page" (8 230). Click Correlation IDs. The Correlation IDs page opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Correlation ID Application Pages

This section describes the Correlation ID pages, including information on: Creating a Correlation ID Updating a Correlation ID Opening the Correlation ID pages

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Correlation IDs Page

237

Correlation IDs Page

After you "Open the Correlation IDs Page" (9238), you can: "Go to a New Correlation ID Page" (9239) "Go to an Existing Correlation ID Page" (9240)
Figure 55 Correlation IDs Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Name Correlation File Format Description

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

238

9 Correlation ID Conversions Application Pages

Open the Correlation IDs Page

To open the Correlation IDs page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation IDs. The Correlation IDs page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to a New Correlation ID Page

239

Go to a New Correlation ID Page

To go to a new Correlation ID page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Correlation IDs Page" (9238). Click the New icon.

A new Correlation ID page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

240

9 Correlation ID Conversions Application Pages

Go to an Existing Correlation ID Page

To go to an existing Correlation ID page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Correlation IDs Page" (9238). Click the Name of the Correlation ID in the table. The Correlation ID page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Correlation ID Page

241

Correlation ID Page
After you "Open a New Correlation ID Page" (9242), you can "Create a Correlation ID" (9244). After you "Open an Existing Correlation ID Page" (9243), you can "Update a Correlation ID" (9245).
Figure 56 Correlation ID Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Audit Button Audited? Audit Results Correlation File Format Description Key Padding Character Last Audited Maximum Number of Modules Module Key Length Name Rebuild Correlation Store Structure Key Length

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

242

9 Correlation ID Conversions Application Pages

Open a New Correlation ID Page

To open a new Correlation ID page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation IDs. The Correlation IDs page opens.

4.

Click the New icon.

A new Correlation ID page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open an Existing Correlation ID Page

243

Open an Existing Correlation ID Page

To open an existing Correlation ID page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation IDs. The Correlation IDs page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the Correlation ID in the table. The Correlation ID page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

244

9 Correlation ID Conversions Application Pages

Create a Correlation ID
To create a correlation ID: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Correlation ID Page" (9242). Fill out these form fields at the top of the page: Name Correlation File Format Description 3. Set these key values: Structure Key Length Key Padding Character Module Key Length Maximum Number of Modules 4. Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Update a Correlation ID

245

Update a Correlation ID
To update a correlation ID: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Correlation ID Page" (9243). Fill out these form fields at the top of the page: Correlation File Format Description 3. Set these key values: Structure Key Length Key Padding Character Module Key Length Maximum Number of Modules 4. 5. Click Submit. Update your global settings by clicking these links on the screen: Value Lists Table Lookup Value Lists 6. Update these management settings by clicking these links on the screen: Output File Management Output Record Management Correlation Conversion Assignments Correlation Conversion Application Manager Source Assignments 7. To audit the correlation ID, click Audit. The audit results appear in the Audit Results text box.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Value Lists Page (Correlation ID Conversion)

247

Value Lists Page (Correlation ID Conversion)

After you "Open the Value Lists Page" (9248), you can: "Go to a New Value List Page" (9249) "Go to an Existing Value List Page" (9250) "Go to Another Page within the Correlation ID Conversion" (9251)
Figure 57 Correlation Value Lists Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: List Name Correlation ID Description

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

248

9 Correlation ID Conversions Application Pages

Open the Value Lists Page

To open the Value Lists page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation IDs. The Correlation IDs page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the Correlation ID in the table. The Correlation ID page opens. Click Value Lists in the Global column. The Value Lists page opens.

5.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to a New Value List Page

249

Go to a New Value List Page

To go to a new Value List page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Value Lists Page" (9248). Click the New icon.

A new Value List page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

250

9 Correlation ID Conversions Application Pages

Go to an Existing Value List Page

To go to an existing Value List page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Value Lists Page" (9248). Click the List Name for the value list in the table. The Value List page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to Another Page within the Correlation ID Conversion

251

Go to Another Page within the Correlation ID Conversion

To go to another page in the Correlation ID Conversion: 1. 2. Open one of the Correlation ID pages. Select one of these pages from the Go menu. Correlation ID Value Lists Table Lookup Value Lists Output File Management Output Record Management Correlation Conversion Assignments Source Assignments Audit The page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Value List Page (Correlation ID Conversion)

253

Value List Page (Correlation ID Conversion)

After you "Open a New Value List Page" (9254), you can: "Create a Value List" (9256) "Go to Another Page within the Correlation ID Conversion" (9251) After you "Open an Existing Value List Page" (9255), you can: "Update a Value List" (9257) "Go to Another Page within the Correlation ID Conversion" (9251) After you set up the value list with list values, then you can specify the value list name as an operator such as an inList or a notInList comparison operator in an expression.
Figure 58 Correlation ID Value List Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description List Name List Value

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

254

9 Correlation ID Conversions Application Pages

Open a New Value List Page

To open a new Value List page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation IDs. The Correlation IDs page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the Correlation ID in the table. The Correlation ID page opens. Click Value Lists in the Global column. The Value Lists page opens. Click the New icon.

5. 6.

A new Value List page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open an Existing Value List Page

255

Open an Existing Value List Page

To open an existing Value List page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation IDs. The Correlation IDs page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the Correlation ID in the table. The Correlation ID page opens. Click Value Lists in the Global column. The Value Lists page opens. Click the List Name for the value list in the table. The Value List page opens.

5. 6.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

256

9 Correlation ID Conversions Application Pages

Create a Value List

To create a value list: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Value List Page" (9254). Fill out these form fields at the top of the page: List Name Description 3. 4. To create a list value, follow the instructions to "Add a List Value" (9258). Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Update a Value List

257

Update a Value List

To update a value list: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Value List Page" (9255). Update the this form field at the top of the page: Description 3. 4. To create a list value, follow the instructions to "Add a List Value" (9258). To update a list value, follow the instructions to "Update a List Value" (9 259). Click Submit.

5.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

258

9 Correlation ID Conversions Application Pages

Add a List Value

To add a list value: 1. 2. Click the New icon. The new List Value form appears. Fill out this form field: List Value 3. Click Update.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Update a List Value

259

Update a List Value

To update a list value: 1. Click the icon beside the List Value in the table. The List Value form appears. Update this form field: List Value 3. Click Update.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Table Lookup Value Lists Page (Correlation ID Conversion)

261

Table Lookup Value Lists Page (Correlation ID Conversion)

After you "Open the Table Lookup Value Lists Page" (9262), you can: "Go to a New Table Lookup Value List Page" (9263) "Go to an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page" (9264) "Go to Another Page within the Correlation ID Conversion" (9251)
Figure 59 Correlation ID Table Lookup Value Lists Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Correlation ID Description List Name

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

262

9 Correlation ID Conversions Application Pages

Open the Table Lookup Value Lists Page

To open the Table Lookup Value Lists page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation IDs. The Correlation IDs page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the Correlation ID in the table. The Correlation ID page opens. Click Table Lookup Value Lists in the Global column. The Table Lookup Value Lists page opens.

5.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to a New Table Lookup Value List Page

263

Go to a New Table Lookup Value List Page

To go to a new Table Lookup Value List page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Table Lookup Value Lists Page" (9 262). Click the New icon.

2.

A new Table Lookup Value List page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

264

9 Correlation ID Conversions Application Pages

Go to an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page

To go to an existing Table Lookup Value List page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Table Lookup Value Lists Page" (9 262). Click the List Name for the table lookup value list in the table. The Table Lookup Value List page opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Table Lookup Value List Page (Correlation ID Conversion)

265

Table Lookup Value List Page (Correlation ID Conversion)

After you "Open a New Table Lookup Value List Page" (9267), you can: "Create a Table Lookup Value List" (9269) "Go to Another Page within the Correlation ID Conversion" (9251) After you "Open an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page" (9268), you can: "Update a Table Lookup Value List" (9270) "Go to Another Page within the Correlation ID Conversion" (9251) After you set up a table lookup value list with sets of key value and table value pairs, the sets can be used by operators such as the table or dateTable mapping operators in expressions.
Figure 60 Correlation ID Table Lookup Value List Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

266

9 Correlation ID Conversions Application Pages

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description Key List Name Value

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open a New Table Lookup Value List Page

267

Open a New Table Lookup Value List Page

To open a new Table Lookup Value List page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation IDs. The Correlation IDs page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the Correlation ID in the table. The Correlation ID page opens. Click Table Lookup Value Lists in the Global column. The Table Lookup Value Lists page opens. Click the New icon.

5.

6.

A new Table Lookup Value List page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

268

9 Correlation ID Conversions Application Pages

Open an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page

To open an existing Table Lookup Value List page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation IDs. The Correlation IDs page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the Correlation ID in the table. The Correlation ID page opens. Click Table Lookup Value Lists in the Global column. The Table Lookup Value Lists page opens. Click the List Name for the table lookup value list in the table. The Table Lookup Value List page opens.

5.

6.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a Table Lookup Value List

269

Create a Table Lookup Value List

To create a table lookup value list: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Table Lookup Value List Page" (9 267). Fill out these form fields at the top of the page: List Name Description 3. To add a table lookup value, follow the instructions to "Add a Table Lookup Value" (9271). Click Submit.

2.

4.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

270

9 Correlation ID Conversions Application Pages

Update a Table Lookup Value List

To update a table lookup value list: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page" (9268). Update this form field at the top of the page: Description 3. To add a table lookup value, follow the instructions to "Add a Table Lookup Value" (9271). To update a table lookup value, follow the instructions to "Update a Table Lookup Value" (9272). Click Submit.

2.

4.

5.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Add a Table Lookup Value

271

Add a Table Lookup Value

To add a table lookup value: 1. Click the New icon.

The new table lookup value form opens. 2. Fill out these form fields: Key Value 3. Click Update.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

272

9 Correlation ID Conversions Application Pages

Update a Table Lookup Value

To update a table lookup value: 1. Click the icon beside the table lookup value in the table. The new table lookup value form opens. Update these form fields: Key Value 3. Click Update.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Output File Management Page

273

Output File Management Page

After you "Open the Output File Management Page" (9274), you can: "Update the Output File Management Settings" (9275) "Go to Another Page within the Correlation ID Conversion" (9251)
Figure 61 Output File Management Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Delete ID Action Mapping ID Expression Button Generate Output File Interval Incomplete Record Action Mapping ID Incomplete Record Timeout Interval Maximum Record Count Per File Measure Incomplete Timeout Record From

References

For a detailed description and usage information for mapping the Incomplete Record Action control field, see "Correlation ID Definition and Control Fields" (17483) in the GML Developer Reference Guide

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

274

9 Correlation ID Conversions Application Pages

Open the Output File Management Page

To open the Output File Management page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation IDs. The Correlation IDs page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation ID in the table. The Correlation ID page opens. Click Output File Management in the Management column. The Output File Management page opens.

5.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Update the Output File Management Settings

275

Update the Output File Management Settings

To update the output file management settings: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Output File Management Page" (9 274). Update these form fields at the top of the page: Generate Output File Interval Maximum Record Count Per File 3. Update these default record mappings: Incomplete Record Timeout Interval Measure Incomplete Timeout Record From 4. To update either the Incomplete Record Action Mapping ID or Delete ID Action Mapping ID, click Expression. The information on the Output File Management page is saved and the Output File Expression page opens. To enter either an new Incomplete Record Action Mapping ID or Delete ID Action Mapping ID, enter a name, then click Expression. The information on the Output File Management page is saved and the Output File Expression page opens. Click Submit.

2.

5.

6.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Output Record Management Page

277

Output Record Management Page

After you "Open the Output Record Management Page" (9278), you can: "Update the Output Record Management Settings" (9279) "Go to Another Page within the Correlation ID Conversion" (9251)
Figure 62 Output Record Management Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Correlation File Format Correlation ID Delete ID Action Mapping ID Delete ID Mapping Incomplete Record Action Mapping ID Incomplete Record Mapping Incomplete Record Timeout Interval Measure Incomplete Timeout Record From Record Name

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

278

9 Correlation ID Conversions Application Pages

Open the Output Record Management Page

To open the Output Record Management page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation IDs. The Correlation IDs page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation ID in the table. The Correlation ID page opens. Click Output Record Management in the Management column. The Output Record Management page opens.

5.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Update the Output Record Management Settings

279

Update the Output Record Management Settings

To update the Output Record Management Settings: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Output Record Management Page" (9278). Click the icon beside the record in the table. Update these form fields Incomplete Record Timeout Interval Measure Incomplete Timeout Record From 4. To update either the Incomplete Record Action Mapping ID or Delete ID Action Mapping ID, click Expression. The information on the Output Record Management page is saved and the Output Record Expression page opens.
Note You can only enter one mapping ID.

2. 3.

5.

To enter either an new Incomplete Record Action Mapping ID or Delete ID Action Mapping ID, enter a name, then click Expression. The information on the Output Record Management page is saved and the Output Record Expression page opens. Click Submit.

6.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Correlation Conversion Assignments Page

281

Correlation Conversion Assignments Page

After you "Open the Correlations Conversion Assignments Page" (9282), you can: "Assign Conversions" (9283) "Unassign Conversions" (9284) "Go to Another Page within the Correlation ID Conversion" (9251)
Figure 63 Correlation Conversion Assignments Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Correlation File Format Input File Format (for Mediation Features) Name

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

282

9 Correlation ID Conversions Application Pages

Open the Correlations Conversion Assignments Page

To open the Correlations Conversion Assignments page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation IDs. The Correlation IDs page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation ID in the table. The Correlation ID page opens. Click Correlation Conversion Assignments in the Management column. The Correlation Conversion Assignments page opens.

5.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Assign Conversions

283

Assign Conversions
To assign conversions: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Correlations Conversion Assignments Page" (9282). Click the icon beside the conversion in the Unassigned Conversion table. The conversion is moved to the Assigned Conversions table. Click Submit.

2.

3.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

284

9 Correlation ID Conversions Application Pages

Unassign Conversions
To unassign conversions: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Correlations Conversion Assignments Page" (9282). Click the icon beside the conversion in the Assigned Conversion table. The conversion is moved to the Unassigned Conversions table. Click Submit.

2.

3.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Correlation Conversion Application Manager Page

285

Correlation Conversion Application Manager Page

Using this page, you can select the applications associated with an entity and file format combination. Not only can you select the File Format Conversion IDs and the Production Filter IDs that you want to use, but you can also determine the order in which they are used. The Correlation Conversion Application Manager page lets you install one or more application IDs into the correlation stream. The conversion ID is executed last in the correlation stream. You must stop and then restart transmission for the specified correlation ID in order to apply any changes made on the Correlation Conversion Application Manager page. After you "Open the Correlation Conversion Application Manager Page" (9 287), you can: "Update Assigned Conversions" (9288) "Go to Another Page within the Correlation ID Conversion" (9251)
Figure 64 Correlation Conversion Application Manager Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

286

9 Correlation ID Conversions Application Pages

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Application Name Correlation ID Input File Format (for Mediation Features) Name Order Type (for Correlation Conversion Application Manager)

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open the Correlation Conversion Application Manager Page

287

Open the Correlation Conversion Application Manager Page

To open the Correlation Conversion Application Manager page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation IDs. The Correlation IDs page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation ID in the table. The Correlation ID page opens. Click Correlation Conversion Application Manager in the Management column. The Correlation Conversion Application Manager page opens.

5.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

288

9 Correlation ID Conversions Application Pages

Update Assigned Conversions

To update assigned conversions: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Correlation Conversion Application Manager Page" (9287). Click the icon beside the assigned conversion in the Assigned Conversions table. The Applications table opens. To update an application, click the icon beside the application. Update these form fields: Order Type Application Name 5. 6. Click Update. Click Submit.

2.

3. 4.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Source Assignments Page

289

Source Assignments Page

After you "Open the Source Assignments Page" (9290), you can: "Assign Sources" (9291) "Unassign Sources" (9292) "Go to Another Page within the Correlation ID Conversion" (9251)
Figure 65 Source Assignments Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Correlation File Format Name Status

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

290

9 Correlation ID Conversions Application Pages

Open the Source Assignments Page

To open the Source Assignments page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation IDs. The Correlation IDs page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation ID in the table. The Correlation ID page opens. Click Source Assignments in the Management column. The Source Assignments page opens.

5.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Assign Sources

291

Assign Sources
To assign sources: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Source Assignments Page" (9290). Click the icon beside the source name in the Unassigned Sources table. The source is moved to the Assigned Sources table. Click Submit.

3.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

292

9 Correlation ID Conversions Application Pages

Unassign Sources
To unassign sources: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Source Assignments Page" (9290). Click the icon beside the source name in the Assigned Sources table. The source is moved to the Unassigned Sources table. Click Submit.

3.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Output File and Record Management Expression Pages

293

Output File and Record Management Expression Pages

After you "Open the Output File Management Expression Page" (9295) or "Open the Output File Management Expression Page" (9295), you can "Create an Expression" (9299).
Figure 66 Output File Management Expression Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Correlation ID Expression (for Output File and Output Record Management) Field Name (Expression Page) Justification Mapping ID Name Padding

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

294

9 Correlation ID Conversions Application Pages

Figure 67 Output Record Management Expression Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Correlation ID Expression (for Secondary Key Mappings) Field Name (Expression Page) Justification Mapping ID Name Padding Record

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open the Output File Management Expression Page

295

Open the Output File Management Expression Page

To open the Output File Management Expression page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation IDs. The Correlation IDs page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation ID in the table. The Correlation ID page opens. Click Output File Management. The Output File Management page opens. To update the Incomplete Record Action Mapping ID or Delete ID Action Mapping ID, click Expression. The information on the Output File Management page is saved and the Output File Expression page opens.

5.

6.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

296

9 Correlation ID Conversions Application Pages

7.

To enter an new Incomplete Record Action Mapping ID or Delete ID Action Mapping ID, enter a name, then click Expression. The information on the Output File Management page is saved and the Output File Expression page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open the Output Record Management Expression Page

297

Open the Output Record Management Expression Page

To open the Output Record Management Expression page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation IDs. The Correlation IDs page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation ID in the table. The Correlation ID page opens. Click Output Record Management. The Output Record Management page opens. To update the Incomplete Record Action Mapping ID or Delete ID Action Mapping ID, click Expression. The information on the Output Record Management page is saved and the Output Record Expression page opens.

5.

6.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

298

9 Correlation ID Conversions Application Pages

7.

To enter an new Incomplete Record Action Mapping ID or Delete ID Action Mapping ID, enter a name, then click Expression. The information on the Output Record Management page is saved and the Output Record Expression page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create an Expression

299

Create an Expression
To create an expression: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Output File Management Expression Page" (9295) or "Open the Output Record Management Expression Page" (9297). Fill out these form fields: Justification Padding 3. 4. 5. Build expressions using the items in the drop-down menus: Click Submit. Click Close.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

300

9 Correlation ID Conversions Application Pages

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

10 Correlation File Conversion Application Pages

This section describes how to use the correlation file conversion pages, including information on: Creating a correlation file conversion Updating the correlation file conversion pages Opening the correlation file conversion pages

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Correlation File Conversions Page

303

Correlation File Conversions Page

After you "Open the Correlation File Conversions Page" (10304), you can: "Go to a New Correlation File Conversion Page" (10305) "Go to an Existing Correlation File Conversion Page" (10306)
Figure 68 The Correlation File Conversions Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Correlation File Format Description Input File Format (for Mediation Features) Name

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

304

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Open the Correlation File Conversions Page

To open the Correlation File Conversions page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation File Conversions. The Correlation File Conversions Page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to a New Correlation File Conversion Page

305

Go to a New Correlation File Conversion Page

To go to a new Correlation File Conversions page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Correlation File Conversions Page" (10304). Click the New icon.

2.

A new Correlation File Conversion page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

306

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Go to an Existing Correlation File Conversion Page

To go to an existing Correlation File Conversions page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Correlation File Conversions Page" (10304). Click the Name of the correlation file conversion in the table. The Correlation File Conversion page opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Correlation File Conversion Page

307

Correlation File Conversion Page

After you "Open a New Correlation File Conversion Page" (10309), you can "Create a New Correlation File Conversion" (10311). After you "Open an Existing Correlation File Conversion Page" (10310), you can "Update a Correlation File Conversion" (10312).
Figure 69 The Correlation File Conversion Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

308

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Audit Button Audited? Audit Results Correlation File Format Description Input File Format (for Mediation Features) Last Audited Name

References

"Value Lists Page (Correlation File Conversion)" (10313) in this user guide "Table Lookup Value Lists Page (Correlation File Conversion)" (10327) in this user guide "Field Mappings Page (Correlation File Conversion)" (10341) in this user guide "Secondary Key Mappings Page (Correlation File Conversion)" (10353) in this user guide "Record Mappings Page (Correlation File Conversion)" (10359) in this user guide "Module Mapping Page (Correlation File Conversion)" (10397) in this user guide

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open a New Correlation File Conversion Page

309

Open a New Correlation File Conversion Page

To open a new Correlation File Conversion page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation File Conversions. The Correlation File Conversions Page opens.

4.

Click the New icon.

The Correlation File Conversion page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

310

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Open an Existing Correlation File Conversion Page

To open an existing Correlation File Conversion page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation File Conversions. The Correlation File Conversions Page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation file conversion in the table. The Correlation File Conversion page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a New Correlation File Conversion

311

Create a New Correlation File Conversion

To create a new correlation file conversion: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Correlation File Conversion Page" (10309). Fill out these form fields at the top of the page: Name Input File Format (for Mediation Features) Correlation File Format Description 3. 4. Fill out the Default Values. Click Submit.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

312

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Update a Correlation File Conversion

To update a correlation file conversion: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Correlation File Conversion Page" (10310). Update these form fields at the top of the page: Input File Format (for Mediation Features) Correlation File Format Description 3. 4. 5. Update the Default Values. Click Submit. Update your globals by clicking these links on the screen: Value Lists Table Lookup Value Lists 6. Update your mappings by clicking these links on the screen: Field Mappings Secondary Key Mappings Record Mappings Module Mappings 7. Click Audit.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Value Lists Page (Correlation File Conversion)

313

Value Lists Page (Correlation File Conversion)

After you "Open the Value Lists Page" (10314), you can: "Go to a New Value List Page" (10315) "Go to an Existing Value List Page" (10316) "Go to Another Page in the Correlation File Conversion" (10317)
Figure 70 Value Lists Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: List Name Correlation File Conversion ID Description

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

314

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Open the Value Lists Page

To open the Value Lists page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation File Conversions. The Correlation File Conversions Page opens.

4.

Click the correlation conversion in the table. The Correlation File Conversion page opens. Click Value Lists. The Value Lists page opens.

5.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to a New Value List Page

315

Go to a New Value List Page

To go to a new Value List page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Value Lists Page" (10314). Click the New icon.

The new Value List page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

316

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Go to an Existing Value List Page

To go to an existing Value List page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Value Lists Page" (10314). Click the List Name for the value list in the table. The Value List page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to Another Page in the Correlation File Conversion

317

Go to Another Page in the Correlation File Conversion

To go to another page in the Correlation File Conversion: 1. Select one of these pages from the Go drop-down menu: Correlation File Conversion Value Lists Table Lookup Value Lists Field Mappings Secondary Key Mappings Record Mappings Module Mappings Audit 2. Click Go.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Value List Page (Correlation File Conversion)

319

Value List Page (Correlation File Conversion)

After you "Open a New Value List Page" (10321), you can "Create a New Value List" (10323). After you "Open an Existing Value List Page" (10322), you can "Update a Value List" (10324). When creating and updating value lists, you can: "Add a Value" (10325) "Update a Value" (10326) "Go to Another Page in the Correlation File Conversion" (10317) After you set up a value list, you can use the information in operators such as the inList or notInList mapping operators on the associated Secondary Key Mapping and Expression pages.
Figure 71 Value List Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

320

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Correlation File Conversion ID Correlation File Format Description Input File Format (for Mediation Features) List Name List Value

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open a New Value List Page

321

Open a New Value List Page

To open a new Value List page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation File Conversions. The Correlation File Conversions Page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation file conversion in the table. The Correlation File Conversion page opens. Click Value Lists. The Value Lists page opens. Click the New icon.

5. 6.

A new Value List page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

322

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Open an Existing Value List Page

To open an existing Value List page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation File Conversions. The Correlation File Conversions Page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation file conversion in the table. The Correlation File Conversion page opens. Click Value Lists. The Value Lists page opens. Click the List Name in the table. The Value List page opens.

5. 6.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a New Value List

323

Create a New Value List

To create a new value list: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Value List Page" (10321). Fill out these form fields at the top of the page: Correlation File Conversion ID List Name Description 3. 4. To add a value, follow the instructions to "Add a Value" (10325). Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

324

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Update a Value List

To update a value list: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Value List Page" (10322). Update this field at the top of the page: Description 3. 4. 5. 6. To add a value, follow the instructions to "Add a Value" (10325). To update a value, follow the instructions to "Update a Value" (10326). Click Update. Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Add a Value

325

Add a Value
To add a value: 1. Click the New icon.

The new value form appears. 2. Fill out this form field: List Value 3. Click Update.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

326

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Update a Value
To update a value: 1. 2. Click the icon beside the List Value in the table. The value form appears. Update this form field: List Value 3. Click Update.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Table Lookup Value Lists Page (Correlation File Conversion)

327

Table Lookup Value Lists Page (Correlation File Conversion)

After you "Open the Table Lookup Value Lists Page" (10328), you can: "Go to a New Table Lookup Value List Page" (10329) "Go to an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page" (10330) "Go to Another Page in the Correlation File Conversion" (10317) After you set up a table lookup value list, you can use the information in the table or dateTable mapping operators on the associated Secondary Key Mapping page.
Figure 72 Table Lookup Value Lists Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Correlation File Conversion ID Description List Name

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

328

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Open the Table Lookup Value Lists Page

To open the Table Lookup Value Lists page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation File Conversions. The Correlation File Conversions Page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation file conversion in the table. The Correlation File Conversion page opens. Click Table Lookup Value Lists. The Table Lookup Value Lists page opens.

5.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to a New Table Lookup Value List Page

329

Go to a New Table Lookup Value List Page

To go to a new Table Lookup Value List page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Table Lookup Value Lists Page" (10 328). Click the New icon.

2.

A new Table Lookup Value List page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

330

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Go to an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page

To go to an existing Table Lookup Value List page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Table Lookup Value Lists Page" (10 328). Click the List Name for the table lookup value list in the table. The Table Lookup Value List page opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Table Lookup Value List Page (Correlation File Conversion)

331

Table Lookup Value List Page (Correlation File Conversion)

After you "Open a New Table Lookup Value List Page" (10333), you can "Create a New Table Lookup Value List" (10336). After you "Open an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page" (10335), you can "Update a Table Lookup Value List" (10337). When creating and updating table lookup value lists, you can: "Add a Table Lookup Value" (10338) "Update a Table Lookup Value" (10339) "Go to Another Page in the Correlation File Conversion" (10317)
Figure 73 Table Lookup Value List Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

332

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Correlation File Conversion ID Correlation File Format Description Input File Format (for Mediation Features) Key List Name Value

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open a New Table Lookup Value List Page

333

Open a New Table Lookup Value List Page

To open a new Table Lookup Value List page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation File Conversions. The Correlation File Conversions Page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation file conversion in the table. The Correlation File Conversion page opens. Click Table Lookup Value Lists. The Table Lookup Value Lists page opens. Click the New icon.

5.

6.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

334

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

A new Table Lookup Value List page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page

335

Open an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page

To open an existing Table Lookup Value List page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation File Conversions. The Correlation File Conversions Page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation file conversion in the table. The Correlation File Conversion page opens. Click Table Lookup Value Lists. The Table Lookup Value Lists page opens. Click the List Name for the table lookup value list in the table. The Table Lookup Value List page opens.

5.

6.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

336

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Create a New Table Lookup Value List

To create a new table lookup value list: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Table Lookup Value List Page" (10333). Fill out these form fields at the top of the page: Correlation File Conversion ID List Name Description 3. To create a new table lookup value, follow the instructions to "Add a Table Lookup Value" (10338). Click Update. Click Submit.

2.

4. 5.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Update a Table Lookup Value List

337

Update a Table Lookup Value List

To update a table lookup value list: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page" (10335). Update this field at the top of the page: Description 3. To update a table lookup value, follow the instructions to "Update a Table Lookup Value" (10339). To create a new table lookup value, follow the instructions to "Add a Table Lookup Value" (10338). Click Update. Click Submit.

2.

4.

5. 6.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

338

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Add a Table Lookup Value

To add a table lookup value: 1. Click the New icon.

The new table lookup value form opens. 2. Fill out these form fields: Key Value 3. Click Update.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Update a Table Lookup Value

339

Update a Table Lookup Value

To update a table lookup value: 1. Click the icon beside the table lookup value. The new table lookup value form opens. Update these form fields: Key Value 3. Click Update.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

340

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Field Mappings Page (Correlation File Conversion)

341

Field Mappings Page (Correlation File Conversion)

After you "Open the Field Mappings Page" (10342), you can: "Go to the Data Field Mapping Page" (10343) "Go to the Expression Page to Update a Control Action Field" (10344) "Go to Another Page in the Correlation File Conversion" (10317)
Figure 74 Field Mappings Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Correlation File Format Field Mapping ID Format Input File Format (for Mediation Features) Length Mapped? Name Start (for Field Mappings) Total Length

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

342

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Open the Field Mappings Page

To open the Field Mappings page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation File Conversions. The Correlation File Conversions Page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation file conversion in the table. The Correlation File Conversion page opens. Click Field Mappings. The Field Mappings page opens.

5.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to the Data Field Mapping Page

343

Go to the Data Field Mapping Page

To go to the Data Field Mapping page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Field Mappings Page" (10342). Click the Name of the mapping in the in the Control Data Fields or Record Data Fields tables. The Data Field Mapping page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

344

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Go to the Expression Page to Update a Control Action Field

To go to the Expression page to update a control action field: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Field Mappings Page" (10342). Click the Name of the mapping in the in the Control Action Fields table. A new window opens with the Expression page.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Data Field Mapping Page (Correlation File Conversion)

345

Data Field Mapping Page (Correlation File Conversion)

After you "Open the Data Field Mapping Page" (10347), you can: "Update a Data Field Mapping" (10348) "Go to a Control Action Field Expression Page" (10349) "Create a Control Action Field Mapping" (10350) "Update a Mapping" (10351) "Go to Another Page in the Correlation File Conversion" (10317)
Figure 75 Data Field Mapping Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

346

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Correlation File Conversion ID Correlation File Format Description Field Format (for Correlation File Conversion) Field Length (for Correlation File Conversion) Field Name (for Correlation File Conversion) Input File Format (for Mediation Features) Length Mapping ID Start (for Field Mappings)

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open the Data Field Mapping Page

347

Open the Data Field Mapping Page

To open the Data Field Mapping page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation File Conversions. The Correlation File Conversions Page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation file conversion in the table. The Correlation File Conversion page opens. Click Field Mappings. The Field Mappings page opens. Click the Name of the data field in the Control Data Fields or Record Data Fields table. The Data Field Mapping page opens.

5. 6.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

348

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Update a Data Field Mapping

To update a data field mapping: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Data Field Mapping Page" (10347). To create a mapping, follow the instructions to "Create a Control Action Field Mapping" (10350). To update a mapping, follow the instructions to "Update a Mapping" (10 351).

3.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to a Control Action Field Expression Page

349

Go to a Control Action Field Expression Page

To go to a control action field expression page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Data Field Mapping Page" (10347). Click the Name in the Control Action Field table. A new window opens with the Expression page.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

350

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Create a Control Action Field Mapping

To create a mapping: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Data Field Mapping Page" (10347). Click the New icon.

The mapping form opens. 3. Fill out these form fields: Mapping ID Start (for Field Mappings) Length 4. 5. Click Expression. A new window opens with the Expression page. Fill out these form fields: Justification Padding Default Value 6. 7. 8. Build an expression using the expressions listed in the drop-down menu. Click Close. Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Update a Mapping

351

Update a Mapping
To update a mapping: 1. 2. 3. 4. Follow the instructions to "Open the Data Field Mapping Page" (10347). Click the icon beside the mapping ID. The mapping form opens. Click Expression. A new window opens with the Expression page. Update these form fields: Justification Padding Default Value 5. 6. 7. Build an expression using the expressions listed in the drop-down menu. Click Close. Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Secondary Key Mappings Page (Correlation File Conversion)

353

Secondary Key Mappings Page (Correlation File Conversion)

After you "Open the Secondary Key Mappings Page" (10355), you can: "Go to a New Secondary Key Mapping Page" (10356) "Go to an Existing Secondary Key Mapping Page" (10357) "Go to Another Page in the Correlation File Conversion" (10317)
Figure 76 Secondary Key Mappings Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Correlation File Format Expression (for Secondary Key Mappings) Input File Format (for Mediation Features) Key Type Secondary Key Source Record/Module

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

354

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

References

For more information on the Secondary Key Mapping page, see "Secondary Key Mapping Page (Correlation File Conversion and Correlation Store Conversion)" (245) in this user guide

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open the Secondary Key Mappings Page

355

Open the Secondary Key Mappings Page

To open the Secondary Key Mappings page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation File Conversions. The Correlation File Conversions Page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation file conversion in the table. The Correlation File Conversion page opens. Click Secondary Key Mappings. The Secondary Key Mappings page opens.

5.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

356

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Go to a New Secondary Key Mapping Page

To go to a new Secondary Key Mapping page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Secondary Key Mappings Page" (10 355). Click the New icon.

2.

A new Secondary Key Mapping page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to an Existing Secondary Key Mapping Page

357

Go to an Existing Secondary Key Mapping Page

To go to an existing Secondary Key Mapping page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Secondary Key Mappings Page" (10 355). Click the Secondary Key for the secondary key mapping in the table. The Secondary Key Mapping page opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Record Mappings Page (Correlation File Conversion)

359

Record Mappings Page (Correlation File Conversion)

After you "Open the Record Mappings Page" (10360), you can: "Go to a New Record Mapping Page" (10361) "Go to an Existing Record Mapping Page" (10362) "Go to Another Page in the Correlation File Conversion" (10317)
Figure 77 Record Mappings Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Correlation File Format Correlation Record Name Exclusive? Input File Format (for Mediation Features) Input Record Name Order Secondary Key

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

360

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Open the Record Mappings Page

To open the Record Mappings page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation File Conversions. The Correlation File Conversions Page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation file conversion in the table. The Correlation File Conversion page opens. Click Record Mappings. The Record Mappings page opens.

5.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to a New Record Mapping Page

361

Go to a New Record Mapping Page

To go to a new Record Mapping page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Record Mappings Page" (10360). Click the New icon.

A new Record Mapping page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

362

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Go to an Existing Record Mapping Page

To go to an existing Record Mapping page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Record Mappings Page" (10360). Click the ID for the record mapping in the table. The Record Mapping page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Record Mapping Page (Correlation File Conversion)

363

Record Mapping Page (Correlation File Conversion)

After you "Open a New Record Mapping Page" (10365), you can: "Create a New Record Mapping" (10367) "Go to Another Page in the Correlation File Conversion" (10317) After you "Open an Existing Record Mapping Page" (10366), you can: "Go to a Record Data Field Mapping Page" (10368) "Go to an Expression Page" (10369) "Open the Record-to-Module Mappings Table" (10370) "Go to a New Record to Module Mapping Page" (10371) "Go to an Existing Record to Module Mapping Page" (10372) "Go to Another Page in the Correlation File Conversion" (10317)
Figure 78 Record Mapping Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Correlation File Conversion ID Correlation File Format Correlation Module Name

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

364

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Correlation Record Name Exclusive? Input File Format (for Mediation Features) Input Record Name Mapped? Name Offset Order Secondary Key

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open a New Record Mapping Page

365

Open a New Record Mapping Page

To open a new Record Mapping page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation File Conversions. The Correlation File Conversions Page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation file conversion in the table. The Correlation File Conversion page opens. Click Record Mappings. The Record Mappings page opens. Click the New icon.

5. 6.

A New Record Mapping page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

366

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Open an Existing Record Mapping Page

To open an existing Record Mapping page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation File Conversions. The Correlation File Conversions Page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation file conversion in the table. The Correlation File Conversion page opens. Click Record Mappings. The Record Mappings page opens. Click the ID for the record mapping in the table. The Record Mapping page opens.

5. 6.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a New Record Mapping

367

Create a New Record Mapping

To create a new Record Mapping: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Record Mapping Page" (10365). Fill out these form fields: Input Record Name Correlation Record Name Secondary Key Order Exclusive? 3. Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

368

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Go to a Record Data Field Mapping Page

To go to a Record Data Field Mapping page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Record Mapping Page" (10 366). Click the Name of the data field in the Control Data Fields or Record Data Fields tables. The Data Field Mapping page opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to an Expression Page

369

Go to an Expression Page
To go to an Expression page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Record Mapping Page" (10 366). Click the Name of the data field in the Control Action Fields table. A new window opens with the Expression page.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

370

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Open the Record-to-Module Mappings Table

To open the Record-to-Module Mappings table: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Record Mapping Page" (10 366). Click the arrow beside Record-to-Module Mappings. The Record-toModule Mappings Table opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to a New Record to Module Mapping Page

371

Go to a New Record to Module Mapping Page

To go to a new Record to Module Mapping page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Record Mapping Page" (10 366). Click the New icon.

2.

A New Record to Module Mapping page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

372

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Go to an Existing Record to Module Mapping Page

To go to an existing Record to Module Mapping page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Record Mapping Page" (10 366). Click the ID of the mapping in the table. The Record to Module Mapping page opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Record Data Field Mapping Page (Correlation File Conversion)

373

Record Data Field Mapping Page (Correlation File Conversion)

After you "Open the Record Data Field Mapping Page" (10375), you can: "Create a Record Data Field Mapping" (10376) "Update a Data Field Mapping" (10377) "Go to Another Page in the Correlation File Conversion" (10317)
Figure 79 Record Data Field Mapping Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Field Format (for Correlation File Conversion) Field Length (for Correlation File Conversion) Field Name (for Correlation File Conversion) Correlation File Conversion ID Correlation File Format Correlation Record Name Description Input File Format (for Mediation Features) Input Record Name Length Mapping ID

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

374

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Order Secondary Key Start (for Field Mappings)

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open the Record Data Field Mapping Page

375

Open the Record Data Field Mapping Page

To open the Record Data Field Mapping page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation File Conversions. The Correlation File Conversions Page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation file conversion in the table. The Correlation File Conversion page opens. Click Record Mappings. The Record Mappings page opens. Click the ID beside the record mapping in the table. The Record Mapping page opens. Click the Name of a control data field in the Control Data Fields or Record Data Fields table. The Data Field Mapping page opens.

5. 6.

7.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

376

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Create a Record Data Field Mapping

To create a record data field mapping: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Record Data Field Mapping Page" (10375). Click the New icon.

2.

The mapping form opens. 3. Fill out these form fields: Mapping ID Start (for Field Mappings) Length 4. 5. Click Expression. A new window opens with the Expression page. Fill out these form fields: Justification Padding Default Value 6. 7. 8. Build an expression using the expressions listed in the drop-down menu. Click Close. Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Update a Data Field Mapping

377

Update a Data Field Mapping

To update a data field mapping: 1. 2. 3. Click the icon beside the mapping ID. The mapping form opens. Click Expression. A new window opens with the Expression page. Update these form fields: Justification Padding Default Value 4. 5. 6. Build an expression using the expressions listed in the drop-down menu. Click Close. Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Record to Module Mapping Page (Correlation File Conversion)

379

Record to Module Mapping Page (Correlation File Conversion)

After you "Open a New Record to Module Mapping Page" (10381), you can: "Create a Record-to-Module Mapping" (10384) "Go to Another Page in the Correlation File Conversion" (10317) After you "Open an Existing Record to Module Mapping Page" (10383), you can: "Go to the Data Field Mapping Page" (10385) "Go to the Expression Page to Update a Control Action Field" (10386) "Go to Another Page in the Correlation File Conversion" (10317)
Figure 80 Record to Module Mapping Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

380

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Correlation File Conversion ID Correlation File Format Correlation Module Name Exclusive? Input File Format (for Mediation Features) Input Record Name Mapped? Name Offset Order Secondary Key

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open a New Record to Module Mapping Page

381

Open a New Record to Module Mapping Page

To open a new Record to Module Mapping page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation File Conversions. The Correlation File Conversions Page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation file conversion in the table. The Correlation File Conversion page opens. Click Record Mappings. The Record Mappings page opens. Click the arrow beside Record-to-Module Mappings. The Record-toModule Mappings table opens.

5. 6.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

382

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

7.

Click the New icon.

A New Record to Module Mapping page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open an Existing Record to Module Mapping Page

383

Open an Existing Record to Module Mapping Page

To open an existing Record to Module Mapping page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation File Conversions. The Correlation File Conversions Page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation file conversion in the table. The Correlation File Conversion page opens. Click Record Mappings. The Record Mappings page opens. Click the arrow beside Record-to-Module Mappings. The Record-toModule Mappings table opens. Click the ID for the record-to-module mapping in the Record-to-Module Mapping table. The Record to Module Mapping page opens.

5. 6.

7.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

384

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Create a Record-to-Module Mapping

To create a record-to-module mapping: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Record to Module Mapping Page" (10381). Fill out these form fields: Correlation Module Name Secondary Key Order Exclusive? 3. Click Submit.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to the Data Field Mapping Page

385

Go to the Data Field Mapping Page

1. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Record to Module Mapping Page" (10383). Click Name of the data field in the in the Control Data Fields or Record Data Fields tables. The Data Field Mapping page opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to the Expression Page to Update a Control Action Field

To go to the Expression page to update a control action field: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Record to Module Mapping Page" (10383). Click the Name of the data field in the in the Control Action Fields table. A new window opens with the Expression page.

2.

Record to Module Data Field Mapping Page (Correlation File

387

Record to Module Data Field Mapping Page (Correlation File Conversion)

After you "Open the Record to Module Data Field Mapping Page" (10389), you can: "Create a Data Field Mapping" (10391) "Update a Data Field Mapping" (10392) "Go to Another Page in the Correlation File Conversion" (10317)
Figure 81 Record to Module Data Field Mapping Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Correlation File Conversion ID Correlation File Format Correlation Module Name Correlation Record Name Description Field Format (for Correlation File Conversion) Field Length (for Correlation File Conversion) Field Name (for Correlation File Conversion) Input File Format (for Mediation Features) Input Record Name

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

388

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Length Mapping ID Module Secondary Key Order Record Secondary Key Start (for Field Mappings)

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open the Record to Module Data Field Mapping Page

389

Open the Record to Module Data Field Mapping Page

1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation File Conversions. The Correlation File Conversions Page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation file conversion in the table. The Correlation File Conversion page opens. Click Record Mappings. The Record Mappings page opens. Click the ID beside the record mappings in the table. The Record Mapping page opens. Click the arrow beside Record-to-Module Mappings. The Record-toModule Mappings table opens.

5. 6.

7.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

390

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

8.

Click the ID for the record-to-module mapping in the table. The Record to Module Mapping page opens. Click the Name of the control data field in the Control Data Fields or Record Data Fields table. The Data Field Mapping page opens.

9.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a Data Field Mapping

391

Create a Data Field Mapping

To create a data field mapping: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Record to Module Data Field Mapping Page" (10389). Click the New icon.

2.

The new Mapping form opens. 3. Fill out these form fields: Mapping ID Start (for Field Mappings) Length 4. 5. Click Expression. A new window opens with the Expression page. Fill out these form fields, if available: Justification Padding Default Value 6. 7. 8. Build an expression using the expressions listed in the drop-down menu. Click Close. Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

392

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Update a Data Field Mapping

To update a data field mapping: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Record to Module Data Field Mapping Page" (10389). Click the icon beside the mapping in the table. The new Mapping form opens. Update these form fields: Length Mapping ID Start (for Field Mappings) 4. 5. Click Expression. A new window opens with the Expression page. Update these form fields: Justification Padding Default Value 6. 7. 8. Build an expression using the expressions listed in the drop-down menu. Click Close. Click Submit.

2.

3.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Module Mappings Page (Correlation File Conversion)

393

Module Mappings Page (Correlation File Conversion)

After you "Open the Module Mappings Page" (10394), you can: "Go to a New Module Mapping Page" (10395) "Go to an Existing Module Mapping Page" (10396) "Go to Another Page in the Correlation File Conversion" (10317)
Figure 82 Module Mappings Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Correlation File Format Correlation Module Name Exclusive? Input File Format (for Mediation Features) Input Module Name Order Secondary Key Type

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

394

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Open the Module Mappings Page

To open the Module Mappings page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation File Conversions. The Correlation File Conversions Page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation file conversion in the table. The Correlation File Conversion page opens. Click Module Mappings. The Module Mappings page opens.

5.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to a New Module Mapping Page

395

Go to a New Module Mapping Page

To go to a new Module Mapping page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Module Mappings Page" (10394). Click the New icon.

A new Module Mapping page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

396

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Go to an Existing Module Mapping Page

To go to an existing Module Mapping page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Module Mappings Page" (10394). Click the ID for the module mapping in the Module Mappings or the Trigger Mappings table. The Module Mapping page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Module Mapping Page (Correlation File Conversion)

397

Module Mapping Page (Correlation File Conversion)

After you "Open a New Module Mapping Page" (10399), you can: "Create a Module Mapping" (10401) "Go to Another Page in the Correlation File Conversion" (10317) After you "Open an Existing Module Mapping Page" (10400), you can: "Go to the Data Field Mapping Page" (10402) "Go to the Expression Page to Update a Control Action Field" (10403) "Go to Another Page in the Correlation File Conversion" (10317)
Figure 83 Module Mapping Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Correlation File Conversion ID Correlation File Format Correlation Module Name Description Exclusive? Input File Format (for Mediation Features)

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

398

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Input Module Name Mapped? Module Name (Field Filter page) Name Order Offset

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open a New Module Mapping Page

399

Open a New Module Mapping Page

To open a new Module Mapping page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation File Conversions. The Correlation File Conversions Page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation file conversion in the table. The Correlation File Conversion page opens. Click Module Mappings. The Module Mappings page opens. Click the New icon.

5. 6.

The Module Mapping page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

400

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Open an Existing Module Mapping Page

To open an existing Module Mapping page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation File Conversions. The Correlation File Conversions Page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation file conversion in the table. The Correlation File Conversion page opens. Click Module Mappings. The Module Mappings page opens. Click the ID for the module mapping in the Module Mappings or Trigger Mappings table. The Module Mapping page opens.

5. 6.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a Module Mapping

401

Create a Module Mapping

To create a module mapping: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Module Mapping Page" (10399). Fill out these fields: Input Module Name Correlation Module Name Module Name (Field Filter page) Order Exclusive? 3. Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

402

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Go to the Data Field Mapping Page

To go to the Data Field Mapping page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Module Mapping Page" (10 400). Click the Name of the data field in the Control Data Fields or Record Data Fields tables. The Data Field Mapping page opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to the Expression Page to Update a Control Action Field

403

Go to the Expression Page to Update a Control Action Field

To go to the Expression page to update a control action field: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Module Mapping Page" (10 400). Click the Name of the control action field in the Control Action Fields table. A new window opens with the Expression page.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Module Data Field Mapping Page (Correlation File Conversion)

405

Module Data Field Mapping Page (Correlation File Conversion)

After you "Open the Module Data Field Mapping Page" (10407), you can: "Create a Data Field Mapping" (10408) "Update a Data Field Mapping" (10409) "Go to Another Page in the Correlation File Conversion" (10317)
Figure 84 Module Data Field Mapping Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Field Format (for Correlation File Conversion) Field Length (for Correlation File Conversion) Field Name (for Correlation File Conversion) Correlation File Conversion ID Correlation File Format Correlation Module Name Description Input File Format (for Mediation Features) Input Module Name Length Mapping ID

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

406

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Secondary Key Start (for Field Mappings)

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open the Module Data Field Mapping Page

407

Open the Module Data Field Mapping Page

To open the Module Data Field Mapping page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation File Conversions. The Correlation File Conversions Page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation file conversion in the table. The Correlation File Conversion page opens. Click Module Mappings. The Module Mappings page opens. Click the Name of a control data field in the Control Data Fields or Record Data Fields table. The Data Field Mapping page opens.

5. 6.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

408

10 Correlation File Conversions Application Pages

Create a Data Field Mapping

To create a data field mapping: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Module Data Field Mapping Page" (10407). Click the New icon.

2.

The new mapping form appears. 3. Fill out these form fields: Mapping ID Start (for Field Mappings) Length 4. 5. Click Expression. A new window opens with the Expression page. Fill out these form fields: Justification Padding Default Value 6. 7. 8. Build an expression using the expressions listed in the drop-down menu. Click Close. Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Update a Data Field Mapping

409

Update a Data Field Mapping

To update a data field mapping: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Module Data Field Mapping Page" (10407). Click the icon beside the mapping ID in the table. The mapping form appears. Update these form fields: Mapping ID Start (for Field Mappings) Length 4. 5. Click Expression. A new window opens with the Expression page. Update these form fields: Justification Padding Default Value 6. 7. 8. Build an expression using the expressions listed in the drop-down menu. Click Close. Click Submit.

2.

3.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

This section describes the Correlation Store Conversion pages, including information on: Creating Correlation Store Conversions Updating Correlation Store Conversion Opening Correlation Store Conversion pages Working with Correlation Store Conversions

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Correlation Store Conversions Page

413

Correlation Store Conversions Page

After you "Open the Correlation Store Conversions Page" (11414), you can: "Go to a New Correlation Store Conversion Page" (11415) "Go to an Existing Correlation Store Conversion Page" (11416) Before creating and working with a correlation ID, use a mapping template to predefine the mappings you are going to set up in the correlation ID application.
Figure 85 Correlation Store Conversion Applications Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Correlation File Format Description Name Source Record Target Record Name

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

414

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

Open the Correlation Store Conversions Page

To open the Correlation Store Conversions page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation Store Conversions. The Correlation Store Conversions page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to a New Correlation Store Conversion Page

415

Go to a New Correlation Store Conversion Page

To go to a new Correlation Store Conversion page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Correlation Store Conversions Page" (11414). Click the New icon.

2.

A new Correlation Store Conversion Application page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

416

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

Go to an Existing Correlation Store Conversion Page

To go to an existing Correlation Store Conversion page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Correlation Store Conversions Page" (11414). Click the Name of the correlation store conversion in the table. The Correlation Store Conversion Application page opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Correlation Store Conversion Page

417

Correlation Store Conversion Page

After you "Open a New Correlation Store Conversion Page" (11418), you can "Create a Correlation Store Conversion Application" (11420). After you "Open a New Correlation Store Conversion Page" (11418), you can "Update a Correlation Store Conversion Application" (11421).
Figure 86 Correlation Store Conversion Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Audit Button Audit Results Correlation File Format Description Last Audited Name Source Record Name Target Record Name

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

418

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

Open a New Correlation Store Conversion Page

To open a new Correlation Store Conversion page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation Store Conversions. The Correlation Store Conversions page opens.

4.

Click the New icon.

A new Correlation Store Conversion page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open an Existing Correlation Store Conversion Page

419

Open an Existing Correlation Store Conversion Page

To open an existing Correlation Store Conversion page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation Store Conversions. The Correlation Store Conversions page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation store conversion in the table. The Correlation Store Conversion page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

420

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

Create a Correlation Store Conversion Application

To create a correlation store conversion application: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Correlation Store Conversion Page" (11418). Fill out these form fields at the top of the page: Name Source Record Name Description Correlation File Format Target Record Name 3. 4. Fill out the Default Values. Click Submit. The Correlation Store Conversion page opens with the globals and mappings available.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Update a Correlation Store Conversion Application

421

Update a Correlation Store Conversion Application

To update a correlation store conversion application: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Correlation Store Conversion Page" (11419). Update this form fields at the top of the page: Description 3. 4. 5. Update the Default Values. Click Submit. Set up your globals by clicking these links on the screen: Value Lists Table Lookup Value Lists 6. Set up your mappings by clicking these links on the screen: Secondary Key Mappings Record Mappings Module Mappings 7. Click Audit.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Value Lists Page (Correlation Store Conversion)

423

Value Lists Page (Correlation Store Conversion)

After you "Open the Value Lists Page" (11424), you can: "Go to a New Value List Page" (11425) "Go to an Existing Value List Page" (11426) "Go to Another Page in the Correlation Store Conversion" (11427) Create a value list before you specify the value list as an inList or notInList comparison operator in an expression on the Secondary Key Mapping or Field Mapping page.
Figure 87 Correlation Store Conversion Value Lists Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Correlation Store Conversion ID Description List Name

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

424

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

Open the Value Lists Page

To open the Value Lists page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation Store Conversions. The Correlation Store Conversions page opens.

4.

Click Value Lists in the Globals column. The Value Lists page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to a New Value List Page

425

Go to a New Value List Page

To go to a new Value List page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Value Lists Page" (11424). Click the New icon.

A new Value List page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

426

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

Go to an Existing Value List Page

To go to an existing Value List page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Value Lists Page" (11424). Click the List Name for the value list in the table. The Value List page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to Another Page in the Correlation Store Conversion

427

Go to Another Page in the Correlation Store Conversion

To go to another page in the Correlation Store Conversion: 1. 2. Open a Correlation Store Conversion page. Select one of these pages from the Go drop-down menu: Correlation Store Conversion Value Lists Table Lookup Value Lists Secondary Key Mappings Record Mappings Module Mappings Audit

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Value List Page (Correlation Store Conversion)

429

Value List Page (Correlation Store Conversion)

After you "Open a New Value List Page" (11431), you can: "Create a Value List" (11433) "Go to Another Page in the Correlation Store Conversion" (11427) After you "Open an Existing Value List Page" (11432), you can: "Update a Value List" (11434) "Go to Another Page in the Correlation Store Conversion" (11427) Create a value list before you specify the value list as an operator such as an inList or notInList comparison operator in an expression on the Secondary Key Mapping or Field Mapping page.
Figure 88 Value List Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

430

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Correlation File Format Correlation Store Conversion ID Description List Name List Value

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open a New Value List Page

431

Open a New Value List Page

To open a new Value List page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation Store Conversions. The Correlation Store Conversions page opens.

4. 5. 6.

Click the Name of the correlation store conversion in the table. Click Value Lists in the Global column. Click the New icon.

A new Value List page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

432

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

Open an Existing Value List Page

To open an existing Value List page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation Store Conversions. The Correlation Store Conversions page opens.

4. 5. 6.

Click the Name of the correlation store conversion in the table. Click Value Lists in the Global column. Click the List Name for the value list in the table. The Value List page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a Value List

433

Create a Value List

To create a value list: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Value List Page" (11431). Fill out these form fields at the top of the page: Correlation Store Conversion ID Correlation File Format List Name Description 3. 4. To add a list value, follow the instructions to "Add a List Value" (11435). Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

434

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

Update a Value List

To update a value list: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Value List Page" (11432). Fill out this form field at the top of the page: Description 3. 4. To add a list value, follow the instructions to "Add a List Value" (11435). To update a list value, follow the instructions to "Update a List Value" (11 436). Click Submit.

5.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Add a List Value

435

Add a List Value

To add a value: 1. Click the New icon.

The new List Value form opens. 2. Fill out this field: List Value 3. Click Update.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

436

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

Update a List Value

To update a value: 1. 2. Click the icon beside the list value in the table. The list value form opens. Update this field: List Value 3. Click Update.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Table Lookup Value Lists Page (Correlation Store Conversion)

437

Table Lookup Value Lists Page (Correlation Store Conversion)

After you "Open the Table Lookup Value Lists Page" (11438), you can: "Go to a New Table Lookup Value List Page" (11439) "Go to an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page" (11440) "Go to Another Page in the Correlation Store Conversion" (11427) After you set up a table lookup value list, you can use the information in the table or dateTable mapping operators on the associated Secondary Key Mapping or Field Mapping page.
Figure 89 Correlation Table Lookup Value Lists Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Correlation Store Conversion ID Description List Name

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

438

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

Open the Table Lookup Value Lists Page

To open the Table Lookup Value Lists page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation Store Conversions. The Correlation Store Conversions page opens.

4. 5.

Click the correlation store conversion. Click Table Lookup Value Lists in the Global column. The Table Lookup Value Lists page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to a New Table Lookup Value List Page

439

Go to a New Table Lookup Value List Page

To go to a new Table Lookup Value List page: 1. Follow the instruction to "Open the Table Lookup Value Lists Page" (11 438). Click the New icon.

2.

A new Table Lookup Value List page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

440

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

Go to an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page

To go to an existing Table Lookup Value List page: 1. Follow the instruction to "Open the Table Lookup Value Lists Page" (11 438). Click the List Name for the table lookup value list in the table. The Table Lookup Value List page opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Table Lookup Value List Page (Correlation Store Conversion)

441

Table Lookup Value List Page (Correlation Store Conversion)

After you "Open a New Table Lookup Value List Page" (11443), you can: "Create a Table Lookup Value List" (11446) "Add a Table Lookup Value" (11448) "Go to Another Page in the Correlation Store Conversion" (11427) After you "Open an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page" (11445), you can: "Update a Table Lookup Value List" (11447) "Add a Table Lookup Value" (11448) "Update a Table Lookup Value" (11449) "Go to Another Page in the Correlation Store Conversion" (11427)

After you set up a table lookup value list, you can use the information in operators such as the table or dateTable mapping operators on the associated Secondary Key Mapping or Field Mapping page.
Figure 90 Table Lookup Value List Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Correlation File Format

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

442

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

Correlation Store Conversion ID Description Key List Name Value

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open a New Table Lookup Value List Page

443

Open a New Table Lookup Value List Page

To open a new Table Lookup Value List page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation Store Conversions. The Correlation Store Conversions page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation store conversion in the table. The Correlation Store Conversion page opens. Click Table Lookup Value Lists in the Global column. The Table Lookup Value Lists page opens. Click the New icon.

5.

6.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

444

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

A New Table Lookup Value List page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page

445

Open an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page

To open an existing Table Lookup Value List page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation Store Conversions. The Correlation Store Conversions page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation store conversion in the table. The Correlation Store Conversion page opens. Click Table Lookup Value Lists in the Global column. The Table Lookup Value Lists page opens. Click the List Name for the table lookup value list in the table. The Table Lookup Value List page opens.

5.

6.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

446

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

Create a Table Lookup Value List

To create a table lookup value list: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Table Lookup Value List Page" (11443). Fill out these form fields at the top of the page: Correlation Store Conversion ID List Name Description 3. To add a table lookup value, follow the instructions to "Add a Table Lookup Value" (11448). Click Submit.

2.

4.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Update a Table Lookup Value List

447

Update a Table Lookup Value List

To update a table lookup value list: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page" (11445). Fill out this form field at the top of the page: Description 3. To add a table lookup value, follow the instructions to "Add a Table Lookup Value" (11448). To update a table lookup value, follow the instructions to "Update a Table Lookup Value" (11449). Click Submit.

2.

4.

5.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

448

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

Add a Table Lookup Value

To add a table lookup value: 1. Click the New Icon.

The new table lookup value form appears. 2. Fill out these fields: Key Value 3. Click Update.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Update a Table Lookup Value

449

Update a Table Lookup Value

To update a table lookup value: 1. Click the icon beside the key in the table. The table lookup value form appears. Update these form fields: Key Value 3. Click Update.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

450

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Secondary Key Mappings Page (Correlation Store Conversion)

451

Secondary Key Mappings Page (Correlation Store Conversion)

The Secondary Key Mappings page lets you define optional secondary key conditions to be applied to an input or source record. After you "Open the Secondary Key Mappings Page" (11453), you can: "Go to a New Secondary Key Mapping Page" (11454) "Go to an Existing Secondary Key Mapping Page" (11455) "Go to Another Page in the Correlation Store Conversion" (11427)
Figure 91 Secondary Key Mapping Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Correlation File Format Expression (for Secondary Key Mappings) Secondary Key Source Structure Type

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

452

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

References

For more information on the Secondary Key Mapping page, see "Secondary Key Mapping Page (Correlation File Conversion and Correlation Store Conversion)" (245) in this user guide

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open the Secondary Key Mappings Page

453

Open the Secondary Key Mappings Page

To open the Secondary Key Mappings page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation Store Conversions. The Correlation Store Conversions page opens.

4. 5.

Click the Name of the correlation store conversion in the table. Click Secondary Key Mappings in the Mappings column. The Secondary Key Mappings page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

454

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

Go to a New Secondary Key Mapping Page

To go to a new Secondary Key Mapping page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Secondary Key Mappings Page" (11 453). Click the New icon.

2.

A new window with the Secondary Key Mapping page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to an Existing Secondary Key Mapping Page

455

Go to an Existing Secondary Key Mapping Page

To go to an existing Secondary Key Mapping page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Secondary Key Mappings Page" (11 453). Click the Secondary Key for the mapping in the table. A new window with the Secondary Key Mapping page opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

456

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Record Mapping Page (Correlation Store Conversion)

457

Record Mapping Page (Correlation Store Conversion)

After you "Open the Record Mapping Page" (11459), you can: "Update the Record Mapping" (11460) "Go to a Record Data Field Mapping Page" (11461) "Go to an Expression Page to Update the Control Action Field" (11462) "Open the Record-to-Module Mappings Table" (11463) "Go to a New Record to Module Mapping Page" (11464) "Go to an Existing Record to Module Mapping Page" (11465) "Go to Another Page in the Correlation Store Conversion" (11427)
Figure 92 Record Mapping Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

458

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Correlation File Format Correlation Module Name Exclusive? Mapped? Name Offset Order Secondary Key Source Record Store Conversion ID Target Record Name

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open the Record Mapping Page

459

Open the Record Mapping Page

To open the Record Mapping page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation Store Conversions. The Correlation Store Conversions page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation store conversion in the table. The Correlation Store Conversion page opens. Click Record Mapping in the Mappings column. The Record Mapping page opens.

5.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

460

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

Update the Record Mapping

To update the record mapping: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Record Mapping Page" (11459). Update this form field: Secondary Key 3. Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to a Record Data Field Mapping Page

461

Go to a Record Data Field Mapping Page

To go to a Record Data Field Mapping page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Record Mapping Page" (11459). Click the Name of the data field in the Control Data Fields or Record Data Fields tables. The Data Field Mapping page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

462

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

Go to an Expression Page to Update the Control Action Field

To go to the Expression page to update the control action field: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Record Mapping Page" (11459). Click the Name of the data field in the Control Action Fields table. A new window opens with the Expression page.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open the Record-to-Module Mappings Table

463

Open the Record-to-Module Mappings Table

To open the Record-to-Module Mappings table: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Record Mapping Page" (11459). Click the arrow beside Record-to-Module Mappings. The Record-toModule Mappings Table opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

464

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

Go to a New Record to Module Mapping Page

To go to a new Record to Module Mapping page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Record Mapping Page" (11459). Click Record-to-Module Mappings. The Record-to-Module Mappings Table opens. Click the New icon.

3.

A New Record to Module Mapping page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to an Existing Record to Module Mapping Page

465

Go to an Existing Record to Module Mapping Page

To go to an existing Record to Module Mapping page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Record Mapping Page" (11459). Click the arrow beside Record-to-Module Mappings. The Record-toModule Mappings Table opens. Click the ID for the mapping in the table. The Record to Module Mapping page opens.

3.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Record Data Field Mapping Page (Correlation Store Conversion)

467

Record Data Field Mapping Page (Correlation Store Conversion)

After you "Open the Record Data Field Mapping Page" (11469), you can: "Create a Mapping" (11470) "Update a Mapping" (11471) "Go to Another Page in the Correlation Store Conversion" (11427)
Figure 93 Data Field Mapping Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Correlation File Format Field Description Field Format Field Length Length Name Secondary Key Source Record Start (for Field Mappings) Store Conversion ID

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

468

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

Target Field Name Target Record Name

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open the Record Data Field Mapping Page

469

Open the Record Data Field Mapping Page

To open the Record Data Field Mapping page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation Store Conversions. The Correlation Store Conversions page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation store conversion in the table. The Correlation Store Conversion page opens. Click Record Mappings in the Mappings column. The Record Mappings page opens. Click the Name of the mapping in the Control Data Fields or Record Data Fields table. The Record Data Field Mapping page opens.

5.

6.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

470

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

Create a Mapping
To create a mapping: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Record Data Field Mapping Page" (11469). Click the New icon.

2.

The new Mapping box opens. 3. Fill out these form fields: Name Start (for Field Mappings) Length 4. 5. Click Expression. A new window with the Expression page opens. Fill out these form fields: Justification Padding Default Value 6. 7. 8. Build an expression using the expressions listed in the drop-down menu. Click Submit. Click Close. The Expression page closes and the Record Data Field Mapping page is updated.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Update a Mapping

471

Update a Mapping
To update a mapping: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Record Data Field Mapping Page" (11469). Click the icon beside the mapping ID. The Mapping form opens. Update these form fields: Name Start (for Field Mappings) Length 4. 5. Click Expression. A new window with the Expression page opens. Update these form fields: Justification Padding Default Value 6. 7. 8. Build an expression using the expressions listed in the drop-down menu. Click Submit. Click Close. The Expression page closes and the Record Data Field Mapping page is updated.

2. 3.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Record to Module Mapping Page (Correlation Store Conversion)

473

Record to Module Mapping Page (Correlation Store Conversion)

After you "Open the Record-to-Module Mapping Page" (11474), you can "Go to Another Page in the Correlation Store Conversion" (11427).
Figure 94 Record to Module Mapping Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Correlation File Format Exclusive? Mapped? Name Offset Order Secondary Key Source Record Store Conversion ID Target Module Name Target Record Name

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

474

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

Open the Record-to-Module Mapping Page

To open the Record to Module Mapping page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation Store Conversions. The Correlation Store Conversions page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation store conversion in the table. The Correlation Store Conversion page opens. Click Record Mappings in the Mappings column. The Record Mappings page opens. Click the arrow beside the Record-to-Module Mappings. The Record-toModule Mappings table appears. Click the ID for the Record-to-Module Mapping in the table. The Recordto-Module Mapping page opens.

5.

6.

7.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Module Mappings Page (Correlation Store Conversion)

475

Module Mappings Page (Correlation Store Conversion)

The Module Mappings page is a container page with links to pages that allow you to work with: Module-to-module mappings Module trigger mappings After you "Open the Module Mappings Page" (11477), you can: "Go to a New Module Mapping Page" (11478) "Go to an Existing Module Mapping Page" (11479) "Go to a New Module Trigger Mapping Page" (11480) "Go to an Existing Module Trigger Mapping Page" (11481) "Go to Another Page in the Correlation Store Conversion" (11427)

Module trigger mappings are events that flag the correlation feature to generate the terminating module for a record.
Figure 95 Correlation Store Module Mappings Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

476

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Correlation File Format Exclusive? Order Secondary Key Source Module Target Module Type

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open the Module Mappings Page

477

Open the Module Mappings Page

To open the Module Mappings page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation Store Conversions. The Correlation Store Conversions page opens.

4.

Click the "Name" (16483) of the correlation store conversion in the table. The Correlation Store Conversion page opens. Click Module Mappings in the Mappings column. The Module Mappings page opens.

5.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

478

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

Go to a New Module Mapping Page

To go to a new Module Mapping page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Module Mappings Page" (11477). Click the New icon in the toolbar of the Module Mappings table.

A new Module Mapping page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to an Existing Module Mapping Page

479

Go to an Existing Module Mapping Page

To go to an existing Module Mapping page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Module Mappings Page" (11477). Click the ID for the module mapping in the Module Mappings table. The Module Mapping page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

480

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

Go to a New Module Trigger Mapping Page

To go to a new Module Trigger Mapping page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Module Mappings Page" (11477). Click the New icon in the toolbar of the Trigger Mappings table.

A new Module Trigger Mapping page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to an Existing Module Trigger Mapping Page

481

Go to an Existing Module Trigger Mapping Page

To go to an existing Module Trigger Mapping page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Module Mappings Page" (11477). Click the ID for the module mapping in the Trigger Mappings table. The Module Trigger Mapping page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Module Mapping Page (Correlation Store Conversion)

483

Module Mapping Page (Correlation Store Conversion)

After you "Open a New Module Mapping Page" (11485), you can: "Create a Module Mapping" (11488) "Go to Another Page in the Correlation Store Conversion" (11427) After you "Open an Existing Module Mapping Page" (11487), you can: "Update a Module Mapping" (11489) "Go to a Data Field Mapping Page" (11490) "Go to an Expression Page to Update a Control Action Field" (11491) "Go to Another Page in the Correlation Store Conversion" (11427)
Figure 96 Correlation Store Module Mapping Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

484

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Correlation File Format Exclusive? Mapped? Module Name (Field Filter page) Name Offset Order Source Module Store Conversion ID Target Module Target Module Description

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open a New Module Mapping Page

485

Open a New Module Mapping Page

To open a new Module Mapping page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation Store Conversions. The Correlation Store Conversions page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation store conversion in the table. The Correlation Store Conversion page opens. Click Module Mappings in the Mappings column. The Module Mappings page opens. Click the New icon in the toolbar of the Module Mappings table.

5.

6.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

486

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

A new Module Mapping page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open an Existing Module Mapping Page

487

Open an Existing Module Mapping Page

To open an existing Module Mapping page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation Store Conversions. The Correlation Store Conversions page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation store conversion in the table. The Correlation Store Conversion page opens. Click Module Mappings in the Mappings column. The Module Mappings page opens. Click the ID for the module mapping in the Module Mappings table. The Module Mapping page opens.

5.

6.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

488

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

Create a Module Mapping

To create a module mapping: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Module Mapping Page" (11485). Fill out these form fields: Source Module Target Module Module Name (Field Filter page) Order Exclusive? 3. Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Update a Module Mapping

489

Update a Module Mapping

To update a module mapping: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Module Mapping Page" (11 487). To update a data field mapping, follow the instructions to "Go to a Data Field Mapping Page" (11490). To update a control action field, follow the instructions to "Go to an Expression Page to Update a Control Action Field" (11491). Click Submit.

2.

3.

4.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

490

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

Go to a Data Field Mapping Page

If there is no corresponding module, the mapping links are not available. To go to a Data Field Mapping page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Module Mapping Page" (11 487). Click a data field in a Control Data Fields or Record Data Fields tables. The Data Field Mapping page opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to an Expression Page to Update a Control Action Field

491

Go to an Expression Page to Update a Control Action Field

To go to an Expression page to update a control action field: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Module Mapping Page" (11 487). Click a control action field in a Control Action Field table. The Expression page opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

492

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Module Data Field Mapping Page (Correlation Store Conversion)

493

Module Data Field Mapping Page (Correlation Store Conversion)

After you "Open the Module Data Field Mapping Page" (11495), you can: "Create a Data Field Mapping" (11496) "Update a Data Field Mapping" (11497) "Go to Another Page in the Correlation Store Conversion" (11427)
Figure 97 Data Field Mapping Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Correlation File Format Field Description Field Format Field Length Length Module Name (Field Filter page) Name Source Module Start (for Field Mappings) Store Conversion ID

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

494

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

Target Field Name Target Module

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open the Module Data Field Mapping Page

495

Open the Module Data Field Mapping Page

To open the Module Data Field Mapping page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation Store Conversions. The Correlation Store Conversions page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation store conversion in the table. The Correlation Store Conversion page opens. Click Module Mappings in the Mappings column. The Module Mappings page opens. Click the Name of the control data field in the Control Data Fields or Module Data Fields table. The Module Data Field Mapping page opens.

5.

6.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

496

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

Create a Data Field Mapping

To create a data field mapping: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Module Data Field Mapping Page" (11495). Click the New icon.

2.

The new mapping form appears. 3. Fill out these form fields: Name Start (for Field Mappings) Length 4. 5. Click Expression. A new window with the Expression page opens. Fill out these form fields: Justification Padding Default Value 6. 7. Build an expression using the expressions listed in the drop-down menu. Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Update a Data Field Mapping

497

Update a Data Field Mapping

To update a data field mapping: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Module Data Field Mapping Page" (11495). Click the Name of the mapping in the table. The mapping form appears. Update these form fields: Justification Padding 4. 5. Build an expression using the expressions listed in the drop-down menu. Click Submit.

2. 3.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Module Trigger Mapping Page

499

Module Trigger Mapping Page

After you "Open a New Module Trigger Mapping Page" (11501), you can: "Create a Module Trigger Mapping" (11504) "Go to Another Page in the Correlation Store Conversion" (11427) After you "Open an Existing Module Trigger Mapping Page" (11503), you can: "Go to a Data Field Mapping Page" (11505) "Go to an Expression Page to Update a Control Action Field" (11506) "Go to Another Page in the Correlation Store Conversion" (11427) For Terminating Modules only one trigger module can be created.
Figure 98 Module Trigger Mapping Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

500

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Correlation File Format Description Mapped? Name Offset Source Module Store Conversion ID Target Module

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open a New Module Trigger Mapping Page

501

Open a New Module Trigger Mapping Page

To open a new Module Trigger Mapping page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation Store Conversions. The Correlation Store Conversions page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation store conversion in the table. The Correlation Store Conversion page opens. Click Module Mappings in the Mappings column. The Module Mappings page opens. Click the New icon in the Trigger Mapping table.

5.

6.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

502

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

A new Trigger Mapping page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open an Existing Module Trigger Mapping Page

503

Open an Existing Module Trigger Mapping Page

To open an existing Module Trigger Mapping page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click Correlation Applications. The Correlation Applications page opens.

3.

Click Correlation Store Conversions. The Correlation Store Conversions page opens.

4.

Click the Name of the correlation store conversion in the table. The Correlation Store Conversion page opens. Click Module Mappings in the Mappings column. The Module Mappings page opens. Click the ID of the trigger mapping in the Trigger Mapping table. The Trigger Mapping page opens.

5.

6.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

504

11 Correlation Store Conversion Application Pages

Create a Module Trigger Mapping

To create a Module Trigger Mapping: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Module Trigger Mapping Page" (11501). Fill out this field: Target Module 3. Click Submit.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to a Data Field Mapping Page

505

Go to a Data Field Mapping Page

To go to a Data Field Mapping page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Module Trigger Mapping Page" (11503). Click a data field in a Control Data Fields or Module Data Fields tables. The Data Field Mapping page opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to an Expression Page to Update a Control Action Field

To go to an Expression page to update a control action field: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Module Trigger Mapping Page" (11503). Click a control action field in a Control Action Field table. The Expression page opens.

2.

12 External Database Access Definition Application Pages

This section describes the external database access definition pages, including information on: Creating External Database Access Definitions Updating External Database Access Definitions Opening External Database Access Definition pages

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

External Database Access Definitions Page

509

External Database Access Definitions Page

After you "Open the External Database Access Definitions Page" (12510), you can: "Go to a New External Database Access Definition Page" (12511) "Go to an External Database Access Definition Page" (12512)
Figure 99 External Database Access Definitions Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description Name ODBC Data Source Type

References

For information about configuration and setup of the ODBC software, see the Installation Guide For information on the knowledge and permissions you need to work with this feature, see "Working with External Database Access Definitions" (16)

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

510

12 External Database Access Definitions Application Pages

Open the External Database Access Definitions Page

To open the External Database Access Definitions page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click External Database Access Definitions. The External Database Access Definitions page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to a New External Database Access Definition Page

511

Go to a New External Database Access Definition Page

To go to a new External Database Access Definition page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the External Database Access Definitions Page" (12510). Click the New icon.

2.

A new External Database Access Definitions page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

512

12 External Database Access Definitions Application Pages

Go to an External Database Access Definition Page

To go to an external Database Access Definition page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the External Database Access Definitions Page" (12510). Click the Name of the external database access definition in the table. The External Database Access Definitions page opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

External Database Access Definition Page

513

External Database Access Definition Page

After you "Open a New External Database Access Definition Page" (12515), you can "Create an External Database Access Definition" (12517). After you "Open an Existing External Database Access Definition Page" (12516), you can "Update an External Database Access Definition" (12518). When creating and updating an external database access definition, you: Specify selection criteria to retrieve specific values from an external data source Query and retrieve initial data files to store them locally on the Data Mediation system Manually update the local data files Define a schedule to automatically update the local data files
Figure 100 External Database Access Definition Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

514

12 External Database Access Definitions Application Pages

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: and minutes at hours Audited? Data Length Dates in the Selected Month Days of Each Week Description First Byte Start Format in months Name ODBC Data Source on days SQL Statement Type Update Local Data

References

For information about configuration and setup of the ODBC software, see the Installation Guide For information on the knowledge and permissions you need to work with this feature, see "Working with External Database Access Definitions" (16) "Working with Table Lookup Value Lists" (15) in this user guide

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open a New External Database Access Definition Page

515

Open a New External Database Access Definition Page

To open a new External Database Access Definition page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click External Database Access Definitions. The External Database Access Definitions page opens.

3.

Click the New icon.

A new External Database Access Definition page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

516

12 External Database Access Definitions Application Pages

Open an Existing External Database Access Definition Page

To open an existing External Database Access Definition page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Click External Database Access Definitions. The External Database Access Definitions page opens.

3.

Click the Name of the external access definition in the table. The External Database Access Definition page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create an External Database Access Definition

517

Create an External Database Access Definition

To create an external Database Access Definition page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open a New External Database Access Definition Page" (12515). Fill out these form fields at the top of the page: Name ODBC Data Source Description Type 3. Fill out these Key form fields: Format First Byte Start Data Length SQL Statement Update Local Data 4. If you selected Table from the Type drop-down menu, then fill out these Value form fields: Format First Byte Start Data Length 5. If you selected As Scheduled from the Update Local Data drop-down menu, fill out these schedule form fields: at hours and minutes on days and on days of the month in months 6. 7. Click Submit. To audit the external database access definition, click Audit.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

518

12 External Database Access Definitions Application Pages

Update an External Database Access Definition

To update an external Database Access Definition page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open a New External Database Access Definition Page" (12515). Update these form fields at the top of the page: ODBC Data Source Description Type 3. Update these Key form fields: Format First Byte Start Data Length SQL Statement Update Local Data 4. If you selected Table from the Type drop-down menu, update these Value form fields: Format First Byte Start Data Length 5. If the value is As Scheduled in the Update Local Data drop-down menu, fill out these schedule form fields: at hours and minutes on days and on days of the month in months 6. 7. Click Submit. To audit the external database access definition, click Audit.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

13 About File Format Definitions

This chapter describes the file format definitions, including information on: Overview Working with File Formats and Mediation Accessing the File Format Definition Pages Defining a GRID File Format Working with Data Field Types Working with GRID Working with GRID Field Attributes Working with Fields Working with File Structures Working with Modules Working with Special Modules Working with Module Supports Working with Block Header/Trailers Working with File Header/Trailers Working with File Formats Working with File Format & Structure Associations Auditing a File Format Definition Troubleshooting a File Format Definition File Format Audit Error Messages

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

520

13 - About File Format Definitions

Overview
Data Mediation receives billing records from different sources in many different file formats. A file format ID is a tag name given to a a set of definitions that specifies the format in which the usage records are received from the source. GRID File Format Definitions provide the basis for processing all data coming into and flowing out of the system. Defining a file format consists of putting together all the rules used by GRID to recognize the information contained within a file of data. After the file format is defined, it can be associated with any or all sources that generate usage data files with that file format. To recognize each file format, GRID requires that these components be defined to create each format: Fields contain call data or parsing information File Structures define components of a file format Structures sets of fixed length fields containing call detail information, which is information generated by the switch detailing call information or events, such as the originating number, terminating number, start time, end time, and call type Modules additional call data not contained in the structure (optional) Module Supports contains parsing information Block Headers and Trailers provide a way of packaging data records (optional) File Headers and Trailers provide a way of packaging data records and optional blocks (optional) Record to File Format Associations describes how the structures are associated Some file formats come predefined on the Data Mediation System, depending on the system package purchased (for example: wireline, wireless). Using the Data Mediation system, you can build file format definitions to extract, and use the information (mediate) contained in the data records. Not all fields on the file format definition pages are required. These fields are available to accommodate a variety of file formats and to increase the flexibility and efficiency of GRID. After the parts have been defined and joined together into a file format, GRID can break down information to the field and sub-field level and pass it to mediation applications, such as Filter, Search, File Format Conversion, Correlation, Package Manager, or Validation.

Consulting Services
Users can create and modify their own mediation feature sets or contract with the Mediation Engineering and Consulting Service (MECS) group for any mediation feature sets and mediation services that can be required.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Overview

521

Source Upgrades
The Data Mediation system is originally configured with predefined file formats, set up to the vendor specifications. These file formats include the latest available updates to CSG Systems, Inc. sources. Even after a release of Data Mediation, any generic upgrades to Data Mediation sources are supported. All Gold or Gold Uplift maintenance contract customers are notified of source upgrades and provided with instructions so that they can update their systems. Maintenance of file formats depends on the type of contract established with CSG Systems, Inc.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

522

13 - About File Format Definitions

Working with File Formats and Mediation

Mediation of the usage data, such as the ability to manage, update, transfer subsets, interrogate, validate, correlate, and audit usage records, is provided with the File Format Definitions capability and these mediation features: Filter (optional feature) Search (optional feature) Validation (optional feature) File Format Conversion (optional feature) Correlation and associated CORFILTER (optional feature) Package Manager (standard feature) Exception File Editor (optional feature)

Using the Data Files pages, you can view or print records from usage data files that have defined file formats.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Accessing the File Format Definition Pages

523

Accessing the File Format Definition Pages

After you open the Mediation Features page, a short menu of links appears at the top of the page with several mediation feature applications. Below this group of links is the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.
Figure 101 Active Mediation Feature Set Drop-down Menu

When you select an option from this drop-down menu, three columns of links appear, including the File Format Definitions links.
Figure 102 The File Format Definitions Links

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

524

13 - About File Format Definitions

When you click a link in this column, the corresponding File Format Definitions page opens. These links are found in the File Format Definitions column.
Table 5 File Format Definitions Links and the Corresponding Pages

Click this link

To Go to the Fields Page (File Format Definitions)

Go to the Structures Page

Go to the Modules Page (File Format Definitions)

Go to the Module Supports Page

Go to the Block Header and Trailer Structures Page

Go to the Module Supports Page for Block Header/Trailer Modules

Go to the File Header/Trailer Structures Page

Go to the Module Supports Page for File Header/Trailer Modules

Go to the File Formats Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Accessing the File Format Definition Pages

525

Go to the File Format & Structures Association Page

Go to the Audit Page (for Mediation Feature Sets)

These links are listed in the order in which they must be completed; however, depending on the type of GRID mediation feature set and file format type required, not all pages are necessarily used. For example, a GRID using only records, does not require the user to complete the Block Header/Trailer or File Header/Trailer pages.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

526

13 - About File Format Definitions

Defining a GRID File Format

Figure 103 Defining a File Format

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with Data Field Types

527

Working with Data Field Types

GRID supports these five generic data field types for Data Field Formats in the Data Mediation system: ASCII BCD BINARY BIT EBCDIC

ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange)

The ASCII data type is the most popular coding method small computers use to convert letters, numbers, punctuation, and control codes into digital form. (One character per byte)

BCD (Binary Coded Digit)

The BCD data type uses a 4-bit code to represent each decimal digit from 0 to 9 and multiple 4-bit patterns for higher numbers. BCD is based on the hexadecimal system, which is a numbering system of 16 characters, ten digits, and six letters. In hexadecimal notation, the decimal number numbers 0 through 15 are represented by the decimal digits 09 and the alphabet digits af (AF). The characters af (AF) in BCD do not represent numerical values, but usually represent abnormalities or special events. For example, 0001 represents the BCD character 1. To represent a value larger than 9 requires more than 4 bits, so the BCD value of 11 must be 0001 0001. (Two nibbles per byte, one character per nibble)

BINARY
The BINARY data type there has only two possible values or states for a particular condition such as on or off, or one or zero. The BINARY data type uses only two digits: 0 and 1. (Two nibbles per byte, one character per nibble) Normally, written numbers follow the decimal format. In the decimal format, when you move a number one position to the left, then you are increasing it by ten. For example, 100 is ten times the number 10. However, when computers use BINARY notation and a number is moved one position to the left, the value is doubled. For example, the BINARY number 10101 is equivalent to 16 + 0 + 4 + 0 + 1 = 21 in decimal. The BINARY notation differs slightly from the ASCII or EBCDIC notations. With ASCII and EBCDIC, the BINARY values are used for coding of individual characters or keys or symbols on keyboards or in computers. So each string of seven (as in ASCII) or eight (as in EBCDIC) ones and zeros is a unique value, but not a mathematical one. GRID interprets BINARY fields similar to how it interprets fields as BCD.When GRID interprets fields as BCD, the decimal numbers 0 through 15 are represented

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

528

13 - About File Format Definitions

by the decimal digits 09 and the alphabet digits af (AF). However, when GRID interprets an output value, the output is in Base 16. For example, 100 is translated to 100 (decimal 256). If the input field is BINARY, GRID transforms the user input to hexadecimal. For example, a user-entered 100 is translated to 64.

BIT (contraction of Binary and Digit)

The BIT data type uses the smallest unit of information (data) a computer can process, representing either high or low, yes or no, or 1 or 0. (Eight bits per byte, one character per bit).

EBCDIC (Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code)

IBM developed this data type primarily for their mainframes and minicomputers. Codes alphanumerical characters and punctuation. (One character per byte)

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with GRID

529

Working with GRID

GRID is one of the most important parts of the Data Mediation System. GRID allows for the interpretation of all data coming into and flowing out of the system. Using the file format definitions created in the application GUI, the system parses data from the source into the appropriate fields. This data can then be viewed in the application. If the format of incoming data does not match the file format definition that has been created for it, GRID errors or exceptions can occur. The benefits of GRID are: GUI-based provisioning It is definable to the sub-field level Access to all fields and modules Provides parsing capabilities for mediation on input and output Supports five generic data types

After GRID: Parsed records are passed to the application association, which applies the appropriate mediation features in the order specified On collection, files are moved to the primary directory On transmission, files are moved to the tertiary directory GRID interprets all data coming into and going out of the system. This means that both processes require an incoming and outgoing GRID. If the data coming into the system remains the same on transmission (AUTOPLEX data in, AUTOPLEX data out), then only one file format definition (AUTOPLEX) is required. However, if the data differs, (AUTOPLEX in, EMI out), then two file format definitions (AUTOPLEX and EMI) are required. You can create as many file format definitions as needed to process all information. There is not a system limit on how many file format definitions can be created.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

530

13 - About File Format Definitions

Mediation Feature Sets

File Format Definitions provide the basis for usage data processing and are created within a mediation feature set, which is also called a GRID mediation feature set. A mediation feature set is a container for one or more file format definitions that can share definitions such as: Field Types, Record Types, Module Types and so on. Mediation feature sets: Can contain one or more file formats Multiple file formats can be contained within one mediation feature set. For example, within this AMA mediation feature set, you can have one file format that contains headers and trailers and another file format that only contains data records Can reuse definitions within the file mediation feature set After you have created an entity (fields, block headers, file trailers, and so on) within a mediation feature set, you can use that entity in any file format within that mediation feature set. For example, within the EMI mediation feature set, you can have three different file formats. After you have created the field definition for record type, you can use the field record type in one, two, or all three file formats Are not able to use definitions that were defined in other file mediation feature sets Even though different mediation feature sets can have similar field names and types, one field definition cannot be used within another mediation feature set type. For example, both AMA and AUTOPLEX file mediation feature sets can have a field called structure code; however, the field must be defined separately under each mediation feature set

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with GRID

531

GRID on Collection
Call data records are sent into Data Mediation from sources, typically a switch. The records are stored in Data Mediation as flat UNIX files. Before files are stored in Data Mediation, they are processed through GRID and any optional mediation features (filter, format, validation, and so on). During this processing, the files are stored in a temporary directory. If the files are successfully processed, they are stored in the primary directory for the source that sent the original file. In this scenario, files are stored in the mediated format, meaning that the file reflects any optional mediation processing, such as filter that were performed before committing the file to the directory. If no mediation was indicated on collection, the files are stored in the original format the source generated.

GRID on Transmission
Data files received from the various sources are stored in the their original format in each sources primary directory. After GRID is run for the file to be transmitted, we look at the Application Association to see which mediation features are attached to the transmission stream. Based on that information, the input file is converted to the required output file format and transmitted to the Destination. After all the formatted files have been transmitted, the original input files are moved from the primary directory to the tertiary directory for the original source. The reformatted files are not stored on the system.

GRID and Exception Files

If the files do not process successfully, an exception or an error occurs. Exception files are stored in the exception directory for the source that sent the original file. Exception files are stored in the exception sources based upon the file format and destination name. The exception source is associated with the destination.

References

"Working with Exceptions" (16)

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

532

13 - About File Format Definitions

Working with GRID Field Attributes

GRID Field Attributes, or parse information fields, contain data that describe the characteristics of the file format and tell GRID where parsing information, such as record length, number of modules, and block length, is located. Data fields contain information about the call, while parsing information fields contain information about the record, structure, module, block, or file. These fields must be identified to GRID so that GRID understands the file format structure. These are examples of GRID field attributes: Size of structure, module, block, or file Count of records in block or file Count of blocks in file Count of subblocks in a block Module indicator Count of modules attached to a record Last module in record indicator Last record in block or file

Figure 104, "GRID Field Attributes" (13-532) shows an example of the GRID field attributes. The Key Field structure code contains information indicating modules are appended to the record structure.
Figure 104 GRID Field Attributes

Note

You can obtain this type of parsing information from the format description document supplied by your switch manufacturer.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with GRID Field Attributes

533

When additional information is required for a selected field, the GRID field attributes area is displayed by selecting specific fields on the following pages: Module Support page Block Header/Trailer Structures page File Header/Trailer Structures page File Formats page

GRID Field Attributes that contain length data are interpreted by GRID as follows: If the field has a format of BINARY, then the field is interpreted as a hexadecimal value, base 16. If the field has a format of BCD, then the field is interpreted as BCD, base 10. If the field has a format of ASCII or EBCDIC then the ASCII or EBCDIC value is interpreted as the user specified base on the GRID Field Attribute If the field has a format of BIT, then the field is interpreted as base 16 (logically BIT is interpreted as base 2; for GRID purposes it is interpreted as base 16). For block headers and trailers GRID recognizes and uses parsing information contained only in the block header, not in the block trailer. If trailers are defined, all trailers for a given level have the same GRID field attributes. GRID Field Attributes for trailers are defined separately from the headers. Other mediation applications can adjust length and count fields in the block trailer.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

534

13 - About File Format Definitions

Working with Fields

A field is a portion of a usage data record and can contain data or parsing information. Fields are the basic building blocks for all types of records and modules, including call and statistical records. Fields are placed in a specific order and related to a record name. This helps the system identify and differentiate the different types of records that flow through the data stream.
Note The Data Mediation system applications can only work with fields if they are provisioned. Figure 105 Fields in a Data Record

When you define a field in a usage data record, you define the: type use format length data offset data length
Note The information for the format and the length of the field usually comes from the specification.

The GRID field attributes identify specific subfields within a field allowing GRID to parse information down to the byte/nibble level for specified fields. GRID requires a minimum amount of information to completely define the file format, so while it is not necessary to define all fields, it is recommended. The Data Mediation system applications can only work with defined fields.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with Fields

535

The information that you enter to define a field helps the system target where a particular field will be used. As GRID reviews the records that come in and out of the system, if it finds a field that falls outside of the parameters set on the Field Definitions Page, an error is produced or an exception is generated. Field formats are determined by your file format standards. Different fields within a record can be a different format. GRID and parse information length data.

Field Input
Fields do not have to be entered in the order of their position in the structure, although verifying their accuracy is easier if you do. The Structure page lists them in sequential order starting with the lowest offset number as they are entered. Figure 106, "Fields in a BAF Record" (13-535) shows an example of fields in a BAF record. One record uses modules and the other does not. Different file formats use different layouts, but the concept of fields in a defined order applies to most file formats.
Figure 106 Fields in a BAF Record

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

536

13 - About File Format Definitions

Working with File Structures

For file format definitions to parse records down to the field and subfield level, the components of a file format must be defined. Files can contain call detail records and a record can be a: Data record structure + zero or more modules Block headers or trailer records + zero or more modules File headers or trailer records + zero or more modules A record is a combination of one structure and zero or more optional modules. It is a complete entity that GRID and other applications can identify and use for counting, filtering, searching, and other mediation applications. Data record structures are created by adding previously defined fields from the selection list into a table. Each table represents one type of data structure that is present within the mediation feature set. As many tables as required are created to represent all of the different record structures present within a particular mediation feature set. File Format Definitions support four major file configurations that can be built using these record types: Data Records only File header (and possible trailer) and data records Blocks with possible nested block headers (and possible trailers) and data records File header (and possible trailer), blocks with possible nested block headers (and possible trailers), and data records File Format Definitions support up to three levels of record blocking, referred to as tiers, where Tier 1 is the level closest to the data records. There can be several Tier 1 block headers/trailers and multiple block headers/trailers can be defined for each tier.
Note In some file formats, such as BAF and AUTOPLEX, the record name is the same as the name used for their structure code field.

Using the Structure Page, you can define all of the data record structures that are included in the specified mediation feature set. When you define a data record, you define all of the information that makes up the record structure: name length field names offsets

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with File Structures

537

These definitions are what the system uses to evaluate if an incoming or outgoing structure is correct.
Note Record structures must be added as outlined in the source or destination specification book.

Application GUI Structure Checks

The application GUI verifies and checks that: A field name is not entered twice in the same structure The sum of the field offsets and length is consistent with the defined record structure length The field use is defined as Structure or All on the Field Page (File Format Definitions) The record type is defined as Data Record or All on the Field Page (File Format Definitions)

File Formats with Multiple Record Structures

If a file format has more than one record definition, GRID must have a way to identify the record structure type. A field generically referred to as the key field is required. The value in the key field identifies the record structure and is the entry used for the Record Name field on the Structure Page. For example, the AUTOPLEX file format uses Structure Code as its Data Record Key Field. The format of the Structure Code field is BCD with a field length of 3, which is 6 BCD characters. The file format further defines the meaning of these characters. For a Structure Code, Position 1 indicates if modules are attached or not, Positions 25 indicate the structure identifier, and Position 6 is a hex c. The Name field, then, needs to be the value in Positions 25, such as 0421 or 1339.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

538

13 - About File Format Definitions

Example File Configuration

Figure 107 provides a pictorial example of a typical file configuration using all the file components: File Header/Trailer Block Header/Trailer (two tiers) Data Records
Figure 107 Typical File Configuration

FILE HEADER { BLOCK HEADER 2 { BLOCK HEADER 1 { RECORD RECORD } BLOCK HEADER 1 { RECORD RECORD RECORD } BLOCK HEADER 1 { RECORD } } BLOCK TRAILER 2 BLOCK HEADER 2 { BLOCK HEADER 1 { RECORD RECORD RECORD } } BLOCK TRAILER 2 } FILE TRAILER

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with Modules

539

Working with Modules

Modules are typically appended at the end of a structure and are viewed as add-ons to structures to extend the structure meaning. Zero or more modules can be attached to a structure. The types of structures that can have modules attached are: Data Records File Headers and Trailers Block Headers and Trailers Not all file formats use modules. The Module Support page must be completed after defining data record modules. Define all fields in a module, although it is not required. The Data Mediation system applications can only work with provisioned fields.

File Formats with Multiple Modules

If a file format has more than one module definition, GRID must have a way to identify the module structure. A field generically referred to as the key field is required. The value in the key field identifies the module structure and is the entry for the Name field on the Module Page (File Format Definitions).

Naming Regular Modules

The name for regular modules must match the value established for the file format module name. For example, the AUTOPLEX file format has module codes such as 325, 326, 613, 000. These values must be entered in the Name field on the Module Page (File Format Definitions).

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

540

13 - About File Format Definitions

Working with Special Modules

Special modules are similar to regular modules in that they are optional extensions of a record structure and they contain a list of ordered fields. However, special modules do not contain a module ID field, so a unique one must be created. If special modules are part of a record, they must be identified by a separate field in the record structure. For example, the AUTOPLEX file format is a file format that provides for the use of special modules. The value of the first character of the Structure Code field of each record structure indicates what is to be included in the record and the specified order. This value is the Module Indicator Value. GRID expects to encounter special modules immediately following the structure portion of the record. If regular modules are also part of the record, GRID expects to encounter them after the special module portion of the record.

Naming Special Modules

Although special modules do not contain a Module ID field, GRID must manage these definitions in the database, so you must create a unique name for each special module. This name must conform to the format of regular module ID names. For example, the AUTOPLEX file format requires a unique set of 3 BCD characters, which are different from every other special and regular module name. Possible names include abc or def. Provisioning of special modules is identical to regular module provisioning.

Ordering of Special Modules

The order of the special modules must be specified in the Module Action box accessed through the Module Support Page. This page also maps each special module indicator to the Module Name (Field Filter page) provisioned in GRID for each special module.

Building Records
The Module Page builds records in the same way as the Structures page. A table is created for each module type in the data record by adding fields in the order that they appear. Unlike data structures, which have various fields that contain call origination, destination, and duration information, modules contain very specific and limited information. Consequently, module structures typically have a length that is less than 20 bytes.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with Module Supports

541

Working with Module Supports

Most fields on the Module Support page specify parsing information. Some file formats provide multiple ways to parse a file. For example, the AMA and AUTOPLEX file formats provide Record Length, Module Attached Indicator, and Last Module Indicator. Any one of these sets of information is sufficient for GRID to determine the last module. However, it is strongly recommended that you populate all fields that pertain to the module you are defining. One reason is that it enables GRID to choose the indicator that provides the most efficient method for parsing the file format. Another reason is for downstream applications such as the Format Conversion Module. If the file format is used with the file format conversion feature, then all of the module support information must be supplied to GRID for GRID to create a complete output file with this file format.
Note Before adding any information into the module support fields, consult the switch manufacturers specification books, if they are available.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

542

13 - About File Format Definitions

Working with Block Header/Trailers

Block headers and trailers provide a way of packaging data records. If they are used by the file format, they provide information on how to access the data records. This can be record counts, total block length, or some other indicators.

Working with Tiers

GRID provides for a hierarchy of blocks called Tiers. A file format does not have to have any block headers or trailers. If a file format does have block headers and (optional) trailers, they can be nested up to three deep or in three tiers. The innermost level is Tier 1, and the numbering increases outward. A higher level tier is also referred to as a containing block: Tier 3 blocks contain Tier 2 blocks (nested blocks) Tier 2 blocks contain Tier 1 blocks (nested blocks) Tier 1 blocks contain data records

Guidelines for Working with Block Headers/Trailers

When working with block headers/trailers: Define block headers and trailers in pairs, unless the file format does not use a block trailer You can use a block header without a block trailer Do not use a block trailer without an associated block header Do not use more than three levels or tiers of block header and trailer pairs in a file. Each level or tier is independent of other levels Do not pair a single block header with more than one block trailer You can define more than one block header or trailer record for each block level or tier For a given level, if one block header has a trailer, then make sure that all block headers at that level must have a trailer If there are multiple headers at a given level, make sure that all headers support the same Key Field If there are multiple trailers at a given level, make sure that all trailers support the same Key Field You can use a different Key Field for trailers and headers If there is only one header or trailer at a given level, you do not need to have a Key Field for the header or trailer If one block header has an associated fixed block length, then make sure that all the block headers for that level or tier must have a fixed block length; however, the fixed block lengths can be different If there is not a file header and trailer pair, the highest tier numbered block header begins at file offset 0 If there is a file header and trailer pair, the highest tier numbered block header follows the file header

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with Block Header/Trailers

543

Working with a Block Header and No Block Trailer

If a block header does not have an associated block trailer, another method must be specified to indicate the end of the block. Examples of how this can be determined are (not an exhaustive list): Fixed block length Fixed record count (Tier 1), fixed nested block count (Tiers 2, 3) Block length field in header Record or nested block count in header

You use the Block Header and /Trailer page to specify how GRID is to handle this situation.

Working with a Block Trailer and No Block Header

GRID requires a block header whenever a block trailer is used. If the file format does not use a block header then a psuedo block header structure can be provisioned with the structure length of 0 bytes.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

544

13 - About File Format Definitions

Working with File Header/Trailers

File headers and trailers provide a way of packaging data records by indicating the start and end of a file. File headers and trailers can enclose blocks and records or records only. File headers and trailers can also provide parsing information to GRID. This can be record counts, total file length, or some other indicators.

Guidelines for Working with File Headers/Trailers

When working with file headers/trailers: You can use a file header without a file trailer GRID recognizes only one file header or trailer for each file of data A file header starts at offset 0 in the file A file trailer cannot be used without an associated file header. A file trailer follows the data records and indicates the end of file; no data records follow the file trailer If one file header has a trailer, then all file headers must have a trailer If you define a file trailer for a file format, GRID stops processing a data file after it recognizes the file trailer If you do not define a file trailer or a file trailer is not found in a file, GRID stops processing when the physical end of the file is encountered or when a pre-defined event occurs Trailers can have different layouts than headers, such as length or fields You can define multiple file header or trailer combinations for a GRID file format. Only one defined combination is permitted for a specific physical file
Note Parsing information is determined only by the file header. Downstream applications adjust length and count fields in the file trailer, if they are identified as GRID field attributes.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with File Header/Trailers

545

Working with a File header and No File Trailer

If a file header does not have an associated file trailer, another method must be specified to indicate the end of the file. Examples of how this can be determined are: Fixed file length Fixed record count File length field in the header Record count field in the header Physical end of file

You use the File Header and Trailer page to specify how GRID is to handle the end of a file. GRID does not process any records in the file after one of these events occurs. Normally, there are not any records left in the file.

Working with a File Trailer and No File Header

GRID requires a file header whenever a file trailer is used. If the file format does not use a file header then a psuedo file header structure can be provisioned with the structure length of 0 bytes.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

546

13 - About File Format Definitions

Working with File Formats

A file format is an organized arrangement of usage information that automated processes use to extract and manipulate the usage information in a non-ambiguous manner. A file format identifies the file structure. A file format contains: Zero or more file header/trailer records Zero or more block header/trailer records One or more record structures Zero or more record modules

After a file format is created, it can be associated with any or all sources that collect usage data files with that file format.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with File Format & Structure Associations

547

Working with File Format & Structure Associations

After all of the information has been supplied on the file format pages, the structures can then be associated. Only the structures associated through the File Format & Structures Association Page are recognized by GRID. You can add structures even if they are not used in your environment. Having access to these structures helps GRID interpret all possible data better and can prevent possible errors due to unrecognized structures.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

548

13 - About File Format Definitions

Auditing a File Format Definition

Every time you create or update a file format definition, you must run an audit. After you request an audit, the system verifies that the file format contains all the required information for GRID to process a file using the file format. GRID has been designed to support a wide variety of file formats. To support this flexibility, GRID must decide how to perform up to 36 different tasks. Some of these tasks are needed only in very special situations. Each task can be done in more than one way. Often information is available to do a task in multiple ways. When this occurs the decision is based on performance weights assigned to the different ways. A problem arises when there is not enough information to decide how to do a task. There is no way to point to one screen or one field and say particular data is missing because the information necessary to decide how to do a task can be spread across several different file format definition pages. If an audit of the file format passes, the system can automatically audit all Filter IDs, Format Conversion IDs, Search Tag Names, Validation IDs, and Package IDs that are listed which use the file format.

Error Messages
When the GRID audit cannot find enough information to determine how to do a task, it prints out an error message that lists all the ways it can do that task in the results area of the Audit Page (for Mediation Feature Sets). Use the error messages to start troubleshooting the errors in the file format definition.

References

For a list of all GRID Audit Error Messages, see the "Troubleshooting a File Format Definition" (13549) in this user guide

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Troubleshooting a File Format Definition

549

Troubleshooting a File Format Definition

After a GRID audit completes, the file format definition must still be verified by attempting to pass a known good file through GRID. It is possible that even though a file format definition passes the GRID audit, GRID can not be able to parse the records.

Possible Run Time Errors

Sometimes GRID cannot parse the records. Examples of these situations are: A structure length or a module length has been incorrectly provisioned If modules are not provisioned, after reading an incorrect structure length, GRID expects to find the next structure at the wrong file offset. GRID probably reads garbage and puts out an error message to the Error and Information log file that it has read an unknown record key If there are modules, after reading an incorrect structure length, GRID expects to find a module at the wrong file offset. GRID probably reads garbage and puts out an error message to the Error and Information log file that it has read an unknown module key GRID can use file or block lengths or file or block record counts to identify when headers or trailers are read. Errors occur when you incorrectly provision this information on the File Header/Trailer page or the Block Header/Trailer page GRID errors occur when file format field attributes for structures, modules, headers, or trailers are incorrectly provisioned The input file can contain errors, missing portions, or can be incomplete The best way to test a file format definition is with the data file browse feature. If GRID cannot recognize a record or a module key, it displays what it thinks is the record or module key is, identifies the record offset in the file, and then does an hexadecimal dump of the record.

When GRID Fails

If GRID fails to complete parsing of a file, because specifications are incorrect or the input file is corrupt, it takes one of two actions: 1. GRID fails and cannot continue. In this case, GRID cannot recover from the error and stops processing the file. GRID does not output the file to the downstream applications Error messages are sent to the Error and Information Log to alert you to the failure If this is a data transmission operation, an attempt is made to parse the file at the next scheduled transmission. This attempt continues until GRID or the file is repaired. If Generate Exceptions is selected for this destination, then the file sent to the exception for manual handling

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

550

13 - About File Format Definitions

2.

GRID fails but can continue parsing the file. This can occur when GRID encounters an undefined record structure, but other information in the file format enables GRID to successfully find the next record. GRID outputs an error message to the Error and Information Log to alert you of the problem GRID outputs the file to downstream applications if there are no other unrecoverable errors If this is a file transmission operation, the file is transmitted to the destination. This problem can cause other mediation applications to fail

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

File Format Audit Error Messages

551

File Format Audit Error Messages

When a file format audit error occurs, messages are displayed to indicate the cause. The message typically lists the page where you can start and then lists fields on that page or tells you to go to subpages. For each error message there is an example of the file format audit error, the associated output message, and a message description. For this example the actual text of the audit message has been broken into five parts followed by an explanation of that portion of the audit message.
Note The actual text of the error message uses the term screen instead of page and the term subscreen instead of subpage.

This example problem occurs when a fill character has been specified for Tier 1 blocks, but GRID cannot figure out how or when to fill out a block, because the length of a Tier 1 has not been provisioned correctly in GRID.

Text 1
A fill character has been specified for Tier 1 Block Header: <BH1 ID> but there is no way to identify how to use the character to fill a block. The following combinations of information can be parsed by GRID ((SS) indicates subscreen):

Block Header/Trailer Structures Screen: Tier 1 fixed block length. There are cases for: No tier 1 block trailer. Tier 1 block trailer, trailer not included in block length. Tier 1 block trailer, trailer included in block length, no support for modules.

Explanation 1
This message refers to provisioning the Tier 1 block header (<BH1 ID>) on the fifth line of the Block Header and Trailer page. GRID can use this information if the data file contains: No Tier 1 block trailer. A Tier 1 block trailer, but the block trailer is not included in the block length calculation. A Tier 1 block trailer, the block trailer is included in the block length calculation and no modules are attached to the block trailer (no support for modules).

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

552

13 - About File Format Definitions

Text 2
Tier 1 (SS) Block Information field indicating block length.

There are cases for: No tier 1 block trailer. Tier 1 block trailer, trailer not included in block length. Tier 1 block trailer, trailer included in block length, no support for modules.

Explanation 2
This message refers to provisioning the Tier 1 block header (<BH1 ID>) on the Block Header and Trailer page by checking the box beside the question: Structure contains information about blocks? This expands so you can specify a field whose contents indicate the block length. GRID can use the information in this field if the data file contains: No Tier 1 block trailer A Tier 1 block trailer, but the block trailer is not included in the block length calculation A Tier 1 block trailer, the block trailer is included in the block length calculation, but no modules are attached (no support for modules)

Text 3
Tier 2 (SS) Sub-block Information fixed subblock length.

There are cases for: No tier 1 block trailer list. Tier 1 block trailer, trailer not included in block length. Tier 1 block trailer, trailer included in block length, no support for modules.

Explanation 3
This message refers to provisioning a Tier 2 block header on the Block Header and Trailer page by checking the box beside the question: Structure contains information about subblocks? This expands so you can specify a fixed subblock length. GRID can use the information in this field if the data file contains: No Tier 1 block trailer. A Tier 1 block trailer, but the block trailer is not included in the block length calculation. A Tier 1 block trailer, the block trailer is included in the block length calculation, but no modules are attached (no support for modules).

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

File Format Audit Error Messages

553

Text 4
Tier 2 (SS) Sub-block Information field indicating subblock length.

There are cases for: No tier 1 block trailer. Tier 1 block trailer, trailer not included in block length. Tier 1 block trailer, trailer included in block length, no support for modules

Explanation 4
This message refers to provisioning a Tier 2 block header on the Block Header and Trailer page by checking the box beside the question: Structure contains information about subblocks? This expands to allow you to specify a field whose contents indicate the subblock length. GRID can use the information in this field if the data file contains: No Tier 1 block trailer A Tier 1 block trailer, but the block trailer is not included in the block length calculation A Tier 1 block trailer, the block trailer is included in the block length calculation, but no modules are attached (no support for modules)

Text 5
File Header and Trailer screen:

There are only tier 1 blocks, File Header (SS) Block Information field indicating length of highest tier block. There are cases for: No tier 1 block trailer. Tier 1 block trailer, trailer not included in block length. Tier 1 block trailer, trailer included in block length, no support for modules.

Explanation 5
This message refers to provisioning a file header on the File Header and Trailer page by checking the box beside the question: Structure contains information about blocks? This expands so you can specify a field whose contents indicate the length of the highest Tier block. GRID can use this information (for this current problem) if the data file contains: Only Tier 1 blocks No Tier 1 block trailer A Tier 1 block trailer, but the block trailer is not included in the block length calculation A Tier 1 block trailer, the block trailer is included in the block length calculation, but no modules are attached (no support for modules).

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

554

13 - About File Format Definitions

Tier 1 Fill Character; Identify Tier 1 Block Length

A fill character has been specified for Tier 1 Block Header: <BH1 ID> but there is no way to identify how to use the character to fill a block. The following are combinations of information that can be parsed by GRID ((SS) indicates subscreen): Block Header/Trailer Structures screen: Tier 1 fixed block length. There are cases for: No tier 1 block trailer Tier 1 block trailer, trailer not included in block length Tier 1 block trailer, trailer included in block length, no support for modules Tier 1 (SS) Block Information field indicating block length There are cases for: No tier 1 block trailer Tier 1 block trailer, trailer not included in block length Tier 1 block trailer, trailer included in block length, no support for modules Tier 2 (SS) Sub-block Information fixed subblock length. There are cases for: No tier 1 block trailer Tier 1 block trailer, trailer not included in block length. Tier 1 block trailer, trailer included in block length, no support for modules Tier 2 (SS) Sub-block Information field indicating subblock length There are cases for: No tier1 block trailer Tier 1 block trailer, trailer not included in block length Tier 1 block trailer, trailer included in block length, no support for modules

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

File Format Audit Error Messages

555

File Header/Trailer Structures Screen: There are only tier 1 blocks, File Header (SS) Block Information field indicating length of highest tier block. There are cases for: No tier 1 block trailer Tier 1 block trailer, trailer not included in block length Tier 1 block trailer, trailer included in block length, no support for modules

Identify Data Record Structure Code

There must be a way for GRID to identify records' structure codes. The following are combinations of information that can be parsed by GRID. ((SS) indicates subscreen): File Formats Screen: A Single Structure Code supports all records There is a Data Structure Key Field whose contents identify the structure Block Header/Trailer Structures Screen: There is a (SS) Record Information field in the block header structure whose contents identify a fixed structure code in that block.

Identify Module Support for Data Records

No way to determine if modules are supported for data structures. The following are combinations of information that can be parsed by GRID. ((SS) indicates subscreen): GRID Module Support Screen: Module Support Section: are modules supported - no Module Support Section: a field in the structure that indicates modules are attached End of Module Section: a field in the structure that indicates the number (#) of modules attached End of Module Section: a field in the structure that indicates the length of attached modules File Formats Screen: Fixed record length Record Length Field

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

556

13 - About File Format Definitions

File Header/Trailer Structures Screen: There is a (SS) Record Information field in the file header structure that indicates the length of records in the file Block Header/Trailer Structures Screen: There is a (SS) Record Information field in the block header structure whose contents identify the length of records in that block.

Identify Module Codes for Data Records

No way to identify module code for data structures. GRID must have a way to identify records' module codes. The following are combinations of information that can be parsed by GRID: ((SS) indicates subscreen): Module Support Screen: Module Identification Section: single module code Module Identification Section: field that identifies the module code Block Header/Trailer Structures Screen: There is a (SS) Record Information field in the block header structure whose contents identify a fixed module code in that block.

Identify Last Module for Data Records

No way to identify last module for data structures. GRID must have a way to identify a record's last module. The following are combinations of information that GRID can parse: Module Support Screen: End of Module Section: a module code that identifies the last module. This requires a field that identifies the module code in the Module Identification section. End of Module Section: fixed number of modules attached. This requires a field that indicates modules are attached in the Module Support section. End of Module Section: field in structure that indicates the number (#) of modules attached. End of Module Section: fixed length of attached modules. This requires a field that indicates modules are attached in the Module Support section. End of Module Section: field in structure that indicates length of modules. End of Module Section: field in first module that indicates the number (#) of attached modules. End of Module Section: field in first module that indicates the length of attached modules. End of Module Section: field in module that indicates last module. This also requires the value that indicates last module.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

File Format Audit Error Messages

557

File Formats Screen: Fixed record length Record Length Field

Identify Module Support for File Headers and Trailers

No way to determine module support for file header structures. The following are combinations of information that GRID can parse: GRID Module Support Screen: Module Support Section: are modules supported no Module Support Section: a field in the structure that indicates modules are attached End of Module Section: a field in the structure that indicates the number (#) of modules attached End of Module Section: a field in the structure that indicates the length of attached modules File Header/Trailer Structures Screen: Record Length Field

Identify Module Codes for File Headers and Trailers

No way to identify module code for file header structures. There must be a way for GRID to identify a file header's/trailer's module codes. GRID can parse these combinations of information: Module Support Screen: Module Identification Section: single module code Module Identification Section: field that identifies the module code End of Module Section: field in module that indicates last module. This also requires the value that indicates last module

Identify Last Module for File Headers and Trailers

No way to identify last module for file header structures. There must be a way for GRID to identify a file header's/trailer's last module. GRID can parse these combinations of information: Module Support Screen: End of Module Section: a module code that identifies the last module. This requires a field that identifies the module code in the Module Identification section End of Module Section: fixed number of modules attached. This requires a field that indicates modules are attached in the Module Support section

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

558

13 - About File Format Definitions

End of Module Section: field in structure that indicates the number (#) of modules attached End of Module Section: fixed length of attached modules. This requires a field that indicates modules are attached in the Module Support section End of Module Section: field in structure that indicates length of modules End of Module Section: field in first module that indicates the number (#) of attached modules End of Module Section: field in first module that indicates the length of attached modules End of Module Section: field in module that indicates last module. This also requires the value that indicates last module File Headers/Trailers Structures Screen: Record Length Field

Tier <i> Fill Character; Identify Tier <i> Block Length

A fill character has been specified for Tier i: <i> Block Header: <BHi ID> but there is no way to identify how to use the character to fill a block.; Highest tier: <Highest provisioned tier>. GRID can parse these combinations of information: ((SS) indicates subscreen): Block Header/Trailer Structures Screen Tier i+1 Tier i+1 fixed block length. There are cases for: No tier i+1 block trailer Tier i+1 block trailer, trailer not included in block length. Tier i+1 block trailer, trailer included in block length, no support for modules. Tier i+1 (SS) Block Information field indicating block length There are cases for: No tier i+1 block trailer Tier i+1 block trailer, trailer not included in block length Tier i+1 block trailer, trailer included in block length, no support for modules

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

File Format Audit Error Messages

559

File Header/Trailer Structures Screen: (SS) Block Information field indicating length of highest tier block. There are cases for: No highest tier block trailer Highest tier block trailer, trailer not included in block length Highest tier block trailer, trailer included in block length no support for modules

Identify Module Support for Tier <i> Block Headers and Trailers
No way to determine module support for block header structures tier: <i> GRID Module Support Screen: Module Support Section: are modules supported - no Module Support Section: a field in the structure that indicates modules are attached End of Module Section: a field in the structure that indicates the number (#) of modules attached End of Module Section: a field in the structure that indicates the length of attached modules Block Header/Trailer Structures Screen: Record Length Field

Identify Module Codes for Tier <i> Block Headers and Trailers
No way to identify module code for block header structures tier: <i> GRID must be able to identify a block header's/trailer's module codes. GRID can parse these combinations of information: Module Support Screen: Module Identification Section: single module code. Module Identification Section: field that identifies the module code.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

560

13 - About File Format Definitions

Identify the Last Module for Tier <i> Block Headers and Trailers
No way to determine last module for block header structures tier: <i> GRID must be able to identify a block header's/trailer's last module. GRID can parse these combinations of information: Module Support Screen: End of Module Section: a module code that identifies the last module. This requires a field that identifies the module code in the Module Identification section. End of Module Section: fixed number of modules attached. This requires that a field that indicates modules are attached in the Module Support section. End of Module Section: field in structure that indicates the number (#) of modules attached. End of Module Section: fixed length of attached modules. This requires a field that indicates modules are attached in the Module Support section. End of Module Section: field in structure that indicates length of modules. End of Module Section: field in first module that indicates the number (#) of attached modules. End of Module Section: field in first module that indicates the length of attached modules. End of Module Section: field in module that indicates last module. This also requires the value that indicates last module. Block Headers/Trailers Structures Screen: Record Length field

Identify the Last Subblock for Tier <i> Blocks

No way to determine last block for block header structures tier: <i> . GRID must be able to identify the last Tier i block in a containing block or in a file. GRID can parse these combinations of information: ((SS) indicates subscreen): Block Header/Trailer Structures Screen: (SS) Block Information field indicating last block in containing block or in the file and the value that indicates the last block. Tier i+1 fixed block length. There are cases for: No tier i+1 block trailer Tier i+1 block trailer, trailer not included in block length Tier i+1 block trailer, trailer included in block length, no support for modules

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

File Format Audit Error Messages

561

Tier i+1 (SS) Block Information field indicating block length. There are cases for: No tier i+1 block trailer Tier i+1 block trailer, trailer not included in block length Tier i+1 block trailer, trailer included in block length, no support for modules Tier i+1 (SS) Sub-block Information field indicating fixed number of subblocks in the containing block Tier i+1 (SS) Sub-block Information field in the structure whose contents indicate the number of subblocks in the block File Header/Trailer Structures Screen: (SS) Block Information field indicating number of highest tier blocks in the file

Identify the Last Subblock for Tier <i> Blocks (cont)

File Formats Screen: The highest tier last block can be predicted by finding the file trailer. (SS) File header and Trailer field indicating there is a file trailer. This implies that there is also file header. On the File Header/Trailer Structures screen the Key Field must be populated A Tier i last block can be predicted by finding a Tier i+1 block trailer (SS) Block Headers and Trailers Tier i+1 Block Trailer Name. This implies that there is also a Tier i+1 Block Header Name. On the Block Header/Trailer Structures screen the Key Field must be populated A Tier i last block can be predicted by finding a Tier i+1 block header (SS) Block Headers and Trailers Tier i+1 Block Header Name. This implies that there is not a Tier i+1 Block Trailer (covered in above case) On the Block Header/Trailer Structures screen the Key Field must be populated

Identify the Last Record in a Tier 1 Block

There must be a way for GRID to identify the last data record in a Tier 1 block. The following are combinations of information that can be parsed by GRID ((SS) indicates subscreen): Block Header/Trailer Structures screen: Tier 1 fixed block length There are cases for: No tier 1 block trailer Tier 1 block trailer, trailer not included in block length

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

 Tier 1 block trailer, trailer included in block length, no support for modules Tier 1 (SS) Block Information field whose contents indicate the length of the block. There are cases for: No tier 1 block trailer Tier 1 block trailer, trailer not included in block length Tier 1 block trailer, trailer included in block length, no support for modules Tier 1 (SS) Record Information fixed number of records in the block Tier 1 (SS) Record Information field whose contents indicate the number of records in the block Tier 2 (SS) Sub-block Information fixed subblock length There are cases for: No tier 1 block trailer Tier 1 block trailer, trailer not included in block length Tier 1 block trailer, trailer included in block length, no support for modules Tier 2 (SS) Sub-block Information field whose contents indicate subblock length. There are cases for: No tier 1 block trailer Tier 1 block trailer, trailer not included in block length. Tier 1 block trailer, trailer included in block length, no support for modules There is a tier 1 block trailer with a Key Field on the Block Header Trailer Screen. There is a tier 1 block header with a Key Field on the Block Header Trailer Screen and there is not a tier 1 block header. File Formats Screen: (SS) Block Headers and Trailers field for key field that indicates last record in tier one block There is a field in the structure that is a Last Record Key Field and there is a (SS) Block Headers and Trailers field that indicates a value for the last record Key Field that indicates last record in a tier 1 block.

File Format Audit Error Messages

563

File Header/Trailer Structures Screen: If there is only one level of blocking, the (SS) Block Information field whose contents indicate the length of the highest tier block indicates the length of tier 1 blocks. There are cases for: No tier 1 block trailer Tier 1 block trailer, trailer not included in block length Tier 1 block trailer, trailer included in block length, no support for modules

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

564

13 - About File Format Definitions

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

14 File Format Definition Application Pages

This section describes the File Format Definition pages, including information on: Creating File Format Definitions Updating File Format Definition pages Opening File Format Definition pages

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Fields Page (File Format Definitions)

567

Fields Page (File Format Definitions)

After you "Open the Fields Page" (14568), you can: "Go to a New Field Page" (14569) "Go to an Existing Field Page" (14570) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571)
Figure 108 Fields Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description Field Use Format Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Name Record Type

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

568

14 File Format Application Pages

Open the Fields Page

To open the Fields page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click Fields. The Fields page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to a New Field Page

569

Go to a New Field Page

To go to a new Field page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Fields Page" (14568). Click the New icon.

A new Field page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

570

14 File Format Application Pages

Go to an Existing Field Page

To go to an existing Field page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Fields Page" (14568). Click the Name of the field in the table. The Field page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set

571

Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set

To go to another page in the Mediation Feature Set: 1. 2. Select a mediation features page from the Go drop-down menu. Click Go.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Field Page (File Format Definitions)

573

Field Page (File Format Definitions)

The Field page lets you define each field used in a structure and module by its type, use, format, length, data offset, and data length. After you "Open a New Field Page" (14575), you can "Create a Field" (14577). After you "Open an Existing Field Page" (14576), you can "Update a Field" (14 578). When creating or updating a field, you can also "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571).
Figure 109 Field Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Data Length Data Start Description Field Length Field Use Format Mediation Feature Set (MFS)

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

574

14 File Format Application Pages

Name Record Type

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open a New Field Page

575

Open a New Field Page

To open a new field page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3. 4.

Click Fields. The Fields page opens. Click the New icon.

A new Field page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

576

14 File Format Application Pages

Open an Existing Field Page

To open an existing Field page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.
\

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3. 4.

Click Fields. The Fields page opens. Click the Name of the field in the table. The Field page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a Field

577

Create a Field
To create a field: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Field Page" (14575). Fill out these form fields: Name Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Format Record Type Field Use Description Field Length 3. Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

578

14 File Format Application Pages

Update a Field
To update a field: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Field Page" (14575). Fill out these form fields: Format Record Type Field Use Description Field Length Data Length Data Start 3. Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Structures Page

579

Structures Page
After you "Open a Structures Page" (14580), you can: "Go to a New Structure Page" (14581) "Go to an Existing Structure Page" (14582) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571)
Figure 110 Structures Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Name

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

580

14 File Format Application Pages

Open a Structures Page

To open a Structures page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Structures link in the File Format Definitions section. The Structures page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to a New Structure Page

581

Go to a New Structure Page

To go to a new Structure page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open a Structures Page" (14580). Click the New icon.

A new Structure page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

582

14 File Format Application Pages

Go to an Existing Structure Page

To go to an existing Structure page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open a Structures Page" (14580). Click the Name of the structure in the table. The Structure page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Structure Page

583

Structure Page
The Structure page lets you define all of the data record structures that are to be included in the specified mediation feature set. After you "Open a New Structure Page" (14585), you can: "Create a Structure" (14587) "Add a Field" (14589) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571) After you "Open an Existing Structure Page" (14586), you can: "Update a Structure" (14588) "Add a Field" (14589) "Update a Field" (14590) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571)

After data record structures are defined, use the Record page to add them to the file format.
Figure 111 Structure Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

584

14 File Format Application Pages

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Automatically Adjust Offset Field? Description Length Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Name Offset

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open a New Structure Page

585

Open a New Structure Page

To open a new Structure page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Structures link in the File Format Definitions section. The Structures page opens. Click the Name of the structure in the table. The Structure page opens. Click the New icon.

4. 5.

A new Structure page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

586

14 File Format Application Pages

Open an Existing Structure Page

To open an existing Structure page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Structures link in the File Format Definitions section. The Structures page opens. Click the Name of the structure in the table. The Structure page opens.

4.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a Structure

587

Create a Structure
To create a structure: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Structure Page" (14585). Fill out these form fields at the top of the page: Name Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Description Length 3. 4. To add a field, follow the instructions to "Add a Field" (14589). Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

588

14 File Format Application Pages

Update a Structure
To update a structure: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Structure Page" (14586). Update these form fields at the top of the page: Description Length 3. 4. 5. To add a field, follow the instructions to "Add a Field" (14589). To update a field, follow the instructions to "Update a Field" (14590). Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Add a Field

589

Add a Field
To add a field: 1. Click the New icon in the Fields table.

The new Field form opens. 2. Fill out these form fields: Name Offset Automatically Adjust Offset Field? 3. Click Update.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

590

14 File Format Application Pages

Update a Field
To update a field: 1. 2. Click the Name of the field in the Fields table. The Field form opens. Update these form fields: Name Offset Automatically Adjust Offset Field? 3. Click Update.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Modules Page (File Format Definitions)

591

Modules Page (File Format Definitions)

After you "Open the Modules Page" (14592), you can: "Go to a New Module Page" (14593) "Go to an Existing Module Page" (14594) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571)
Figure 112 Modules Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Name Type

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

592

14 File Format Application Pages

Open the Modules Page

To open the Modules page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Modules link in the File Format Definitions section. The Modules page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to a New Module Page

593

Go to a New Module Page

To go to a New Module page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Modules Page" (14592). Click the New icon.

A new Module page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

594

14 File Format Application Pages

Go to an Existing Module Page

To go to an existing Module page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Modules Page" (14592). Click the Name of the module in the table. The Module page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Module Page (File Format Definitions)

595

Module Page (File Format Definitions)

The Module page lets you define the module name, module length, and the field names and offsets that make up the module. After you "Open a New Module Page" (14597), you can: "Create a Module" (14599) "Add a Field" (14601) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571) After you "Open an Existing Module Page" (14598), you can: "Update a Module" (14600) "Add a Field" (14601) "Update a Field" (14602) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571)
Figure 113 Module Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

596

14 File Format Application Pages

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Automatically Adjust Offset Field? Description Module Length Name Mediation Feature Set (MFS)

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open a New Module Page

597

Open a New Module Page

To open a new Module page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Modules link in the File Format Definitions section. The Modules page opens. Click the New icon.

4.

A new Module page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

598

14 File Format Application Pages

Open an Existing Module Page

To open an existing Module page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Modules link in the File Format Definitions section. The Modules page opens. Click the Name of the module in the table. The Module page opens.

4.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a Module

599

Create a Module
To create a Module: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Module Page" (14597). Fill out these form fields at the top of the page: Name Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Available in Description Length 3. 4. To add a field, follow the instructions to "Add a Field" (14601). Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

600

14 File Format Application Pages

Update a Module
To update a module: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Module Page" (14597). Update these form fields at the top of the page: Description Length 3. 4. 5. To add a field, follow the instructions to "Add a Field" (14601). To update a field, follow the instructions to "Update a Field" (14602). Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Add a Field

601

Add a Field
To add a field: 1. Click the New icon in the Fields table.

The new Field form opens. 2. Fill out these form fields: Name Offset Automatically Adjust Offset Field? 3. Click Update.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

602

14 File Format Application Pages

Update a Field
To update a field: 1. 2. Click the field in the Fields table. The Field form opens. Update these form fields: Name Offset Automatically Adjust Offset Field? 3. Click Update.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Module Supports Page

603

Module Supports Page

After you "Open the Module Supports Page" (14605), you can: "Go to the Create New Module Support Wizard" (14606) "Go to an Existing Module Support Page" (14607) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571) The types of structures that can have modules attached are: Data Records File Headers and Trailers Block Headers and Trailers
Figure 114 Module Supports Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

604

14 File Format Application Pages

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Name

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open the Module Supports Page

605

Open the Module Supports Page

To open the Module Support page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Module Supports link in the File Format Definitions section. The Module Supports page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

606

14 File Format Application Pages

Go to the Create New Module Support Wizard

To go to the Create a New Module Support wizard: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Module Supports Page" (14605). Click the New icon.

The Create New Module Support page wizard opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to an Existing Module Support Page

607

Go to an Existing Module Support Page

To go to an existing Module Support page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Module Supports Page" (14605). Click the Name of the module support in the table. The Module Support page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Module Support Page

609

Module Support Page

The Module Support page lets you define the parameters that tell GRID how to process usage records, which contain modules. Modules are appended at the end of a structure and are viewed as add-ons to structures to extend the structure meaning. Zero or more modules can be attached to a structure. The types of structures that can have modules attached are: Data Records File Headers and Trailers Block Headers and Trailers After you "Open the Module Support Page" (14611), you can: "Go to the Basic Module Support Page" (14612) "Go to the Module Identification Page" (14613) "Go to the End of Module Page" (14614) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571)

Complete this page only if the usage records do contain modules. The Module page must be completed prior to the Module Support page. GRID supports block headers/trailers and file headers/trailers with attached modules.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

610

14 File Format Application Pages

Figure 115 Module Support Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Name

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open the Module Support Page

611

Open the Module Support Page

To open the Module Support page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Module Supports link in the File Format Definitions section. The Module Supports page opens. Click the Name of the module support in the table. The Module Support page opens.

4.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

612

14 File Format Application Pages

Go to the Basic Module Support Page

To go to the Basic Module Support page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Module Support Page" (14611). Click the Basic link. The Basic Module Support page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to the Module Identification Page

613

Go to the Module Identification Page

To go to the Module Identification page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Module Support Page" (14611). Click the Module Identification link. The Module Identification page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

614

14 File Format Application Pages

Go to the End of Module Page

To go to the End of Module page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Module Support Page" (14611). Click the End of Module link. The End of Module page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a New Module Support Wizard

615

Create a New Module Support Wizard

After you "Open the Create a New Module Support Wizard" (14617), you can "Create a Module Support" (14618) by filling out the form fields on these three pages: Module Support page Module Identification page End of Module page
Figure 116 Create a New Module Support Wizard Screen One

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Base Description Field indicates modules are attached Field in the 1st module that indicates # of attached modules Field in the 1st module that indicates the length of modules Field in the modules that indicates last module Field in the structure that indicates # of attached modules Field in the structure that indicates the length of modules

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

616

14 File Format Application Pages

Fixed number of modules Fixed total module length Justification Length (for Module Support) Module Identified by Module indicates last module Module Indicator Value Modules Supported? Module Support Name Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Name Padding Single Module Used Start Position

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open the Create a New Module Support Wizard

617

Open the Create a New Module Support Wizard

To open the Create a New Module Support wizard: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Module Supports link in the File Format Definitions section. The Module Supports page opens. Click the New icon.

4.

A New Module Support page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

618

14 File Format Application Pages

Create a Module Support

To create a module support: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Create a New Module Support Wizard" (14617). Fill out these form fields: Module Support Name Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Description Modules Supported? Field indicates modules are attached 3. If you selected the Field indicates modules are attached check box, then fill out these form fields: Start Position Length Base Justification Padding 4. 5. Click Next. The wizard displays the Module Identification screen. Fill out these form fields: Single Module Used Module Identified by 6. If you selected the Module Identified by check box, then fill out these form fields: Start Position Justification Padding Length Base 7. 8. Click Next. The wizard displays the End of Module screen. Fill out these form fields: Field in the modules that indicates last module Value indicates last module Module indicates last module Fixed number of modules

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a Module Support

619

Fixed total module length Field in the structure that indicates # of attached modules Field in the structure that indicates the length of modules Field in the 1st module that indicates # of attached modules Field in the 1st module that indicates the length of modules 9. If you selected any of the check boxes except for Module indicates last module, then fill out these form fields: Start Position Length Base Justification Padding 10. Click Finish.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Module Support Basic Page

621

Module Support Basic Page

After you "Open the Module Support Basic Page" (14622), you can: "Update the Module Support Basic Page" (14623) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571)
Figure 117 Module Support Basic Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Base Description Field indicates modules are attached Length (for Module Support) Justification Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Module Indicator Value Modules Supported? Name Padding Start Position

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

622

14 File Format Application Pages

Open the Module Support Basic Page

To open the Module Support Basic page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Module Supports link in the File Format Definitions section. the Module Support page opens. Click the Name of the module support in the table. The Module Support page opens. Click the Basic link. The Module Support Basic page opens.

4.

5.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Update the Module Support Basic Page

623

Update the Module Support Basic Page

To update the Module Support Basic page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Module Support Basic Page" (14 622). Update these form fields: Description Field indicates modules are attached Modules Supported? 3. To update the settings for the Field indications modules are attached check box, update these form fields: Base Start Position Justification Length Padding 4. To edit the Module Indicator Value, select the value from the drop-down menu. Click Edit. The Module Action box opens. Update this form field: Module Indicator Action 7. If you selected One or More Special Modules Attached or One or More Special Modules Attached Followed By Normal Module Processing, the Special Module table appears. To update a special module, click the special module in the table, then update these form fields: Order (for Special Modules) Special Module Code 9. To create a new special module, click the New icon, then fill out these form fields: Order (for Special Modules) Special Module Code 10. Click Update. The special module is added or updated.

2.

5. 6.

8.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

624

14 File Format Application Pages

11. 12.

Click Update. The Module Action box closes Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Module Support Module Identification Page

625

Module Support Module Identification Page

After you "Open the Module Support Module Identification Page" (14626), you can: "Update the Module Support Module Identification Page" (14627) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571)
Figure 118 Module Support Module Identification Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Base Justification Length (for Module Support) Module Identified by Padding Single Module Used Start Position

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

626

14 File Format Application Pages

Open the Module Support Module Identification Page

To open the Module Support Module Identification page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens. Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set

2.

drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Module Supports link in the File Format Definitions section. the Module Support page opens. Click the Name of the module support in the table. The Module Support page opens. Click Module Identification. The Module Identification page opens.

4.

5.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Update the Module Support Module Identification Page

627

Update the Module Support Module Identification Page

To update the Module Support Module Identification page: 1. Follow the instructions to the "Open the Module Support Module Identification Page" (14626). Update these form fields: Single Module Used Module Identified by 3. If you selected the Module Identified by check box, update these form fields: Base Start Position Justification Length Padding 4. Click Submit.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Module Support End of Module Page

629

Module Support End of Module Page

After you "Open the Module Support End of Module Page" (14631), you can: "Update the Module Support End of Module Page" (14632) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571)
Figure 119 Module Support End of Module Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

630

14 File Format Application Pages

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Base Field in the 1st module that indicates the length of modules Field in the 1st module that indicates # of attached modules Field in the modules that indicates last module Field in the structure that indicates # of attached modules Field in the structure that indicates the length of modules Fixed number of modules Fixed total module length Justification Length (for Module Support) Module indicates last module Padding Start Position

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open the Module Support End of Module Page

631

Open the Module Support End of Module Page

To open the Module Support End of Module page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Module Supports link in the File Format Definitions section. The Module Support page opens. Click the Name of the module support in the table. The Module Support page opens. Click the End of Module link. The Module Support End of Module page opens.

4.

5.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

632

14 File Format Application Pages

Update the Module Support End of Module Page

To update the Module Support End of Module page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Module Support End of Module Page" (14631). Update these form fields: Field in the modules that indicates last module Module indicates last module Fixed number of modules Fixed total module length Field in the structure that indicates # of attached modules Field in the structure that indicates the length of modules Field in the 1st module that indicates # of attached modules Field in the 1st module that indicates the length of modules 3. If you select any of the check boxes except for Module indicates last module, then fill out these form fields: Start Position Length Base Justification Padding 4. Click Submit.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Block Header and Trailer Structures Page

633

Block Header and Trailer Structures Page

After you "Open the Block Header and Trailer Structures Page" (14634), you can: "Go to a New Block Header/Trailer Structure Page" (14635) "Go to an Existing Block Header/Trailer Structure Page" (14636) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571)
Figure 120 Block Header/Trailer Structures Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Name

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

634

14 File Format Application Pages

Open the Block Header and Trailer Structures Page

To open the Block Header/Trailer Structures page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Block Header Trailers link in the File Format Definitions section. The Block Header/Trailer Structures page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to a New Block Header/Trailer Structure Page

635

Go to a New Block Header/Trailer Structure Page

To go to a new Block Header/Trailer Structure page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Block Header and Trailer Structures Page" (14634). Click the New icon.

2.

A new Block Header/Trailer Structure page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

636

14 File Format Application Pages

Go to an Existing Block Header/Trailer Structure Page

To go to an existing Block Header/Trailer Structure page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Block Header and Trailer Structures Page" (14634). Click the Name of the block header and trailer in the table. The Block Header/Trailer Structure page opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Block Header/Trailer Structure Page

637

Block Header/Trailer Structure Page

The Block Header/Trailer Structure page lets you define all of the block headers and trailers to be used in the mediation feature. After you "Open a New Block Header/Trailer Structure Page" (14641), you can: "Create a New Block Header/Trailer" (14643) "Add a Field" (14651) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571) After you "Open an Existing Block Header/Trailer Structure Page" (14642), you can: "Update a Block Header/Trailer Structure Page" (14647) "Add a Field" (14651) "Update a Field" (14652) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571)

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

638

14 File Format Application Pages

Figure 121 Block Header/Trailer Structure Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Block Header/Trailer Structure Page

639

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Automatically Adjust Offset Field? Base Block Headers and/or Trailers built from this structure will be included in the calculation of: Block length (sum of record lengths) Block record counts (total number of records) Description Field Field Format Field indicates the length of the highest tier block Field indicates fixed module supported in the block Field indicates the length of records (if exists) Field indicates the number of records (if exists) Field indicating the last block in a containing block in the file File length (sum of record lengths) File Trailer Name Fill Character Fixed Block Length Fixed number of subblocks (if available) Fixed subblock length (if available) Justification Key Field Length Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Module Support Name Number of records in this block (if fixed) Offset Padding Record Length Field Start Position Structure contains information about blocks? Structure contains information about module support? Structure contains information about records in the block? Structure contains information about subblocks? Structure Length (for File and Block Header/Trailers) Work With Archive Files

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

640

14 File Format Application Pages

Not all fields on this page require data. Fields are there to accommodate a variety of structure types and to increase the efficiency and flexibility of record parsing. Populate only those fields that are for the structure you are defining. If there is not enough information present to parse the file format, it is indicated by the audit results. These are guidelines for possible file format scenarios: If the file format consists of blocks of data, but no block header record exists, then create a block header with a structure length of zero and a block length specifying the number of bytes contained in the data block The Structure Length and Fixed Block Length field values must be coordinated with data entered via the questions on the Block Header and Trailer Structures page.
Caution Make sure these values are correct. The GUI does not check to see if the values you enter are correct.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open a New Block Header/Trailer Structure Page

641

Open a New Block Header/Trailer Structure Page

To open a new Block Header/Trailer Structure page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Block Header Trailers link in the File Format Definitions section. The Block Header and Trailer page opens. Click a New icon.

4.

A new Block Header/Trailer Structure page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

642

14 File Format Application Pages

Open an Existing Block Header/Trailer Structure Page

To open an existing Block Header/Trailer Structure page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Block Header Trailers link in the File Format Definitions section. The Block Header and Trailer page opens. Click the Name of the block header and trailer in the table. The Block Header/Trailer Structure page opens.

4.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a New Block Header/Trailer

643

Create a New Block Header/Trailer

To create a new block header/trailer: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Block Header/Trailer Structure Page" (14641). Fill out these form fields: Name Description Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Structure Length (for File and Block Header/Trailers) Fixed Block Length Fill Character 3. 4. 5. To add a field, follow the instructions to "Add a Field" (14651). Click the arrow beside the Key Field information. Fill out these form fields: Field Base Start Position Justification Length Padding 6. 7. Click the arrow beside the Record Length Field information. Fill out these form fields: Field Base Start Position Justification Length Padding 8. Fill out these form fields in the Block Headers and/or Trailers built from this structure will be included in the calculation of: area: File length (sum of record lengths) File Trailer Name Block length (sum of record lengths) Block record counts (total number of records)

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

644

14 File Format Application Pages

9.

To view the information about the blocks, select the Structure contains information about blocks? check box. To view the information about the length of the block, click the arrow beside the heading: Field Base Start Position Justification Length Padding

10.

11.

To view the information about the last block in a containing block or in the file, click the arrow beside the Field indicating the last block in a containing block in the file. Field Base Start Position Justification Length Padding

12.

To view the information about the subblocks, select the Structure contains information about subblocks? check box. Fill out these form fields: Fixed subblock length (if available) Fixed number of subblocks (if available)

13.

14.

To view the information about the Field indicating the length of subblocks (if available), click the arrow beside the Field indicating the length of subblocks (if available). Field Base Start Position Justification Length Padding

15.

To view the information about the Field indicating the number of subblocks (if available), click the arrow beside the Field indicating the number of subblocks (if available). Fill out these form fields:

16.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a New Block Header/Trailer

645

Field Base Start Position Justification Length Padding 17. To view the information about the module support, select the Structure contains information about module support? check box. Fill out this form field: Module Support 19. To view the information about the records in the file, select the Structure contains information about records in the block? check box. Fill out this form field: Number of records in this block (if fixed) 21. To view the information about Field indicates the number of records (if exists), select the Field indicates the number of records (if exists) check box. Fill out these form fields: Field Base Start Position Justification Length Padding 23. To view the information about Field indicates the length of records (if exists), select the Field indicates the length of records (if exists) check box. Fill out these form fields: Field Base Start Position Justification Length Padding

18.

20.

22.

24.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

646

14 File Format Application Pages

25.

To view the information about Field indicates the length of the highest tier block, select the Field indicates the length of the highest tier block check box. Fill out these form fields: Field Base Start Position Justification Length Padding

26.

27.

To view the information about Field indicates fixed module supported in the block, select the Field indicates fixed module supported in the block check box. Fill out these form fields: Field Base Start Position Justification Length Padding

28.

29.

Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Update a Block Header/Trailer Structure Page

647

Update a Block Header/Trailer Structure Page

To update a Block Header/Trailer Structure page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Block Header/Trailer Structure Page" (14641). Update these form fields: Name Description Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Structure Length (for File and Block Header/Trailers) Fixed Block Length Fill Character 3. 4. 5. 6. To add a field, follow the instructions to "Add a Field" (14651). To update a field, follow the instructions to "Update a Field" (14652). Click the arrow beside the Key Field information. Update these form fields: Field Base Start Position Justification Length Padding 7. 8. Click the arrow beside the Record Length Field information. Update these form fields: Field Base Start Position Justification Length Padding 9. Update these form fields in the Block Headers and/or Trailers built from this structure will be included in calculations of: File length (sum of record lengths) File Trailer Name

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

648

14 File Format Application Pages

Block length (sum of record lengths) Block record counts (total number of records) 10. To view the information about the blocks, select the Structure contains information about blocks? check box. To view the information about the length of the block, click the arrow beside the heading: Field Base Start Position Justification Length Padding 12. To view the information about the last block in a containing block or in the file, click the arrow beside the Field indicating the last block in a containing block in the file. Field Base Start Position Justification Length Padding 13. To view the information about the subblocks, select the Structure contains information about subblocks? check box. Update these form fields: Fixed subblock length (if available) Fixed number of subblocks (if available) 15. To view the information about the Field indicating the length of subblocks (if available), click the arrow beside the Field indicating the length of subblocks (if available). Field Base Start Position Justification Length Padding

11.

14.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Update a Block Header/Trailer Structure Page

649

16.

To view the information about the Field indicating the number of subblocks (if available), click the arrow beside the Field indicating the number of subblocks (if available). Update these form fields: Field Base Start Position Justification Length Padding

17.

18.

To view the information about the module support, select the Structure contains information about module support? check box. Update this form field: Module Support

19.

20.

To view the information about the records in the file, select the Structure contains information about records in the block? check box. Update this form field: Number of records in this block (if fixed)

21.

22.

To view the information about Field indicates the number of records (if exists), select the Field indicates the number of records (if exists) check box. Update these form fields: Field Base Start Position Justification Length Padding

23.

24.

To view the information about Field indicates the length of records (if exists), select the Field indicates the length of records (if exists) check box. Update these form fields: Field Base Start Position Justification

25.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

650

14 File Format Application Pages

Length Padding 26. To view the information about Field indicates the length of the highest tier block, select the Field indicates the length of the highest tier block check box. Update these form fields: Field Base Start Position Justification Length Padding 28. To view the information about Field indicates fixed module supported in the block, select the Field indicates fixed module supported in the block check box. Update these form fields: Field Base Start Position Justification Length Padding 30. Click Submit.

27.

29.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Add a Field

651

Add a Field
To add a field: 1. Click the New icon.

The new Fields form appears. 2. Fill out these form fields: Name Offset Automatically Adjust Offset Field? 3. Click Update.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

652

14 File Format Application Pages

Update a Field
To update a field: 1. 2. Click the field in the table. The Fields form appears. Update these form fields: Name Offset Automatically Adjust Offset Field? 3. Click Update.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

File Header/Trailer Structures Page

653

File Header/Trailer Structures Page

After you "Open a File Header/Trailer Structures Page" (14654), you can: "Go to a New File Header/Trailer Structure Page" (14655) "Go to an Existing File Header/Trailer Structure Page" (14656) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571)
Figure 122 File Header/Trailer Structures Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Name

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

654

14 File Format Application Pages

Open a File Header/Trailer Structures Page

To open a File Header/Trailer Structures page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the File Header Trailers link. The File Header/Trailer Structures page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to a New File Header/Trailer Structure Page

655

Go to a New File Header/Trailer Structure Page

To go to a new File Header/Trailer Structure page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open a File Header/Trailer Structures Page" (14654). Click the New icon.

2.

A new File Header/Trailer Structure page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

656

14 File Format Application Pages

Go to an Existing File Header/Trailer Structure Page

To go to an existing File Header/Trailer Structure page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open a File Header/Trailer Structures Page" (14654). Click the Name of the file header and trailer page in the table. A new File Header/Trailer Structure page opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

File Header/Trailer Structure Page

657

File Header/Trailer Structure Page

After you "Open a New File Header/Trailer Structure Page" (14659), you can: "Create a File Header/Trailer" (14661) "Add a Field" (14667) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571) After you "Open an Existing File Header/Trailer Structure Page" (14660), you can: "Update a File Header/Trailer" (14664) "Add a Field" (14667) "Update a Field" (14668) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571)
Figure 123 File Header/Trailer Structure Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

658

14 File Format Application Pages

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Base Description Field Field Format File Headers and/or Trailers built from this structure will be included in the calculation of: File length (sum of record lengths) Justification Key Field Length Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Name Offset Padding Record counts (total number of records)? Record Length Field Start Position Structure contains information about the file? Structure contains information about subblocks? Structure contains information about module support? Structure contains information about records in the block? Structure Length (for File and Block Header/Trailers)

Not all form fields on this page require data. Fields are there to accommodate a variety of structure types and to increase the efficiency and flexibility of record parsing. Only fill out form fields that pertain to the structure you are defining.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open a New File Header/Trailer Structure Page

659

Open a New File Header/Trailer Structure Page

To open a new File Header/Trailer Structure page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the File Header Trailers link in the File Format Definitions section. The File Header and Trailers page opens. Click a New icon.

4.

A new File Header/Trailer Structure page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

660

14 File Format Application Pages

Open an Existing File Header/Trailer Structure Page

To open an existing File Header/Trailer Structure page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the File Header Trailers link in the File Format Definitions section. The File Header and Trailers page opens. Click the Name of the file header and trailer in the table. The File Header/Trailer Structure page opens.

4.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a File Header/Trailer

661

Create a File Header/Trailer

To create a file header/trailer: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open a New File Header/Trailer Structure Page" (14659). Fill out these form fields at the top of the page: Name Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Description Structure Length (for File and Block Header/Trailers) 3. 4. 5. To add a field, follow the instructions "Add a Field" (14667). Click the arrow beside the Key Field information. Fill out these form fields: Field Base Start Position Justification Length Padding 6. 7. Click the arrow beside the Record Length Field information. Fill out these form fields: Field Base Start Position Justification Length Padding 8. Fill out these form fields in the File Headers and/or Trailers built from this structure will be included in the calculation of: area: File length (sum of record lengths) Record counts (total number of records)? 9. To view the information about Structure contains information about the file?, select the Structure contains information about the file? check box.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

662

14 File Format Application Pages

10.

To view the information about the length of the file, click the arrow beside the Field indicating the length of subblocks (if available). Field Base Start Position Justification Length Padding

11.

To view the information about the number of records in a file, click the arrow beside the Field indicates the number of records (if exists). Field Base Start Position Justification Length Padding

12.

To view the information about the subblocks, select the Structure contains information about subblocks? check box. To view the information about the Field indicates the length of the highest tier block, click the arrow beside the Field indicates the length of the highest tier block. Field Base Start Position Justification Length Padding

13.

14.

To view the information about the Field indicates the number of highest tier blocks in the file, click the arrow beside the Field indicates the number of highest tier blocks in the file. Fill out these form fields: Field Base Start Position Justification Length Padding

15.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a File Header/Trailer

663

16.

To view the information about the module support, select the Structure contains information about module support? check box. Fill out this form field: Module Support

17.

18.

To view the information about the records in the file, select the Structure contains information about records in the block? check box. To view the information about Field indicates the length of records (if exists), select the arrow beside the Field indicates the length of records (if exists) check box. Fill out these form fields: Field Base Start Position Justification Length Padding

19.

20.

21.

Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

664

14 File Format Application Pages

Update a File Header/Trailer

To update a file header/trailer: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open a New File Header/Trailer Structure Page" (14659). Fill out these form fields at the top of the page: Description Structure Length (for File and Block Header/Trailers) 3. 4. 5. 6. To add a field, follow the instructions "Add a Field" (14667). To add a field, follow the instructions "Update a Field" (14668). Click the arrow beside the Key Field information. Fill out these form fields: Field Base Start Position Justification Length Padding 7. 8. Click the arrow beside the Record Length Field information. Fill out these form fields: Field Base Start Position Justification Length Padding 9. Fill out these form fields in the File Headers and/or Trailers built from this structure will be included in the calculation of: area: File length (sum of record lengths) Record counts (total number of records)? 10. To view the information about Structure contains information about the file?, select the Structure contains information about the file? check box.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Update a File Header/Trailer

665

11.

To view the information about the length of the file, click the arrow beside the Field indicating the length of subblocks (if available). Field Base Start Position Justification Length Padding

12.

To view the information about the number of records in a file, click the arrow beside the Field indicates the number of records (if exists). Field Base Start Position Justification Length Padding

13.

To view the information about the subblocks, select the Structure contains information about subblocks? check box. To view the information about the Field indicates the length of the highest tier block, click the arrow beside the Field indicates the length of the highest tier block. Field Base Start Position Justification Length Padding

14.

15.

To view the information about the Field indicates the number of highest tier blocks in the file, click the arrow beside the Field indicates the number of highest tier blocks in the file. Fill out these form fields: Field Base Start Position Justification Length Padding

16.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

666

14 File Format Application Pages

17.

To view the information about the module support, select the Structure contains information about module support? check box. Fill out this form field: Module Support

18.

19.

To view the information about the records in the file, select the Structure contains information about records in the block? check box. To view the information about Field indicates the length of records (if exists), select the Field indicates the length of records (if exists) check box. Fill out these form fields: Field Base Start Position Justification Length Padding

20.

21.

22.

Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Add a Field

667

Add a Field
To add a field: 1. Click the New icon.

The new Fields form appears. 2. Fill out these form fields: Name Offset Automatically Adjust Offset Field? 3. Click Update.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

668

14 File Format Application Pages

Update a Field
To update a field: 1. 2. Click the field in the table. The Fields form appears. Update these form fields: Name Offset Automatically Adjust Offset Field? 3. Click Update.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

File Formats Page

669

File Formats Page

After you "Open the File Formats Page" (14670), you can: "Go to the Create a New File Format Wizard" (14671) "Go to an Existing File Format Page" (14672) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571)
Figure 124 File Formats Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Name Type

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

670

14 File Format Application Pages

Open the File Formats Page

To open the File Formats page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the File Formats link in the File Format Definitions section. The File Formats page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to the Create a New File Format Wizard

671

Go to the Create a New File Format Wizard

To go to the Create a New File Format wizard: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the File Formats Page" (14670). Click the New icon.

The Create a New File Format wizard opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

672

14 File Format Application Pages

Go to an Existing File Format Page

To go to an existing File Format page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the File Formats Page" (14670). Click the Name of the file format in the table. The File Format page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

File Format General Page

673

File Format General Page

After you "Open the File Format Format General Page" (14674), you can: "Update the File Format Format General Page" (14675) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571)
Figure 125 File Format General Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description Format Name Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Module Support Name

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

674

14 File Format Application Pages

Open the File Format Format General Page

To open the File Format Format General page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the File Formats link in the File Format Definitions section. the File Formats page opens. Click the Name of file format in the table. The File Format Format General page opens.

4.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Update the File Format Format General Page

675

Update the File Format Format General Page

To update the File Format Format General page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the File Format Format General Page" (14674). Update these form fields: Module Support Name Description 3. Click Submit.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

File Format Format Type Page

677

File Format Format Type Page

After you "Open the File Format Format Type Page" (14678), you can: "Update the File Format Format Type Page" (14679) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571)
Figure 126 File Format Format Type Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Block Header Name Block Information Block Trailer Name File Header Name File information File Trailer Name Format Name Format Type Level Mediation Feature Set (MFS)

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

678

14 File Format Application Pages

Open the File Format Format Type Page

To open the File Format Format Type page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the File Formats link in the File Format Definitions section. The File Formats page opens. Click the Name of the file format in the table. The File Format Format General page opens. Select Format Type from the Go drop-down menu. Click Go. The File Format Format Type page opens.

4.

5. 6.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Update the File Format Format Type Page

679

Update the File Format Format Type Page

To update the File Format Format Type page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the File Format Format Type Page" (14678). Update this form field: Format Type 3. To update the File Information or Block Information, click the arrow beside File Information or Block Information. To add a Header/Trailer, then follow the instructions to "Add a Header/Trailer" (14680). To update a Header/Trailer, then follow the instructions to "Update a Header/Trailer" (14681). Click Submit.

2.

4.

5.

6.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

680

14 File Format Application Pages

Add a Header/Trailer
To add a header/trailer: 1. Click a New icon.

The New Header/Trailer form appears. 2. If a File Header/Trailer, fill out these form fields: File Header Name File Trailer Name 3. If a Block Header/Trailer, fill out these form fields: Block Header Name Block Trailer Name Level 4. Click Update.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Update a Header/Trailer

681

Update a Header/Trailer
To update a header/trailer: 1. 2. Click a Header/Trailer in the table. The Header/Trailer form appears. If a File Header/Trailer, update these form fields: File Header Name File Trailer Name 3. If a Block Header/Trailer, update these form fields: Block Header Name Block Trailer Name 4. Click Update.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

File Format File Size Page

683

File Format File Size Page

After you "Open the File Format File Size Page" (14684), you can: "Update the File Format File Size Page" (14685) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571)
Figure 127 File Format Format File Size Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Format Name Fixed File Length Fixed Record Count Last Record Key Field Mediation Feature Set (MFS)

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

684

14 File Format Application Pages

Open the File Format File Size Page

To open the File Format File Size page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the File Formats link in the File Format Definitions section. The File Formats page opens. Click the Name of the file format in the table. The File Format Format General page opens. Select Format File Size from the Go drop-down menu. Click Go. The File Format File Size page opens.

4.

5. 6.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Update the File Format File Size Page

685

Update the File Format File Size Page

To update the File Format File Size page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the File Format File Size Page" (14 684). Update these form fields: Fixed File Length Fixed Record Count Last Record Key Field 3. To update the Last Record Key Field information, click the arrow beside Last Record Key Field, then update these form fields: Key Value (for File Format File Size Page) Start Position Length 4. Click Submit.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

File Format Record Structure Page

687

File Format Record Structure Page

After you "Open the File Format Record Structure Page" (14688), you can: "Update the File Format Record Structure Page" (14689) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571)
Figure 128 File Format Record Structure Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Base Format Name If there is a value for Key field that indicates the last record in a Tier 1 Block, enter that value Length Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Maximum Record Size Padding Single Structure Used Structure Identified By Start Position

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

688

14 File Format Application Pages

Open the File Format Record Structure Page

To open the File Format Record Structure page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the File Formats link in the File Format Definitions section. The File Formats page opens. Click the Name of the file format in the table. The File Format Format General page opens. Select Format Record Structure from the Go drop-down menu. Click Go. The File Format Format Record Structure page opens.

4.

5. 6.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Update the File Format Record Structure Page

689

Update the File Format Record Structure Page

To update the File Format Record Structure page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the File Format Record Structure Page" (14688). Update these form fields: Maximum Record Size Single Structure Used Structure Identified By File Key End Value If there is a value for Key field that indicates the last record in a Tier 1 Block, enter that value Fixed record length 3. To update the parsing information for Structure Identified By, click the arrow beside Structure Identified By, then update these form fields: Start Position Length 4. To update the parsing information for Record Length Field, click the arrow beside Record Length Field, then update these form fields: Start Position Length Justification Base Padding 5. Click Submit.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a New File Format Wizard

691

Create a New File Format Wizard

After you "Open the Create a New File Format Wizard" (14692), you can "Create a New File Format" (14693) by filling out the form fields on these four pages: File Format General Page File Format Format Type Page File Format Record Structure Page File Format File Size Page

In the wizard, you define the specific parameters for a file format, which helps GRID process it. After you create a file format, it can be associated with any or all sources that generate usage data files with that file format. Not all the form fields in the File Format pages are required. You only need to fill out the necessary fields for the file format that you are creating. The other form fields are there to accommodate a variety of file formats and to increase the flexibility and efficiency of GRID. After you have completed the File Formats page, use the File Format and Structure Associations page to assign the associated record structures to the file format.
Figure 129 The Create a New File Format Wizard Screen One

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

692

14 File Format Application Pages

Open the Create a New File Format Wizard

To open the Create a New File Format wizard: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the File Formats link in the File Format Definitions section. The File Formats page opens. Click the New icon.

4.

The Create a New File Format wizard opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a New File Format

693

Create a New File Format

To create a new file format: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Create a New File Format Wizard" (14692). Fill out these form fields: Format Name Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Module Support Name Description 3. 4. Click Next. The next page opens. Fill out this field: Format Type 5. If you select this format type: File Header/Trailer - No Blocks, the File Information area appears Block Header/Trailer - No File Header/Trailers, the Block Information page appears File Header/Trailer & Block Header/Trailer, the File Information and Block Information areas appear 6. To fill out the File Information or Block information area, click the appropriate arrow. To add a file or block header or trailer, select the appropriate information from the drop-down menus in the tables. Click Next. The next page opens. Fill out these form fields: Maximum Record Size Single Structure Used Structure Identified By File Key End Value Fixed record length Record Length Field 10. To fill out additional information for the Structure Identified By dropdown menu, click the arrow, then fill out these form fields: Start Position Length

2.

7.

8. 9.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

694

14 File Format Application Pages

11.

To fill out additional information for the Record Length Field drop-down menu, click the arrow, then fill out these form fields: Start Position Length Justification Base Padding

12. 13.

Click Next. The next page opens. Fill out these form fields: Fixed File Length Fixed Record Count Last Record Key Field

14.

To fill out additional information for the Last Record Key Field dropdown menu, click the arrow, then fill out these form fields: Key Value (for File Format File Size Page) Start Position Length

15.

Click Finish.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

File Format & Structures Association Page

695

File Format & Structures Association Page

The File Format & Structures Association page lets you associate structures with a file format.
Note This page must be completed before a successful audit can be performed.

After you "Open the File Format & Structure Associations Page" (14696), you can: "Add a Structure" (14697) "Remove a Structure" (14698) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571)
Figure 130 File Format & Structures Association Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description File Format Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Name

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

696

14 File Format Application Pages

Open the File Format & Structure Associations Page

1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the File Format & Structure Associations link in the File Format Definitions column. The File Format & Structures Associations page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Add a Structure

697

Add a Structure
1. Follow the instructions to "Open the File Format & Structure Associations Page" (14696). Fill out this form fields at the top of the page: File Format 3. 4. Click the icon beside the structure in the Available Structures table. Click Submit.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

698

14 File Format Application Pages

Remove a Structure
1. Follow the instructions to "Open the File Format & Structure Associations Page" (14696). Fill out this form fields at the top of the page: File Format 3. 4. Click the icon beside the structure in the Associated Structures table. Click Submit.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Audit Page (for Mediation Feature Sets)

699

Audit Page (for Mediation Feature Sets)

After you "Open the Audit Page" (14701), you can: "Perform an Audit" (14702) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571) Using this page, you can audit a GRID file format. An audit must be run each time a file format is created or modified. After you request an audit, the system verifies that the file format contains everything that is required to process a file using the file format. If an audit of the file format passes, the system automatically audits all listed Filter Applications, Format Conversion IDs, Correlation Applications, Search Tag Names, Validation Applications, and Package Manager Applications that use the file format. The Audit page lets you elect to audit only the file format. You may want to use this option if records are added to the file format and you want to verify the changes, but you have not yet made the related changes to mediation feature IDs using the file format.
Figure 131 Audit Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

700

14 File Format Application Pages

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Audit Button Audited File Format Only? File Format Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Results

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open the Audit Page

701

Open the Audit Page

To open the Audit page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Audit link in the File Format Definitions section. The Audit page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

702

14 File Format Application Pages

Perform an Audit
To perform an audit: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Audit Page" (14701). Fill out these form fields: Mediation Feature Set (MFS) File Format Audited File Format Only? 3. Click Audit. The results of the audit appear in the Results text box and the date on the Audit Button is updated.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

15 About Search/Filter Application Definitions

This chapter describes the search and filter applications, including information on: Overview Working with Field Filters Working with Record Filters Using the Search/Filter Applications Working with the Search Application Defining the Search Application Using the Pass Action Feature Auditing Search Applications Naming of Search Files Working with the Filter Application Defining the Filter Application Using the Filter Test Tool Filtering File Headers and Block Headers Auditing Filter Applications

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

704

15 - About Search/Filter Application Definitions

Overview
After you select a mediation feature set, three sets of icons appear, including the Search/Filter Application Definitions icons. This group of links, called the Search/Filter Definitions menu, lets you access the pages needed to create all the parts of a filter.
Figure 132 Search/Filter Applications Definitions Menu

When you click each of these links, the corresponding Search/Filter Application Definitions page opens. These pages are listed, from top to bottom, in the order that you need to access the pages. You do not need to use all the pages; use only the pages that have the filter features that you want.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Overview

705

Because the filter and search use the same engine and processes, you only have to define the criteria for a format once. If you define the criteria for a filter, then you can use the same criteria to define a search without reentering it.
Table 6 Search/Filter Application Definitions Icons and Corresponding Pages

Click this link

To Go to the Value Lists Page (Search/Filter Application Definitions) to create the list IDs

Go to the Field Filters Page, which lets you create a one-to-one relationship between a field and a specific filter comparison operator Go to the Record Filters Page, which lets you create the system logic for a filter

Go to the Search/Filter Applications Page, which lets you combine all the filter requirements together and create a unique name for the filter or search

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

706

15 - About Search/Filter Application Definitions

Working with Field Filters

Using Field Filters, you can create a one-to-one relationship between a field and a field comparison operator. You can create a unlimited number of field filters. The comparison fields that are available depend on the operator you select from the Comparison Operator drop-down menu.
Figure 133 Comparison Operator Drop-down Menu

The field comparison operator values must match the GRID field you selected.
Table 7 Field Filter Comparison Operators

Use this operator Equals Not Equals Greater Than Greater Than or Equals Less Than Less Than or Equals Match In Range In List Not Match Not In List Field Exists Field Does Not Exist Not In Range

When you want the field value to Be exactly the same as the comparison operator Value field Not be the same as the comparison operator Value field Be larger than the comparison operator Value field Be greater than or equal to the comparison operator Value field Be less than the comparison operator Value field Be less than or equal to the comparison operator Value field Exactly match the comparison operator Value field Be greater than or equal to the Lower Range value and less than or equal to the Upper Range value Exactly match one of the values contained in the List ID (Field Filter Page) Not match the comparison operator Value field Not match one of the values contained in the List ID (Field Filter Page) Be contained in the record being filtered Not be contained in the record being filtered Not be greater than or equal to the Lower Range value and less than or equal to the Upper Range value

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with Field Filters

707

Use this operator In External List Not In External List

When you want the field value to Exactly match one of the values contained in the External DB Name Not match one of the values contained in the External DB Name

Wildcard
Use wildcard characters to represent one or more characters with the Match and Not Match operators. You can use any number of wildcard characters in the comparison field value. Use the question mark (?) as the wildcard character for all data types; however, you can also use the asterisk (*) for EBCDIC and ASCII.

Example
The comparison value of 3?7 matches any string that is three characters long, begins with a 3, and ends with a 7 The comparison value of?2???c matches any string that is 6 characters long, has a value of 2 in the second position, and ends with a c

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

708

15 - About Search/Filter Application Definitions

Working with Record Filters

Record Filters create the system logic for a filter. Previously defined fields are grouped in simple or complex strings following Boolean logic. When the system processes the filter, it evaluates and weighs the considerations of the filter based on the logic provided on the page. The logic can be tested before sending or receiving information by using the Filter Test Tool application.

Using Special Filters

Special filters are created in the same way as record filters are created and follow the same rules and logic; however, special filters are anchored to a structure type. This structure type can be a data record, file header, or block header. You cannot attach filters to trailers. Special filters are always processed before regular filters. To create a special filter, the Only valid for Record ID (Special Filters) check box must be selected on the Record Filter Page. After you select the check box, you can select a record ID from the drop-down menu.
Figure 134 Only Valid for Record ID Check Box

References

For information on the Filter Test Tool, see "Using the Filter Test Tool" (15719).

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Using the Search/Filter Applications

709

Using the Search/Filter Applications

Use the search application when an immediate search is necessary (usually only occasionally), such as when you need to find records containing a specific terminating number on a particular day. When you set up a search, you only need to use the search application pages to define what the search parameters are, where the search looks for information, and how often the search is performed. The filter application supports continuing transmission operations. Use it to limit the records sent to a destination, such as filtering out nonbillable calls. When you set up a filter, you use the filter application pages and you use the application associations pages. With the filter application, the filters are run on the schedules for the entities that they are associated with. Both the search and filter applications are accessed on the Search/Filter Applications Page. You can go to a new search or filter page by clicking the New icon, then selecting the corresponding radio button.
Figure 135 New Search or Filter Page Radio Buttons

You can go to an existing search or filter page by clicking the name of an existing search or filter that is listed in the table.
Figure 136 Existing Search or Filters in Search/Filter Applications Table

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

710

15 - About Search/Filter Application Definitions

Working with the Search Application

Use the search application when an immediate search is needed (usually only occasionally), which may not occur on a daily basis, such as when you need to find records containing a specific terminating number on a particular day. The search application lets you search primary and tertiary billing data files stored on the Data Mediation system for records containing values that meet your search criteria.
Figure 137 The Search Application

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with the Search Application

711

Using this feature, you can verify test calls, validate new services, and isolate errors. After you determine the field or fields that you want to examine, select what records you want to search the information that you are searching for, such as: Services Subscribers Called numbers Calling numbers Elapsed time Specified data fields

Search records are stored as tertiary billing data files. After the records are stored in the search source (automatically created after a search name is audited) they are marked as tertiary and can be: Searched by using the Data Files Page Viewed with the Data File Page Sent to a printer or saved to a UNIX file using the Print function provided by the Data File Page Transmitted to a downstream destination using the Data Transmission Schedule Page Searched again by using the Data File Searches Page or by setting up a new search on a search source type Records remain on the Data Mediation system disk until the system parameters for disk high and disk low percentages are met. These values are set on the System Parameters Page. You can also manually delete these files from the system.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

712

15 - About Search/Filter Application Definitions

Defining the Search Application

Figure 138, "Defining a Search Application" (15-712), shows how the search application is defined on the "Search Application Page" (16773). After you define the search application, you can: Run the search Schedule the search Check the status of the search Cancel the search View the output from the search Print the output from a the search
Figure 138 Defining a Search Application

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Using the Pass Action Feature

713

Using the Pass Action Feature

When you use the search application, use the Pass Action feature to select or exclude data. If the search records are to be included, the only records written to the search output files are those matching the search criteria. If the search records are to be excluded, all records except those matching the search criteria are written to the search output file.
Figure 139 Pass Action Feature Radio Button Set

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

714

15 - About Search/Filter Application Definitions

Auditing Search Applications

To perform a search audit, you do not need to go to a separate page. Instead, the audit feature is located on the Search Application Page. This feature lets you audit a search for potential errors after you create or update a search. The system prompts you to perform an audit after you submit the new information or updates. After you start an audit, the system makes sure that the search ID contains everything that is required to process the search. If the audit fails, the system lists messages that help you locate the errors and correct them.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Naming of Search Files

715

Naming of Search Files

The output file (or set of files) from a search uses a specific naming convention. The name consists of five parts separated by a period:
Figure 140 Search File Name Convention

Search Application Name The value you used to name the search File format Identifies the name of the file format. System-generated ID The formula for the system generated unique ID is DYYJJJ$$SXXXXX. These characters are defined as follows: The D is the character D The YY stands for the last two digits of the current year The JJJ stands for the Julian Day The $$ is the previously defined file name separator The S is the character S XXXXX is the number of seconds after midnight that the search started This formula generates a unique filename as long as you do not start multiple searches with the same prefix at exactly the same time. Volume number If a single file is not large enough to hold the search data found for the specified file format, additional files are created. To track the ordering of files, a volume number is assigned to every file. The first file is designated with a v1, the second with v2 (as in the preceding examples of output file names), the third is v3, and so on to vn, where n is the final file created to handle the search data for the specified file format. Specify the maximum number of records that are written to an individual search output file using Search Parameters Page.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

716

15 - About Search/Filter Application Definitions

Working with the Filter Application

The filter application supports continuing transmission operations. Use it to limit the records sent to a destination, such as filtering out nonbillable calls. A filter application lets you separate your call data based on criteria that you select. Call data can be included or excluded based on the requirements of downstream applications. When data is included, it matches the user-defined criteria, then it is written to the search output files. Using the filter application, you can: Filter any file format defined in GRID Apply a filter on the input stream or the output stream Apply different filter criteria for each downstream application, allowing each destination to receive a unique subset of the billing data stream Filter on any field within a record as long as it is defined in GRID Provide an audit, reporting on items such as: The total number of records The number of records that meet the filter criteria The number of records that are filtered out of the data stream Filter on multiple criteria Require no further interaction from the administrator after filtering is activated Pass either the records that meet the filter criteria or records that do not match the filter criteria, based on your choice When you define a filter, you set up your filter requirements and save the filter for future use. After you define a filter, you must associate it with a source or destination on the Source Application Associations Page or Destination Application Associations Page Filtering occurs after GRID parses the sources files and hands the parsed records off to the filter application. Filtering is performed on all files processed through the source application stream or destination application stream that have the specified file format. Filter criteria are compared with the contents of the data fields in the source records. Filter then selects the records based on the defined criteria. Although you can filter on input or on transmission (output), filtering on input is rarely done. When filtering on input, files are removed before they are committed to Data Mediation system primary directory. The original copy of the file is never stored in the primary directory. Filtering on transmission is the most common use of the application. Files are removed before they are transmitted to the destination and the original copy of the file, which is how it came from the source, is stored in the tertiary directory. A copy of the filtered files, which is how the files were sent to the destination, is not retained.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with the Filter Application

717

Figure 141 The Filter Application in the Input and Output Streams

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

718

15 - About Search/Filter Application Definitions

Defining the Filter Application

Figure 142, "Defining the Filter Application" (15-718), shows how the search application is defined on the "Filter Application Page" (16765).
Figure 142 Defining the Filter Application

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Using the Filter Test Tool

719

Using the Filter Test Tool

Using the filter test tool on the Data File Page, you can apply a filter definition to a selected record, then view the results. This tool helps you develop your filters for both the filter and search applications because it lets you verify your filter criteria before you transfer data to a downstream application. You can use the filter test tool on an individual record within a file; however, you cannot test the entire file at once. If multiple field filters are in the filter application, the system: Applies field filters from left to right, starting with the first field filter Skips field filters that cannot contribute to the success of the filter Stops the field filters when the success or failure of the filter is determined The filter test tool identifies: The record types DR the data record FH the file header record FT the file trailer record BH1, BH2, and BH3 block header records F1, F2, and F3 fill records The structure ID and length (in bytes) The record length in bytes The module count or the number of modules attached to the record Whether or not the filter is a record or special filter The name of the filter that is being used The text of the filter being used, which was defined on the Record Filter Definitions page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

720

15 - About Search/Filter Application Definitions

Filtering File Headers and Block Headers

Separate filter operations can be performed on file headers and block headers within an application name. Any record filter definitions defined as file header or block header are selected on the Search/Filter Applications Page.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Auditing Filter Applications

721

Auditing Filter Applications

To perform a filter audit, you do not need to go to a separate page. Instead, the audit feature is located on the Filter Application Page. This feature lets you audit a filter for potential errors after you create or update a filter. The system prompts you to perform an audit after submit the new information or updates. After you start an audit, the system makes sure that the filter application contains everything that is required to process the filter. If the audit fails, the system lists messages that help you locate the errors and correct them.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

16 Search/Filter Application Definition Application Pages

This section describes the Search/Filter Application Definition pages, including information on: Creating Search/Filter Application Definitions Updating Search/Filter Application Definitions Opening Search/Filter Application Definition pages

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Value Lists Page (Search/Filter Application Definitions)

725

Value Lists Page (Search/Filter Application Definitions)

After you "Open the Value Lists Page" (16726), you can: "Go to a New Value List Page" (16727) "Go to an Existing Value List Page" (16728) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571)
Figure 143 Value Lists Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description Mediation Feature Set (MFS) List Name

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

726

16 Search/Filter Application Pages

Open the Value Lists Page

To open the Value Lists page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click Value Lists in the Search/Filter Application Definitions section. The Value Lists page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to a New Value List Page

727

Go to a New Value List Page

To go to a new Value List page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Value Lists Page" (16726). Click the New icon.

A new Value List page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

728

16 Search/Filter Application Pages

Go to an Existing Value List Page

To go to an existing Value List page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Value Lists Page" (16726). Click the List Name in the table. The Value List page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Value List Page (Search/Filter Application Definitions)

729

Value List Page (Search/Filter Application Definitions)

After you "Open a New Value List Page" (16731), you can: "Create a Value List" (16733) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571) After you "Open an Existing Value List Page" (16732), you can: "Update a Value List" (16734) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571) This list of values can be used in operators such as the In List and Not In List comparison operations.
Figure 144 Value List Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

730

16 Search/Filter Application Pages

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description Mediation Feature Set (MFS) List Name Value

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open a New Value List Page

731

Open a New Value List Page

To open a new Value List page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click Value Lists in the Search/Filter Application Definitions section. The Value Lists page opens. Click the New icon.

4.

A new Value List page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

732

16 Search/Filter Application Pages

Open an Existing Value List Page

To open an existing Value List page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click Value Lists in the Search/Filter Application Definitions section. The Value Lists page opens. Click a List Name in the table. The Value List page opens.

4.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a Value List

733

Create a Value List

To create a value list: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Value List Page" (16731). Fill out these form fields: List Name Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Description 3. 4. To add a value, follow the instructions to "Add a Value" (16735). Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

734

16 Search/Filter Application Pages

Update a Value List

To update a value list: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Value List Page" (16732). Update this form field: Description 3. 4. 5. To add a value, follow the instructions to "Add a Value" (16735). To update a value, follow the instructions to "Update a Value" (16736). Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Add a Value

735

Add a Value
To add a value: 1. Click the New icon.

The Value form appears. 2. Fill out this form field: Value 3. Click Update.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

736

16 Search/Filter Application Pages

Update a Value
To update a value: 1. 2. Click the icon beside the value in the table. The Value form appears. Update this form field: Value 3. Click Update.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Field Filters Page

737

Field Filters Page

After you "Open the Field Filters Page" (16738), you can: "Go to a New Field Filter Page" (16739) "Go to an Existing Field Filter Page" (16740) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571)
Figure 145 Field Filters Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description Field Filter Use Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Name Record Type

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

738

16 Search/Filter Application Pages

Open the Field Filters Page

To open the Field Filters page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Field Filters link in the Search/Filter Application Definitions section. The Field Filters page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to a New Field Filter Page

739

Go to a New Field Filter Page

To go to a new Field Filter page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Field Filters Page" (16738). Click the New icon.

A new Field Filter page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

740

16 Search/Filter Application Pages

Go to an Existing Field Filter Page

To go to an existing Field Filter page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Field Filters Page" (16738). Click the Name of the field filter in the table. The Field Filter page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Field Filter Page

741

Field Filter Page

Using this page, you can define a filter expression on a structure or module field. The filter expression can then be used to build a data record or special filter. After you "Open a New Field Filter Page" (16743), you can: "Create a Field Filter" (16745) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571) After you "Open an Existing Field Filter Page" (16744), you can: "Update a Field Filter" (16746) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571) You must define items for the Value List Page (Search/Filter Application Definitions) if you plan to use an In List or Not In List comparison operator.
Figure 146 Field Filter Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

742

16 Search/Filter Application Pages

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Comparison Operator Description External DB Name Field Field Filter Name Field Name (Field Filter Page) Filter Use List ID (Field Filter Page) Lower Range Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Module Name (Field Filter page) Record Type Upper Range Value

References

For more information on field filters, see "Working with Field Filters" (15706)

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open a New Field Filter Page

743

Open a New Field Filter Page

To open a new Field Filter page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Field Filters link in the Search/Filter Application Definitions section. Click the New icon.

4.

A new Field Filter page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

744

16 Search/Filter Application Pages

Open an Existing Field Filter Page

To open an existing Field Filter page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Field Filters link in the Search/Filter Application Definitions section. Click the Name of the field filter in the table. The Field Filter page opens.

4.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a Field Filter

745

Create a Field Filter

To create a field filter: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Field Filter Page" (16743). Fill out these form fields: Field Filter Name Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Filter Use Module Name (Field Filter page) (if applicable) Record Type Field Name (Field Filter Page) Description Comparison Operator 3. After selecting a comparison operator, fill out the form fields that appear: Lower Range Upper Range List ID (Field Filter Page) External DB Name Value Field 4. Click Submit.

References

For more information on field filters, see "Working with Field Filters" (15706)

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

746

16 Search/Filter Application Pages

Update a Field Filter

To update a field filter: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Field Filter Page" (16743). Update these form fields: Filter Use Module Name (Field Filter page) (if applicable) Record Type Field Name (Expression Page) Description Comparison Operator 3. After selecting a comparison operator, update the form fields that appear: Lower Range Upper Range List ID (Field Filter Page) External DB Name Value Field 4. Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Record Filters Page

747

Record Filters Page

After you "Open the Record Filters Page" (16748), you can: "Go to a New Record Filter Page" (16749) "Go to an Existing Record Filter Page" (16750) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571)
Figure 147 Record Filters Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Name Record Type Valid for Record ID

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

748

16 Search/Filter Application Pages

Open the Record Filters Page

To open the Record Filters page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Record Filters link in the Search/Filter Application Definitions section. The Record Filters page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to a New Record Filter Page

749

Go to a New Record Filter Page

To go to a new Record Filter page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Record Filters Page" (16748). Click the New icon.

A new Record Filter page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

750

16 Search/Filter Application Pages

Go to an Existing Record Filter Page

To go to an existing Record Filter page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Record Filters Page" (16748). Click the Name of the record filter in the table. The Record Filter page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Record Filter Page

751

Record Filter Page

Using the Record Filter page, you can define a filter expression on a class of data using a combination of: Up to 32 defined structure field filters Up to 8 defined module field filters Logical AND (&&), OR (||), and NOT (!) operators Parentheses

After you "Open a New Record Filter Page" (16753), you can: "Create a Record Filter" (16755) "Create a Special Filter" (16756) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571) After you "Open an Existing Record Filter Page" (16754), you can: "Update a Record Filter" (16757) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571)
Figure 148 Record Filter Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

752

16 Search/Filter Application Pages

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description Expression (for Secondary Key Mappings) Field Filters Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Name Only valid for Record ID (Special Filters) Record Type

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open a New Record Filter Page

753

Open a New Record Filter Page

To open a new Record Filter page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Record Filters link in the Search/Filter Application Definitions section. Click the New icon.

4.

A new Record Filter page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

754

16 Search/Filter Application Pages

Open an Existing Record Filter Page

To open an existing Record Filter page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Record Filters link in the Search/Filter Application Definitions section. Click the Name of the record filter in the table. The Record Filter page opens.

4.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a Record Filter

755

Create a Record Filter

To create a record filter: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Record Filter Page" (16753). Fill out these form fields at the top of the page: Name Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Record Type Only valid for Record ID (Special Filters) Description 3. 4. Build the expressions using Field Filters and Operators. Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

756

16 Search/Filter Application Pages

Create a Special Filter

To create a special filter: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Record Filter Page" (16753). Fill out these form fields at the top of the page: Name Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Record Type Only valid for Record ID (Special Filters) (Select the check box and select an item from the drop-down menu) Description 3. 4. Build the expressions using Field Filters and Operators. Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Update a Record Filter

757

Update a Record Filter

To update a record filter: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Record Filter Page" (16754). Update these form fields at the top of the page: Record Type Only valid for Record ID (Special Filters) Description 3. 4. Update the expressions using Field Filters and Operators. Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Search/Filter Applications Page

759

Search/Filter Applications Page

After you "Open the Search/Filter Applications Page" (16760), you can: "Go to a New Search Page" (16761) "Go to a New Filter Page" (16762) "Go to an Existing Search Page" (16763) "Go to an Existing Filter Page" (16764) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571)
Figure 149 Search/Filter Applications Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description Format Name Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Name Type

References

For information on creating special filters, see "Create a Special Filter" (16756)

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

760

16 Search/Filter Application Pages

Open the Search/Filter Applications Page

To open the Search/Filter Applications page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click Search/Filter Applications (Audit). The Search/Filter Applications page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to a New Search Page

761

Go to a New Search Page

To go to a new Search page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Search/Filter Applications Page" (16 760). Click the New icon.

2.

A drop-down menu appears. 3. Select the Search Application radio button. A new Search Application page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

762

16 Search/Filter Application Pages

Go to a New Filter Page

To go to a new Filter page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Search/Filter Applications Page" (16 760). Click the New icon.

2.

A drop-down menu appears. 3. Select the Filter Application radio button. A new Filter Application page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to an Existing Search Page

763

Go to an Existing Search Page

To go to an existing Search page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Search/Filter Applications Page" (16 760). Click the Name of the search application in the table. The Search Application page opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

764

16 Search/Filter Application Pages

Go to an Existing Filter Page

To go to an existing Filter page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Search/Filter Applications Page" (16 760). Click the Name of the filter application in the table. The Filter Application page opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Filter Application Page

765

Filter Application Page

Using the Filter Application page, you can apply a set of filter specifications to all data files of a specific file format. Use the Source Application Associations page or Destination Application Associations page to associate these filters with a specific source or destination application stream. After you "Open a New Filter Application Page" (16767), you can: "Create a Filter Application" (16769) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571) After you "Open an Existing Filter Application Page" (16768), you can: "Update a Filter Application" (16770) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571)
Figure 150 Filter Application Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

766

16 Search/Filter Application Pages

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Audited? Description File Format For Block Headers (Level 1) apply For Block Headers (Level 2) apply For Block Headers (Level 3) apply For Data Records apply For File Headers apply Last Audited Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Name Pass Action Record Filter Results Rule

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open a New Filter Application Page

767

Open a New Filter Application Page

To open a new Filter Application page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Search/Filter Applications link in the Search/Filter Application Definitions section. Click the New icon.

4.

A drop-down menu appears. 5. Select the Filter Application radio button. A new Filter Application page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

768

16 Search/Filter Application Pages

Open an Existing Filter Application Page

To open an existing Filter Application page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Search/Filter Applications link in the Search/Filter Application Definitions section. Click the Name of the filter application in the table. The Filter Application page opens.

4.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a Filter Application

769

Create a Filter Application

Before you can create a filter application, you must create a field filter and a record filter. To create a filter application: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Filter Application Page" (16767). Fill out these form fields at the top of the page: Name Mediation Feature Set (MFS) File Format For Data Records apply For File Headers apply For Block Headers (Level 1) apply For Block Headers (Level 2) apply For Block Headers (Level 3) apply Description 3. To add a special rule, follow the instructions to "Add a Special Rule" (16 771). Select the Pass Action for records. Click Submit. Click OK. To audit the filter application, click Audit. The Audit results appear in the Results text box.

4. 5. 6. 7.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

770

16 Search/Filter Application Pages

Update a Filter Application

To update a filter application: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Filter Application Page" (16 768). Update these form fields at the top of the page: File Format For Data Records apply For File Headers apply For Block Headers (Level 1) apply For Block Headers (Level 2) apply For Block Headers (Level 3) apply Description 3. To add a special rule, follow the instructions to "Add a Special Rule" (16 771). To update a special rule, follow the instructions to "Update a Special Rule" (16772). Select the Pass Action for records. Click Submit. Click OK. To audit the filter application, click Audit. The Audit results appear in the Results text box.

2.

4.

5. 6. 7. 8.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Add a Special Rule

771

Add a Special Rule

To add a special rule: 1. Click the New icon.

The Special Rule form appears. 2. Fill out these form fields: Rule Record Filter 3. Click Update.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

772

16 Search/Filter Application Pages

Update a Special Rule

To update a special rule: 1. 2. Click a special rule in the table. The Special Rule form appears. Update these form fields: Rule Record Filter 3. Click Update.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Search Application Page

773

Search Application Page

After you "Open a New Search Application Page" (16775), you can: "Create a Search Application" (16777) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571) After you "Open an Existing Search Application Page" (16776), you can: "Update a Search Application" (16778) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571)
Figure 151 Search Application Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

774

16 Search/Filter Application Pages

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Audited? Data Record Filter Description File Format Last Audited Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Name Pass Action Results

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open a New Search Application Page

775

Open a New Search Application Page

To open a new Search Application page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Search/Filter Applications link in the Search/Filter Application Definitions section. Click the New icon.

4.

A drop-down menu appears. 5. Select the Search Application radio button. A new Search Application page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

776

16 Search/Filter Application Pages

Open an Existing Search Application Page

To open an existing Search Application page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Search/Filter Applications link in the Search/Filter Application Definitions section. Click the Name of the search application in the table. The Search Application page opens.

4.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a Search Application

777

Create a Search Application

To create a search application: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Search Application Page" (16 775). Fill out these form fields at the top of the page: Name Mediation Feature Set (MFS) File Format Data Record Filter Description 3. To add a special rule, follow the instructions to "Add a Special Filter" (16 779). Select the Pass Action for records. Click Submit. Click OK. To audit the search application, click Audit. The Audit results appear in the Results text box.

2.

4. 5. 6. 7.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

778

16 Search/Filter Application Pages

Update a Search Application

To update a search application: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Search Application Page" (16776). Update these form fields at the top of the page: File Format Data Record Filter Description 3. To add a special filter, follow the instructions to "Add a Special Filter" (16 779). To update a special filter, follow the instructions to "Update a Special Filter" (16780). Select a radio button for the pass action for records. Click Submit. Click OK. To audit the filter application, click Audit. The Audit results appear in the Results text box.

2.

4.

5. 6. 7. 8.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Add a Special Filter

779

Add a Special Filter

To add a special filter: 1. Click the New icon.

The Special Filter form appears. 2. Fill out this form field: Filter 3. Click Update.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

780

16 Search/Filter Application Pages

Update a Special Filter

To update a special filter: 1. 2. Click a special filter in the table. The Special Filter form appears. Update this form field: Filter 3. Click Update.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

17 About the Validation Application

This chapter describes the validation application, including information on: Overview Accessing the Validation Application Definition Pages Defining a Validation Application Working with Exception Files and Validation Working with Validation Expressions Working with Expression Record Associations Working with Application Expression Associations Working with Validation Expressions Order Working with Validation Audits Working with the Duplicate Record Checking Feature

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

782

17 - About the Validation Application

Overview
Validation is an optional mediation feature that lets you define a set of validation criteria and apply it to data that is processed in the source and destination application streams. Validation can be performed on: A single field or set of fields in a record. You can test a field that: has a file format defined in GRID is numeric, alphanumeric, or BCD contains a call code that falls within a specified range contains a valid date or time value A record Block and file headers and trailers. You can validate that the size, count, or sequence number field in a header or trailer are correct You can set up the validation process to be performed when data is collected from the source or just prior to transmission to the destination. The feature normally is not performed in both application streams. You associate the validation application with an application stream on the Source Application Associations Page or Destination Application Associations Page; however, you must create and audit a validation application before installing it in an application stream. The system supports a unique set of validation criteria for each application stream.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Overview

783

Figure 152 Validation Data Process Flow

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

784

17 - About the Validation Application

GRID parses the file being transmitted based on the defined file format, then passes the records to the Validation module. The validation criteria are compared with the contents of the targeted data fields in the input records. If the record does not meet the validation criteria, it can: Be automatically corrected and remain in the application stream Remain in the application stream uncorrected Be removed from the application stream and sent to an exception file area Force the rejection of the entire data block or file to the exception file area Be removed from the application stream and discarded Force the discard of the entire data block or file
Note If the record has not been assigned to a validation expression name, it passes by default.

In all cases, even if the record passes the validation criteria, a message can be sent to the Application Event log or Error and Information log. Using the Customer Defined Statistics Report, you can set up the report to profile record processing by summarizing the number of validation actions performed on records, such as how many records were deleted, corrected, or rejected.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Accessing the Validation Application Definition Pages

785

Accessing the Validation Application Definition Pages

After you open the Mediation Features page, a short menu of links appears at the top of the page with several mediation feature applications. Below this group of links is the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.
Figure 153 Active Mediation Feature Set Drop-down Menu

When you select an option from this drop-down menu, three columns of links appear, including the Validation Application Definitions links.
Figure 154 The Validation Application Definitions Links

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

786

17 - About the Validation Application

When you click a link in this column, the corresponding Validation Application Definitions page opens. These links are found in the Validation Application Definitions column.
Table 8 Validation Application Definitions Links and the Corresponding Pages

Click this link

To Go to the Value Lists Page (Validation Application)

Go to the Table Lookup Value Lists Page (Validation Application)

Go to the Reference Sets Page

Go to the Validation Applications Page

Go to the Validation Expressions Page

Go to the Expression Record Association Page

Go to the Application Expression Association Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Accessing the Validation Application Definition Pages

787

Go to the Validation Expressions Order Page. Use this page to assign the order that validation expressions are processed in the data stream.

Go to the Audit Page (for Validation). Use this page to audit the validation application definition.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

788

17 - About the Validation Application

Defining a Validation Application

Figure 155 Creating a Validation Application Definition

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with Exception Files and Validation

789

Working with Exception Files and Validation

Files, records, and blocks can be excepted on input when GRID parses them or when they pass through the validation application. Excepted data is sent to the exception directory for the source or discarded. Excepted input records can be viewed, edited, and verified using the Exception File Management feature. The corrected files can then be sent to the primary or tertiary directory and returned to the processing stream, held for user disposition, or deleted. Records that are placed in an exception file as a result of the validation process can be viewed or edited using the optional Exception File Editor. GRID adjusts count or length fields affected by exception records removed from the data stream.
Figure 156 Validation Exception File Flow

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

790

17 - About the Validation Application

Working with Validation Expressions

Individual or multiple criteria for validations are defined in validation expressions and all of them are given Validation Expression Names. Specific records within the specified GRID class are assigned to the Validation Expression Names. One or more Validation Expression Names are grouped to define a Validation Application Names. The Validation Expression Builder combines features of the format expression builder with specific operators used exclusively for setting up validation expressions. Validation expressions are used to determine the validity of specified data in a record. Validation actions can be defined to be executed if the specified data is determined to be valid or not valid. Validation expressions are created using the Validation Expression page. A validation expression consists of user-defined criteria used to validate the type or content of data in record fields. Use conditional expressions, or ifthen statements, to validate the record field content. In IFTHEN statements, IF part defines the comparison conditions and THEN defines the action or actions to perform if the comparison is true. Inside the structure of an ifthen statement, you can also place additional conditional statements, which are called nested conditional statements. Conditional expressions can have one or more of these characteristics. Uses IFTHENELSEIFELSE conditional logic to specify multiple conditions Applies AND/OR/NOT logic between multiple statements Applies mathematical calculations on and between fields Evaluates a fields value based on the value of other fields in the record When defining a conditional expression, use: One ifthen statement Zero or more elseifthen statements Zero or one ELSE statement Zero or more nested conditional statements

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with Validation Expressions

791

Using Operators
Expressions are created using operators (or functions). When you click the operators drop-down menu, a menu of available operators appears.
Figure 157 Available Operator Types

On the Validation Expression Page, several operators in this menu are used only with validation, including: Update Statistics for populating user-defined statistic fields in the database which can be used for generating user-defined statistical reports or retrieved using the getStatistics operators Validation Operators for specific field checks Validation Actions for specifying what happens with the data and whether an alarm message is generated Duplicate Record Checking for detecting duplicate data in collection or transmission Another set of operators (an optional feature available only when purchased) is the Bulk Edit Actions set.

References

For more information on format and validation operators, see the GML Developer Reference Guide

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

792

17 - About the Validation Application

Working with Expression Record Associations

After you build your expressions, you must associate records with each expression on the Expression Record Association Page. The logic contained in that expression identifies whether the record is valid or invalid. If records are not associated with an expression, they pass automatically. For instructions on using this page, see "Update the Expression Record Association Page" (18875).

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with Application Expression Associations

793

Working with Application Expression Associations

After you set up validation expressions, you can go to the Application Expression Association Page to assign the validation expressions to validation application IDs. This page lets you: view the available expressions that can be associated with the validation applications view the available validation applications that can be associated with the expressions On this page, you select items by moving from them from a table of available items to a table of associated items. Follow the instructions in the procedure, "Update the Application Expression Association Page" (18879) in this user guide to assign the operators.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

794

17 - About the Validation Application

Working with Validation Expressions Order

The order of validation expressions determines how they are processed in the data stream. The order of validation expressions is important when: The result of one validation expression is considered a higher priority than another The result of one validation expression nullifies the need for another expression to run Validation expressions are dependent on one another for results If you do not assign an order to validation expressions, the system does it by lexicographical order.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with Validation Audits

795

Working with Validation Audits

The Validation audit feature lets you audit a validation definition for potential errors. When you click the Audit Button, the system makes sure that the validation definition contains everything that it requires to process the validation. The audit also makes the expression provisioning available for use in the source or destination application stream. Audit a validation definition whenever you create a new validation definition or update a validation definition. A new or updated validation definition must be successfully audited before it can be used.
Figure 158 The Validation Audit Page

After you run the audit, the audit messages are listed in the Results box and the information in the Last Audited field is updated with the date and time of the latest audit. When a validation audit fails, use the information in the audit messages to help you start troubleshooting the issue.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

796

17 - About the Validation Application

Working with the Duplicate Record Checking Feature

The duplicate record checking feature lets you detect duplicate data in collection or transmission. To set up this feature, you must perform a sequence of tasks on several Data Mediation pages: 1. Go to the Validation Expression Page to set up the duplicate record checking expression using the duplicate record checking operators. Go to the Expression Record Association Page to associate the duplicate record checking expressions with the records. Go to the Application Expression Association Page to associate the expression with a validation application ID. Go to the Create a New Reference Set Wizard to create a reference set, which stores the duplicate check information from previous records, configure the parameters, and set up the pruning schedule. Go to the Validation Application Page to select a reference set for the validation application ID.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Setting Up the Duplicate Record Checking Operators

Use these four duplicate record checking operators in the Duplicate Record Checking menu on the Validation Expression Page to set up duplicate record checking: isDuplicate isDuplicate1 isNotDuplicate isNotDuplicate1

These operators are described in the GML Developer Reference Guide and determine whether a record is a duplicate record, which is a record or event that was previously collected or transmitted. Duplicate records do not have to be identical and they can have different record structures, be from different sources, be of different file formats, or belong to different mediation feature sets. The isDuplicate and isNotDuplicate operators only have one parameter (record_ key); the operators evaluate the key for each record. This key is an expression that identifies the record. It has one or more pieces of information from the record that uniquely characterizes the record, such as a field or set of fields. If this key matches a key in the reference set, then the system determines that this record is a duplicate. Otherwise, the key is added to the reference set for

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with the Duplicate Record Checking Feature

797

subsequent duplicate record checking. This process of evaluating the key for each record is called the duplicate key micro check. Because the system has a limited space for the reference set, it must periodically prune older (expired) record keys to make room for incoming record keys. If the record being evaluated is older than the set of records in the reference set, there is no way to determine if the record is a true duplicate because it is too old. To overcome this problem, the macro check can be used. The isDuplicate1 and isNotDuplicate1 operators have two parameters (reference_key and reference_number); the operators evaluate the key for the record. If it is a duplicate, then it is treated for the micro check. If it is not a duplicate, then the reference number for the record is compared with the reference number, which is typically a date or time value, for the reference set. This reference number value determines the age (or sequence) of the record. When the records are removed from the reference set, the minimum value of this reference number for all records is identified and saved. After the micro check, the system checks to see if the record being evaluated is older than the reference set by comparing the record reference_number with the reference set reference_ number. If the record reference_number is smaller than the record, it is considered older and is treated as a duplicate record. This micro/macro strategy allows efficient duplicate record checking over an extended period of time with minimal impact to computer resources or performance. Only records that pass this macro check are considered to be nonduplicate and their keys are added to the reference set. Using the validation actions, you can specify in the operator how duplicate records are managed (for example, change a field in the record, send the record to the exception file, or delete the duplicate record). For each case, an alarm message can be generated for a log. You perform these validation actions so that the record can be evaluated at a later time by looking in the exception file or viewing the log.
Note Reference numbers must not be negative. Although reference numbers are frequently date and time values, you can also use other numeric values such as sequence numbers. In all cases, however, if the second parameter for the record is smaller than the reference set reference number, then the record is determined to be older than the record information in the reference set.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

798

17 - About the Validation Application

Example of isDuplicate Operator

In this example: The isDuplicate operator is highlighted The record key value is defined as the catenation of these fields: Calling Number, Called Number, Disconnect Date, and Disconnect Time If the record is determined to be a duplicate record, the record is sent to the exception file, a minor alarm message is generated, and the alarm message is sent to the Error and Information log

Example of isDuplicate1 Operator

In this example: The isDuplicate1 operator is highlighted The record key value is defined as the catenation of these fields: Calling Number and Called Number The value compared with the reference number is defined as the disconnect date or time, represented as seconds since 1970. The expressions mathDate and mathTime convert the respective representation of date and time in the record fields into seconds The micro check looks to see if a record key value exists in the reference set. If the record key value does not exist, then the macro check is performed, checking to see if the disconnect date and time value is less than the oldest record in the reference set If the micro or macro check determines that the record is a duplicate, the record is sent to the exception file, a minor alarm message is generated, and the alarm message is sent to the Error and Information log

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with the Duplicate Record Checking Feature

799

Associate the Expression with the Records

After you set up the expressions, you must assign records to the expression on the Expression Record Association Page. This page lets you: view the available expressions that can be associated with the records view the available records that can be associated with the expressions On this page, you select items by moving from them from a table of available items to a table of associated items. Follow the instructions in the procedure, Update the Expression Record Association Page in this user guide to assign the records.

Associate the Expression with a Validation Application ID

The duplicate record checking feature is a function of the validation mediation module and can be performed as part of the collection process (mediation on input), as part of the distribution process (mediation on output), or as part of both. After you set up the expressions, you must assign your expressions to validation application IDs on the Application Expression Association Page. This page lets you: view the available expressions that can be associated with the validation applications view the available validation applications that can be associated with the expressions On this page, you select items by moving from them from a table of available items to a table of associated items. Follow the instructions in the procedure, "Update the Application Expression Association Page" (18879) in this user guide to assign the operators.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

800

17 - About the Validation Application

Create a Reference Set

Using the Create a New Reference Set Wizard, you can configure the parameters and set up the pruning schedule for the duplicate check buffer. Follow the instructions in the procedure, "Create a New Reference Set" (18838) in this user guide to create the reference set. When using this wizard, you must define some significant fields on the Reference Set Parameters screen: Reference Window Interval the minimum time a record must be in the reference set before it can be removed (pruned) Maximum Reference Set Count the expected maximum number of records in the reference set File System (for Reference Sets) the location where the data for the reference set is stored These fields contribute to the size of the reference set. The larger the values are for these fields, the more performance is affected and, consequently, the more resources for memory and disk space are needed. When setting these values, consider: the number of records being processed the amount of available system memory what other Data Mediation applications share memory with this application, such as correlation After filling out the form fields on the Reference Set Parameters screen, go to the Reference Set Pruning Schedule screen, to set up the schedule to removed old (expired) record keys from the reference set. After completing this wizard, you can update the information for the reference set on the "Reference Set Parameters Page" (18839) and "Reference Set Pruning Schedule Page" (18849).

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Working with the Duplicate Record Checking Feature

801

Select a Reference Set for the Validation Application ID

After you create the reference set, go to the Validation Application Page to select the reference set for the validation application ID. A validation application ID can only have one reference set assigned to it; however, the same reference set can be used by several validation application IDs. This reference set is also associated with any sources or destinations that are associated with the validation ID. If the same reference set is assigned to multiple sources or desintations, then only one of these collection or distribution sessions can be active at any time. After you select the reference set for the validation application ID, you can view a summary of the reference set information by placing your cursor on the View icon beside this field.
Figure 159 The Reference Set Information on the Validation Application Page

For instructions on filling out the form fields on this page, see "Validation Application Page" (18857) in this user guide.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

18 Validation Application Definition Application Pages

This section describes the Validation Application Definition pages, including information on: Opening the Validation Application Definitions pages Creating Validation Application Definitions Updating Validation Application Definitions

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Value Lists Page (Validation Application)

805

Value Lists Page (Validation Application)

After you "Open the Value Lists Page" (18806), you can: "Go to a New Value List Page" (18807) "Go to an Existing Value List Page" (18808) "Go to Another Page in the Validation Application" (18809)
Figure 160 Validation Application Value Lists Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description List Name Mediation Feature Set (MFS)

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

806

18 Validation Application Pages

Open the Value Lists Page

If you are already working on the validation application, you can stay within it by following the instructions to "Go to Another Page in the Validation Application" (18809) to open this page. To open the Value Lists page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Value Lists link in the Validation Application Definitions section. The Value Lists page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to a New Value List Page

807

Go to a New Value List Page

To go to a new Value List page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Value Lists Page" (18806). Click the New icon.

A new Value List page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

808

18 Validation Application Pages

Go to an Existing Value List Page

To go to an existing Value List page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Value Lists Page" (18806). Click the List Name of the value list in the table. The Value List page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to Another Page in the Validation Application

809

Go to Another Page in the Validation Application

To go to another page in the validation application: 1. 2. Open a validation application page. Select one of these pages from the Go drop-down menu: Value Lists Table Lookup Value Lists Reference Sets Validation Applications Validation Expressions Expression Record Association Application Expression Association Validation Expressions Order Audit

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Value List Page (Validation Application)

811

Value List Page (Validation Application)

After you "Open a New Value List Page" (18813), you can: "Create a Value List" (18815) "Go to Another Page in the Validation Application" (18809) After you "Open an Existing Value List Page" (18814), you can: "Update a Value List" (18816) "Go to Another Page in the Validation Application" (18809) Create a value list before specifying the Value List Name as an operator such as an inList or a notInList comparison operator in an expression on the Validation Expression page.
Figure 161 Value List Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

812

18 Validation Application Pages

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description List Name Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Value

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open a New Value List Page

813

Open a New Value List Page

If you are already working on the validation application, you can stay within it by following the instructions to "Go to Another Page in the Validation Application" (18809) to open this page. To open a new Value List page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Value Lists link in the Validation Application Definitions section. The Value Lists page opens. Click the New icon.

4.

A new Value List page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

814

18 Validation Application Pages

Open an Existing Value List Page

To open an existing Value List page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Value Lists link in the Validation Application Definitions section. The Value Lists page opens. Click the List Name of the value list in the table. The Value List page opens.

4.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a Value List

815

Create a Value List

To create a value list: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Value List Page" (18813). Fill out these form fields: List Name Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Description 3. 4. To add a value, follow the instructions to "Add a Value" (18817). Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

816

18 Validation Application Pages

Update a Value List

To update a value list: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Value List Page" (18814). Fill out this form field: Description 3. 4. 5. To add a value, follow the instructions to "Add a Value" (18817). To update a value, follow the instructions to "Update a Value" (18818). Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Add a Value

817

Add a Value
To add a value: 1. Click the New icon.

The Value form appears. 2. Fill out this form field: Value 3. Click Update.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

818

18 Validation Application Pages

Update a Value
To update a value: 1. 2. Click the icon beside the value in the table. The Value form appears. Update this form field: Value 3. Click Update.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Table Lookup Value Lists Page (Validation Application)

819

Table Lookup Value Lists Page (Validation Application)

After you "Open the Table Lookup Value Lists Page" (18820), you can: "Go to a New Table Lookup Value List Page" (18821) "Go to an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page" (18822) "Go to Another Page in the Validation Application" (18809)
Figure 162 Validation Application Table Lookup Value Lists Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description List Name Mediation Feature Set (MFS)

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

820

18 Validation Application Pages

Open the Table Lookup Value Lists Page

If you are already working on the validation application, you can stay within it by following the instructions to "Go to Another Page in the Validation Application" (18809) to open this page. To open the Table Lookup Value Lists page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Table Lookup Value Lists link in the Validation Application Definitions section. The Table Lookup Value Lists page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to a New Table Lookup Value List Page

821

Go to a New Table Lookup Value List Page

To go to a new Table Lookup Value List page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Table Lookup Value Lists Page" (18 820). Click the New icon.

2.

A new Table Lookup Value List page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

822

18 Validation Application Pages

Go to an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page

To go to an existing Table Lookup Value List page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Table Lookup Value Lists Page" (18 820). Click the List Name of the table lookup value list in the table. The Table Lookup Value List page opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Table Lookup Value List Page (Validation Application)

823

Table Lookup Value List Page (Validation Application)

After you "Open a New Table Lookup Value List Page" (18825), you can: "Create a Table Lookup Value List" (18827) "Go to Another Page in the Validation Application" (18809) After you "Open an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page" (18826), you can: "Update a Table Lookup Value List" (18828) "Go to Another Page in the Validation Application" (18809) After you set up a table containing sets of key value and table value pairs, they can be used by operators such as the table and dateTable mapping operator in expressions on the Validation Expression page.
Figure 163 Table Lookup Value List Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

824

18 Validation Application Pages

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description Key Value List Name Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Table Value

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open a New Table Lookup Value List Page

825

Open a New Table Lookup Value List Page

If you are already working on the validation application, you can stay within it by following the instructions to "Go to Another Page in the Validation Application" (18809) to open this page. To go to a new Table Lookup Value List page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.
\

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Table Lookup Value Lists link in the Validation Application Definitions section. The Table Lookup Value Lists page opens. Click the New icon.

4.

A new Table Lookup Value List page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

826

18 Validation Application Pages

Open an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page

To go to an existing Table Lookup Value List page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click Table Lookup Value Lists in the Validation Application Definitions section. The Table Lookup Value Lists page opens. Click the List Name of the table lookup value list in the table. The Table Lookup Value List page opens.

4.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a Table Lookup Value List

827

Create a Table Lookup Value List

To create a Table Lookup Value List: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Table Lookup Value List Page" (18825). Fill out these form fields: List Name Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Description 3. 4. To add a value, follow the instructions to "Add a Value" (18829). Click Submit.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

828

18 Validation Application Pages

Update a Table Lookup Value List

To update a table lookup value list: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Table Lookup Value List Page" (18826). Update this form field: Description 3. 4. 5. To add a value, follow the instructions to "Add a Value" (18829). To update a value, follow the instructions to "Update a Value" (18830). Click Submit.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Add a Value

829

Add a Value
To add a value: 1. Click the New icon.

The Value form appears. 2. Fill out these form field: Key Value Table Value 3. Click Update.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

830

18 Validation Application Pages

Update a Value
To update a value: 1. 2. Click the icon beside the value in the table. The Value form appears. Update these form field: Key Value Table Value 3. Click Update.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Reference Sets Page

831

Reference Sets Page

After you "Open the Reference Sets Page" (18832), you can: "Go to the Reference Set Summary Page" (18833) "Go to the Create a New Reference Set Wizard" (18834) "Go to Another Page in the Validation Application" (18809)
Figure 164 Reference Sets Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description Reference Set Name

References

"Working with the Duplicate Record Checking Feature" (17796) in the Mediation Features User Guide

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

832

18 Validation Application Pages

Open the Reference Sets Page

If you are already working on the validation application, you can stay within it by following the instructions to "Go to Another Page in the Validation Application" (18809). To open the Reference Sets page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Reference Sets link in the Validation Application Definitions section.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to the Reference Set Summary Page

833

Go to the Reference Set Summary Page

To go to the Reference Set Summary page: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Reference Sets Page" (18832). Click the Reference Set Name in the table. The Reference Set Summary page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

834

18 Validation Application Pages

Go to the Create a New Reference Set Wizard

To go to the Create a New Reference Set Wizard: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Reference Sets Page" (18832). Click the New icon.

The Create a New Reference Set Wizard opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a New Reference Set Wizard

835

Create a New Reference Set Wizard

After you "Open the Create a New Reference Set Wizard" (18837), you can: "Create a New Reference Set" (18838) "Go to Another Page in the Validation Application" (18809)
Figure 165 Create a New Reference Set Wizard Screen One

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Check Secondary Files? Check Tertiary Files? Description File System (for Reference Sets) Maximum Reference Set Count Reference Key Length Reference Key Pad Reference Set Name Reference Window Interval Root Node Count Update Record? Update Time Stamp?

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

836

18 Validation Application Pages

Figure 166 Create a New Reference Set Wizard Screen Two

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: and minutes (for Reference Sets) at hours (for reference sets) Days of Each Week Dates in the Selected Month Description in months on days Reference Set Name

References

"Working with the Duplicate Record Checking Feature" (17796) in the Mediation Features User Guide

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open the Create a New Reference Set Wizard

837

Open the Create a New Reference Set Wizard

If you are already working on the validation application, you can stay within it by following the instructions to "Go to Another Page in the Validation Application" (18809) to open this page. To open the Create a New Reference Set wizard: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Reference Sets link in the Validation Application Definitions section. Click the New icon.

4.

The Create a New Reference Set wizard opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

838

18 Validation Application Pages

Create a New Reference Set

To create a new reference set: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Create a New Reference Set Wizard" (18837). Fill out these form fields at the top of the page: Reference Set Name Description Reference Window Interval Maximum Reference Set Count Reference Key Length Reference Key Pad 3. Fill out these form fields in the Reference Set Configuration section: Check Secondary Files? Update Record? File System (for Reference Sets) Check Tertiary Files? Update Time Stamp? Root Node Count 4. 5. Click Next. The wizard opens the Reference Set Pruning Schedule screen. Fill out these form fields: at hours and minutes on days in months Description 6. If you selected Selected Days in the Month for in months, designate the specific days or dates by filling out these form fields: Days of Each Week Dates in the Selected Month 7. Click Finish.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Reference Set Parameters Page

839

Reference Set Parameters Page

After you "Open the Reference Set Parameters Page" (18841), you can: "Update the Reference Set Parameters Page" (18842) "Go to Another Page in the Mediation Feature Set" (14571)
Figure 167 Reference Set Parameters Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Check Secondary Files? Check Tertiary Files? Description File System (for Reference Sets) Maximum Reference Set Count Reference Key Length Reference Key Pad Reference Set Name

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

840

18 Validation Application Pages

Reference Window Interval Root Node Count Update Record? Update Time Stamp?

References

"Working with the Duplicate Record Checking Feature" (17796) in the Mediation Features User Guide

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open the Reference Set Parameters Page

841

Open the Reference Set Parameters Page

To open the Reference Set Parameters page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Reference Sets link in the Validation Application Definitions section. Click the Reference Set Name in the table. The Reference Set Summary page opens. Click the Parameters link. The Reference Set Parameters page opens.

4.

5.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

842

18 Validation Application Pages

Update the Reference Set Parameters Page

To update the Reference Set Parameters page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Reference Set Parameters Page" (18 841). Update these form fields at the top of the page: Description Reference Window Interval Maximum Reference Set Count Reference Key Length Reference Key Pad 3. Update these form fields in the Reference Set Configuration section: Check Secondary Files? Update Record? File System (for Reference Sets) Check Tertiary Files? Update Time Stamp? Root Node Count 4. Click Submit.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Reference Set Summary Page

843

Reference Set Summary Page

After you "Open the Reference Set Summary Page" (18845), you can: "Go to the Reference Set Parameters Page" (18846) "Go to the Reference Set Pruning Schedule Page" (18847) "Go to Another Page in the Validation Application" (18809)
Figure 168 Reference Set Summary Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: at hours and minutes Check Secondary Files? Check Tertiary Files? Description File System (for Reference Sets) in months Maximum Reference Set Count on days Reference Key Length Reference Key Pad Reference Window Interval

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

844

18 Validation Application Pages

Root Node Count Update Record? Update Time Stamp?

References

"Working with the Duplicate Record Checking Feature" (17796) in the Mediation Features User Guide

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open the Reference Set Summary Page

845

Open the Reference Set Summary Page

If you are already working on the validation application, you can stay within it by following the instructions to "Go to Another Page in the Validation Application" (18809) to open this page. To open the Reference Set Summary page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Reference Sets link in the Validation Application Definitions section. Click the Reference Set Name in the table. The Reference Set Summary page opens.

4.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

846

18 Validation Application Pages

Go to the Reference Set Parameters Page

To go to the Reference Set Parameters page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Reference Set Summary Page" (18 845). Click the Parameters link in the table. The Reference Set Parameters page opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to the Reference Set Pruning Schedule Page

847

Go to the Reference Set Pruning Schedule Page

To go to the Reference Set Pruning Schedule page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Reference Set Summary Page" (18 845). Click the Pruning Schedule link. The Reference Set Pruning Schedule page opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Reference Set Pruning Schedule Page

849

Reference Set Pruning Schedule Page

After you "Open the Reference Set Pruning Schedule Page" (18850), you can: "Update the Reference Set Pruning Schedule Page" (18851) "Go to Another Page in the Validation Application" (18809)
Figure 169 Reference Set Pruning Schedule Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: and minutes (for Reference Sets) at hours (for reference sets) Days of Each Week Dates in the Selected Month Description in months on days Reference Set Name

References

"Working with the Duplicate Record Checking Feature" (17796) in the Mediation Features User Guide

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

850

18 Validation Application Pages

Open the Reference Set Pruning Schedule Page

If you are already working on the validation application, you can stay within it by following the instructions to "Go to Another Page in the Validation Application" (18809) to open this page. To open the Reference Set Pruning Schedule page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Reference Sets link in the Validation Application Definitions section. Click the Reference Set Name in the table. The Reference Set Summary page opens. Click the Pruning Schedule link. The Reference Set Pruning Schedule page opens.

4.

5.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Update the Reference Set Pruning Schedule Page

851

Update the Reference Set Pruning Schedule Page

To update the Reference Set Pruning Schedule page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Reference Set Pruning Schedule Page" (18850). Update these form fields at the top of the page: at hours and minutes on days in months Description 3. If you selected Selected Days in the Month for in months, designate the specific days or dates by filling out these form fields: Days of Each Week Dates in the Selected Month 4. Click Submit.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Validation Applications Page

853

Validation Applications Page

After you "Open the Validation Applications Page" (18854), you can: "Go to a New Validation Application Page" (18855) "Go to an Existing Validation Application Page" (18856) "Go to Another Page in the Validation Application" (18809)
Figure 170 Validation Applications Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description File Format Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Name Reference Set

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

854

18 Validation Application Pages

Open the Validation Applications Page

If you are already working on the validation application, you can stay within it by following the instructions to "Go to Another Page in the Validation Application" (18809) to open this page. To open the Validation Applications page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Validation Applications links in the Validation Application Definitions section. The Validations Applications page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to a New Validation Application Page

855

Go to a New Validation Application Page

To go to a new Validation Application page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Validation Applications Page" (18 854). Click the New icon.

2.

A New Validation Application page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

856

18 Validation Application Pages

Go to an Existing Validation Application Page

To go to an existing Validation Applications page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Validation Applications Page" (18 854). Click the Name of the validation application in the table. The Validation Application page opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Validation Application Page

857

Validation Application Page

After you "Open a New Validation Application Page" (18859), you can: "Create a Validation Application" (18861) "Go to Another Page in the Validation Application" (18809) After you "Open an Existing Validation Application Page" (18860), you can: "Update a Validation Application" (18862) "Go to Another Page in the Validation Application" (18809)
Figure 171 Validation Application Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

858

18 Validation Application Pages

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Description File Format Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Name Reference Set Name

These elements are also available when you view the reference set information by placing your cursor on the View icon. at hours and minutes Check Secondary Files? Check Tertiary Files? Description File System (for Reference Sets) in months Maximum Reference Set Count on days Reference Key Length Reference Key Pad Reference Window Interval Root Node Count Update Record? Update Time Stamp?

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open a New Validation Application Page

859

Open a New Validation Application Page

To open a new Validation Application page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click Validation Applications in the Validation Application Definitions section. The Validation Applications page opens. Click the New icon.

4.

A new Validation Application page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

860

18 Validation Application Pages

Open an Existing Validation Application Page

If you are already working on the validation application, you can stay within it by following the instructions to "Go to Another Page in the Validation Application" (18809) to open this page. To open an existing Validation Application page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click Validation Applications in the Validation Application Definitions section. The Validation Applications page opens. Click the Name of the validation application in the table. The Validation Application page opens.

4.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a Validation Application

861

Create a Validation Application

To create a validation application: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open a New Validation Application Page" (18 859). Fill out these form fields at the top of the page: Name File Format Description 3. 4. 5. To select a Reference Set Name, select a name from the drop-down menu. To view the Reference Set information, place you cursor on the View icon. Click Submit.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

862

18 Validation Application Pages

Update a Validation Application

To update a validation application: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Validation Application Page" (18860). Fill out this form field at the top of the page: Description 3. 4. To select a Reference Set Name, select a name from the drop-down menu. To view the Reference Set information, place you cursor on the Glasses icon. Click Submit.

2.

5.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Validation Expressions Page

863

Validation Expressions Page

After you "Open the Validation Expressions Page" (18864), you can: "Go to a New Validation Expression Page" (18865) "Go to an Existing Validation Expression Page" (18866) "Go to Another Page in the Validation Application" (18809)
Figure 172 Validation Expressions Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Expression (for Secondary Key Mappings) Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Name Record Type

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

864

18 Validation Application Pages

Open the Validation Expressions Page

If you are already working on the validation application, you can stay within it by following the instructions to "Go to Another Page in the Validation Application" (18809) to open this page. To open the Validation Expressions page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Validation Expressions link in the Validation Application Definitions section. The Validation Expressions page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Go to a New Validation Expression Page

865

Go to a New Validation Expression Page

To go to the a New Validation Expression page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Validation Expressions Page" (18 864). Click the New icon.

2.

The New Validation Expression page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

866

18 Validation Application Pages

Go to an Existing Validation Expression Page

To go to an existing Validation Expression page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Validation Expressions Page" (18 864). Click the Name of the validation expression in the table. The Validation Expression page opens.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Validation Expression Page

867

Validation Expression Page

After you "Open a New Validation Expression Page" (18869), you can: "Create a New Validation Expression" (18871) "Go to Another Page in the Validation Application" (18809) After you "Open an Existing Validation Expression Page" (18870), you can: "Update a Validation Expression" (18872) "Go to Another Page in the Validation Application" (18809) The Value List page and Table Lookup Value List page must be completed before they can be used on the Validation Expression page.
Figure 173 Validation Expression Page

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

868

18 Validation Application Pages

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Default Execution Order Expression (for Validation) Justification Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Padding Record Type Validation Expression

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Open a New Validation Expression Page

869

Open a New Validation Expression Page

To open a New Validation Expression page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Validation Expressions links in the Validation Application Definitions section. The Validation Expressions page opens. Click the New icon.

4.

The New Validation Expression Page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

870

18 Validation Application Pages

Open an Existing Validation Expression Page

If you are already working on the validation application, you can stay within it by following the instructions to "Go to Another Page in the Validation Application" (18809) to open this page. To open an existing Validation Expression page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click Validation Expressions in the Validation Application Definitions section. The Validation Expressions page opens. Click the Name of the validation expression in the table. The Validation Expression page opens.

4.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Create a New Validation Expression

871

Create a New Validation Expression

To create a new validation expression: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Create a New Validation Expression" (18871). Fill out these form fields: Validation Expression Record Type Justification Padding Default Execution Order 3. 4. Build an expression using the expressions listed in the drop-down menu. Click Submit.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

872

18 Validation Application Pages

Update a Validation Expression

To update a validation expression: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open an Existing Validation Expression Page" (18870). Update these form fields: Validation Expression Record Type Justification Padding Default Execution Order 3. 4. Build an expression using the expressions listed in the drop-down menu. Click Submit.

2.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Expression Record Association Page

873

Expression Record Association Page

After you "Open the Expression Record Association Page" (18874), you can: "Update the Expression Record Association Page" (18875) "Go to Another Page in the Validation Application" (18809)
Figure 174 Expression Record Association Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Display by File Format Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Name Record Names Record Type Validation Expression Names

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

874

18 Validation Application Pages

Open the Expression Record Association Page

If you are already working on the validation application, you can stay within it by following the instructions to "Go to Another Page in the Validation Application" (18809) to open this page. To open the Expression Record Association page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Expression Record Association link in the Validation Application Definitions section.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Update the Expression Record Association Page

875

Update the Expression Record Association Page

To update the Expression Record Association page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Expression Record Association Page" (18874). Update these form fields at the top of the page: File Format Record Type 3. To assign expressions to records, fill out this form field: Display by 4. If you selected Validation Expression Names, select an option from the Validation Expression Names drop-down menu. If you selected Record Names, select an option from the Record Names drop-down menu. To move an item from one table to the other table, click the icon beside the expression or record name. Click Submit.

2.

5.

6.

7.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Application Expression Association Page

877

Application Expression Association Page

After you "Open the Application Expression Association Page" (18878), you can: "Update the Application Expression Association Page" (18879) "Go to Another Page in the Validation Application" (18809)
Figure 175 Application Expression Association Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Display by File Format Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Name Validation Name Validation Expression Names

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

878

18 Validation Application Pages

Open the Application Expression Association Page

If you are already working on the validation application, you can stay within it by following the instructions to "Go to Another Page in the Validation Application" (18809) to open this page. To open the Application Expression Association page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Application Expression Association link in the Validation Application Definitions section.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Update the Application Expression Association Page

879

Update the Application Expression Association Page

To update the Application Expression Association page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Application Expression Association Page" (18878). Update this form field at the top of the page: File Format 3. To assign expressions to validation applications, fill out this form field: Display by 4. If you selected Validation Application Names, select an option from the Validation Name drop-down menu. If you selected Validation Expression Names, select an option from the Validation Expression Names drop-down menu. To move an item from one table to the other table, click the icon beside the expression or record name. Click Submit.

2.

5.

6.

7.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Validation Expressions Order Page

881

Validation Expressions Order Page

This page allows you to rearrange the order of the validation expression execution order. This execution order is primarily based on the value in the Order field and secondarily on the Expression Name field, which organizes the fields in lexicographical order. After you "Open the Validation Expressions Order Page" (18882), you can: "Update the Validation Expressions Order Page" (18883) "Go to Another Page in the Validation Application" (18809)
Figure 176 Validation Expressions Order Page

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Expression Name Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Validation Name New Order Order Record Type Name

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

882

18 Validation Application Pages

Open the Validation Expressions Order Page

If you are already working on the validation application, you can stay within it by following the instructions to "Go to Another Page in the Validation Application" (18809) to open this page. To open the Validation Expressions Order page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Validation Expressions Order link in the Validation Application Definitions section. The Validation Expressions Order page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Update the Validation Expressions Order Page

883

Update the Validation Expressions Order Page

To update the Validation Expressions Order page: 1. Follow the instructions to "Open the Validation Expressions Order Page" (18882). Fill out these form fields: Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Validation Name Record Type 3. To update the expression name, click the icon for the expression name in the table. Update this form field: New Order 5. 6. Click Update. Click Submit.

2.

4.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Audit Page (for Validation)

885

Audit Page (for Validation)

After you "Open the Audit Page" (18886), you can: "Audit the Validation" (18887) "Go to Another Page in the Validation Application" (18809)
Figure 177 Audit Page (for Validation)

Elements
These elements are on this page and are described in the Data Dictionary: Audited? Description Expression Name File Format Last Audited Mediation Feature Set (MFS) Validation Name Order Record Type Reference Set Name Results

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

886

18 Validation Application Pages

Open the Audit Page

If you are already working on the validation application, you can stay within it by following the instructions to "Go to Another Page in the Validation Application" (18809) to open this page. To open the Audit page: 1. Click Mediation Features on the Data Mediation System Launch page. The Mediation Features page opens.

2.

Select the mediation feature set from the Active Mediation Feature Set drop-down menu.

3.

Click the Audit link in the Validation Application Definitions section. The Audit page opens.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Audit the Validation

887

Audit the Validation

To audit the validation: 1. 2. Follow the instructions to "Open the Audit Page" (18886). Fill out these form fields: Validation Name 3. To view the Reference Set information, place your cursor over the View icon. Click Audit.

4.

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

Index
A
application expression associations 793 application GUI structure checks 537 application manager 114 application stream 65, 114 ASCII 527 error messages 548 file format 551 evaluation order 16 event records 217 combining 218 exception files 789 exception handling 115 expression record associations 792 external database access definitions 6, 9 extraction 110

B
BCD 527 BINARY 527 BIT 528 bit stuff sequence 63 block descriptor word 61 block header/trailers 542 block headers/trailers guidelines 542 transferring 58 blocking 59 building expressions 10 building records 540

F
field 534 field filters 706 field input 535 field mapping 17 field mappings 17 fields 534 file format 546 file format & structure associations 547 file format conversion 105 setting up 108 file format conversions 116 types 110 file format definition auditing 548 troubleshooting 549 file format definition pages 523 file formats 522, 546 file header/trailers 544 file headers and block headers filtering 720 file headers/trailers guidelines 544 transferring 58 file structures 536 filter application 716 defining 718 filter applications auditing 721 filter test tool 719

C
consulting services 520 control action fields 222 control data fields 222 core record 112 corfilter 226 correlation conversion 210 correlation definitions installing 220 correlation file conversions 213 correlation IDs 215 correlation mapping 221 correlation rules 219 defining 216 correlation store conversions 212 cross-level mappings 111, 112

D
data field types 527 defaults 2 delete bytes from the beginning 63 dummy records 113 duplicate record 796 duplicate record checking feature 796 duplicate record checking operators setting up 796

G
generic record conversion 110 globals 3 grid 529 GRID and exception files 531 grid failure 549 GRID Field Attributes 532 grid field attributes 532 grid file format defining 526 GRID on collection 531 GRID on transmission 531

E
EBCDIC 528 end of block sequence 61 end of file sequence 63 end-of-record sequence 62

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

H
harvesting 219, 224 Helvetica italic x

pass action feature 713 precedence order 2

R
record blocking 59 record filters 708 record mappings 18 record structure mapping 62 record-to-module mappings 19 record-to-record mappings 18 reference number, 797 reference set 796 reference sets creating 800 regular modules naming 539 run time errors 549

I
ifthen expression 12 ifthenelse expression 12 incomplete record action 219 incomplete record timeout 219 isDuplicate operator example 798 isDuplicate1 operator example 798

J
justification 21

L
local files 7

S
search application 710 defining 712 search applications auditing 714 search files naming 715 search/filter applications 709 secondary keys 13 source upgrades 521 special filters 708 special modules 540 naming 540 ordering 540

M
macro check 797 mappings 16 mediation feature sets 530 micro check 797 module mappings 20 module supports 541 modules 112, 539 module-to-module mappings 20 multiple modules 539 multiple record structures 537 multiple secondary keys 14

T
table lookup value lists 5 tiers 536, 542 triggers 15

N
nested conditional statements 790 normalization 110

V O
odbc configuration files 7 Open Database Connectivity Software 7 operators 791 output file management 223 output record management 225 validation application defining 788 validation application definition 785 validation audits 795 validation expressions 790 validation expressions order 794 value lists 4

P
package auditing 64 setting up 57 package manager application 54 Packaging 53 padding 21

W
wildcard characters 707

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30

CSGDM-10.0-MFUG-2004-04-30